Project Gutenberg’s First Six Books of the Elements of Euclid,

by John Casey

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
using this eBook.

Title: The First Six Books of the Elements of Euclid

Subtitle: And Propositions I.-XXI. of Book XI., and an

Appendix on the Cylinder, Sphere, Cone, etc.,

Author: John Casey

Author: Euclid

Release Date: April 14, 2007 [eBook #21076]

[Most recently updated: July 18, 2022]

Language: English

Character set encoding: UTF-8

Produced by Joshua Hutchinson, Keith Edkins and the

Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
(This file was produced from images from the Cornell University
Library: Historical Mathematics Monographs collection.)
Revised by Richard Tonsing.

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ELEMENTS OF EUCLID ***

 Production Note

Cornell University Library produced this volume to replace the

irreparably deteriorated original. It was scanned using Xerox
software and equipment at 600 dots per inch resolution and com-
pressed prior to storage using CCITT Group 4 compression. The
digital data were used to create Cornell’s replacement volume
on paper that meets the ANSI Standard Z39.48-1984. The produc-
tion of this volume was supported in part by the Commission on
Preservation and Access and the Xerox Corporation. Digital
file copyright by Cornell University Library 1991.

Transcriber’s Note: The Index has been regenerated to fit the pagination of this edition. Despite
the author’s stated hope that “few misprints have escaped detection” there were several, which
have here been corrected and noted at the end of the text.

CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY

THE EVAN WILHELM EVANS

MATHEMATICAL SEMINARY LIBRARY

THE GIFT OF
LUCIEN AUGUSTUS WAIT

.......................................................................
THE ELEMENTS OF EUCLID.
 NOW READY

Price 3s.
A TREATISE ON ELEMENTARY TRIGONOMETRY,
With Numerous Examples and Questions for Examination.

Third Edition, Revised and Enlarged, Price 3s. 6d., Cloth.

A SEQUEL TO THE FIRST SIX BOOKS OF THE
ELEMENTS OF EUCLID,
Containing an Easy Introduction to Modern Geometry:
With numerous Examples.

Third Edition, Price 4s. 6d.; or in two parts, each 2s. 6d.
THE ELEMENTS OF EUCLID, BOOKS I.—VI., AND
PROPOSITIONS I.—XXI., OF BOOK XI.;
Together with an Appendix on the Cylinder, Sphere,
Cone, &c.: with
Copious Annotations & numerous Exercises.

Price 6s.
A KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN THE FIRST SIX
BOOKS OF CASEY’S ELEMENTS OF EUCLID.

Price 7s. 6d.

A TREATISE ON THE ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY OF
THE POINT, LINE, CIRCLE, & CONIC SECTIONS,
Containing an Account of its most recent Extensions,
With numerous Examples.

DUBLIN: HODGES, FIGGIS, & CO.

LONDON: LONGMANS & CO.
 THE FIRST SIX BOOKS
OF THE

ELEMENTS OF EUCLID,
AND

PROPOSITIONS I.-XXI. OF BOOK XI.,

AND AN

APPENDIX ON THE CYLINDER, SPHERE,

CONE, ETC.,
WITH

COPIOUS ANNOTATIONS AND NUMEROUS EXERCISES.

BY
J O H N C A S E Y, LL. D., F. R. S.,
FELLOW OF THE ROYAL UNIVERSITY OF IRELAND;
MEMBER OF COUNCIL, ROYAL IRISH ACADEMY;
MEMBER OF THE MATHEMATICAL SOCIETIES OF LONDON AND FRANCE;
AND PROFESSOR OF THE HIGHER MATHEMATICS AND OF
MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS IN THE CATHOLIC UNIVERSITY OF IRELAND.

THIRD EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED.

DUBLIN: HODGES, FIGGIS, & CO., GRAFTON-ST.
LONDON: LONGMANS, GREEN, & CO.
1885.
 DUBLIN
PRINTED AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS,
BY PONSONBY AND WELDRICK
 PREFACE.

This edition of the Elements of Euclid, undertaken at the request of the prin-
cipals of some of the leading Colleges and Schools of Ireland, is intended to
supply a want much felt by teachers at the present day—the production of a
work which, while giving the unrivalled original in all its integrity, would also
contain the modern conceptions and developments of the portion of Geometry
over which the Elements extend. A cursory examination of the work will show
that the Editor has gone much further in this latter direction than any of his
predecessors, for it will be found to contain, not only more actual matter than
is given in any of theirs with which he is acquainted, but also much of a special
character, which is not given, so far as he is aware, in any former work on the
subject. The great extension of geometrical methods in recent times has made
such a work a necessity for the student, to enable him not only to read with ad-
vantage, but even to understand those mathematical writings of modern times
which require an accurate knowledge of Elementary Geometry, and to which it
is in reality the best introduction.
In compiling his work the Editor has received invaluable assistance from the
late Rev. Professor Townsend, s.f.t.c.d. The book was rewritten and con-
siderably altered in accordance with his suggestions, and to that distinguished
Geometer it is largely indebted for whatever merit it possesses.
The Questions for Examination in the early part of the First Book are in-
tended as specimens, which the teacher ought to follow through the entire work.
Every person who has had experience in tuition knows well the importance of
such examinations in teaching Elementary Geometry.
The Exercises, of which there are over eight hundred, have been all selected
with great care. Those in the body of each Book are intended as applications of
Euclid’s Propositions. They are for the most part of an elementary character,
and may be regarded as common property, nearly every one of them having
appeared already in previous collections. The Exercises at the end of each
Book are more advanced; several are due to the late Professor Townsend, some
are original, and a large number have been taken from two important French
works—Catalan’s Théorèmes et Problèmes de Géométrie Elémentaire, and
the Traité de Géométrie, by Rouché and De Comberousse.
The second edition has been thoroughly revised and greatly enlarged. The
new matter includes several alternative proofs, important examination questions
on each of the books, an explanation of the ratio of incommensurable quantities,
the first twenty-one propositions of Book XI., and an Appendix on the properties
of the Prism, Pyramids, Cylinder, Sphere, and Cone.
The present Edition has been very carefully read throughout, and it is hoped
that few misprints have escaped detection.
The Editor is glad to find from the rapid sale of former editions (each 3000
copies) of his Book, and its general adoption in schools, that it is likely to

i
accomplish the double object with which it was written, viz. to supply students
with a Manual that will impart a thorough knowledge of the immortal work
of the great Greek Geometer, and introduce them, at the same time, to some
of the most important conceptions and developments of the Geometry of the
present day.

JOHN CASEY.

86, South Circular-road, Dublin.

November, 1885.

ii
Contents

Introduction, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

BOOK I.
Theory of Angles, Triangles, Parallel Lines, and parallelograms., . . . . . . . 2
Definitions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Propositions i.–xlviii., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Questions for Examination, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Exercises, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

BOOK II.
Theory of Rectangles, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Definitions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Propositions i.–xiv., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Questions for Examination, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Exercises, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

BOOK III.
Theory of the Circle, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Definitions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Propositions i.–xxxvii., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Questions for Examination, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Exercises, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

BOOK IV.
Inscription and Circumscription of Triangles and of Regular Polygons in and
about Circles, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Definitions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Propositions i.–xvi., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Questions for Examination, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Exercises, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

BOOK V.
Theory of Proportion, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

iii
 Definitions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Introduction, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Propositions i.–xxv., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Questions for Examination, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Exercises, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

BOOK VI.
Application of the Theory of Proportion, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Definitions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Propositions i.–xxxiii., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Questions for Examination, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

BOOK XI.
Theory of Planes, Coplanar Lines, and Solid Angles, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Definitions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Propositions i.–xxi., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Exercises, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

APPENDIX.
Prism, Pyramid, Cylinder, Sphere, and Cone, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Definitions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Propositions i.–vii., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Exercises, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

NOTES.
A.—Modern theory of parallel lines, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
B.—Legendre’s proof of Euclid, i., xxxii., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
,, Hamilton’s ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
C.—To inscribe a regular polygon of seventeen sides in a circle—Ampere’s
solution simplified, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
D.—To find two mean proportionals between two given lines—Philo’s so-
lution, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
,, Newton’s solution, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
E.—Mc Cullagh’s proof of the minimum property of Philo’s line, . . . . . . 200
F.—On the trisection of an angle by the ruler and compass, . . . . . . . . 201
G.—On the quadrature of the circle, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Conclusion, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

iv
 THE ELEMENTS OF EUCLID.

INTRODUCTION.
Geometry is the Science of figured Space. Figured Space is of one, two, or three
dimensions, according as it consists of lines, surfaces, or solids. The boundaries
of solids are surfaces; of surfaces, lines; and of lines, points. Thus it is the
province of Geometry to investigate the properties of solids, of surfaces, and
of the figures described on surfaces. The simplest of all surfaces is the plane,
and that department of Geometry which is occupied with the lines and curves
drawn on a plane is called Plane Geometry; that which demonstrates the prop-
erties of solids, of curved surfaces, and the figures described on curved surfaces,
is Geometry of Three Dimensions. The simplest lines that can be drawn on a
plane are the right line and circle, and the study of the properties of the point,
the right line, and the circle, is the introduction to Geometry, of which it forms
an extensive and important department. This is the part of Geometry on which
the oldest Mathematical Book in existence, namely, Euclid’s Elements, is writ-
ten, and is the subject of the present volume. The conic sections and other
curves that can be described on a plane form special branches, and complete
the divisions of this, the most comprehensive of all the Sciences. The student
will find in Chasles’ Aperçu Historique a valuable history of the origin and the
development of the methods of Geometry.

In the following work, when figures are not drawn, the student should con-
struct them from the given directions. The Propositions of Euclid will be printed
in larger type, and will be referred to by Roman numerals enclosed in brackets.
Thus [III. xxxii.] will denote the 32nd Proposition of the 3rd Book. The num-
ber of the Book will be given only when different from that under which the
reference occurs. The general and the particular enunciation of every Propo-
sition will be given in one. By omitting the letters enclosed in parentheses we
have the general enunciation, and by reading them, the particular. The anno-
tations will be printed in smaller type. The following symbols will be used in
them:— J
Circle will be denoted by
Triangle ,, △
Parallelogram ,,
Parallel lines ,, ∥
Perpendicular ,, ⊥
In addition to these we shall employ the usual symbols +, −, &c. of Algebra,
and also the sign of congruence, namely ≡. This symbol has been introduced
by the illustrious Gauss.

1
 BOOK I.
THEORY OF ANGLES, TRIANGLES, PARALLEL LINES, AND
PARALLELOGRAMS.

DEFINITIONS.

The Point.

i. A point is that which has position but not dimensions.

A geometrical magnitude which has three dimensions, that is, length, breadth, and thick-
ness, is a solid; that which has two dimensions, such as length and breadth, is a surface; and
that which has but one dimension is a line. But a point is neither a solid, nor a surface, nor
a line; hence it has no dimensions—that is, it has neither length, breadth, nor thickness.

The Line.

ii. A line is length without breadth.

A line is space of one dimension. If it had any breadth, no matter how small, it would
be space of two dimensions; and if in addition it had any thickness it would be space of three
dimensions; hence a line has neither breadth nor thickness.
iii. The intersections of lines and their extremities are points.
iv. A line which lies evenly between its extreme
points is called a straight or right line, such as AB.
If a point move without changing its direction it will describe a right line. The direction in
which a point moves in called its “sense.” If the moving point continually changes its direction
it will describe a curve; hence it follows that only one right line can be drawn between two
points. The following Illustration is due to Professor Henrici:—“If we suspend a weight by a
string, the string becomes stretched, and we say it is straight, by which we mean to express
that it has assumed a peculiar definite shape. If we mentally abstract from this string all
thickness, we obtain the notion of the simplest of all lines, which we call a straight line.”

The Plane.

v. A surface is that which has length and breadth.

A surface is space of two dimensions. It has no thickness, for if it had any, however small,
it would be space of three dimensions.
vi. When a surface is such that the right line joining any two arbitrary
points in it lies wholly in the surface, it is called a plane.
A plane is perfectly flat and even, like the surface of still water, or of a smooth floor.—
Newcomb.

2
 Figures.

vii. Any combination of points, of lines, or of points and lines in a plane, is

called a plane figure. If a figure be formed of points only it is called a stigmatic
figure; and if of right lines only, a rectilineal figure.
viii. Points which lie on the same right line are called collinear points. A
figure formed of collinear points is called a row of points.

The Angle.

ix. The inclination of two right lines extending out from one point in different
directions is called a rectilineal angle.
x. The two lines are called the legs, and the point the vertex of the angle.
A right line drawn from the vertex and turning about it
in the plane of the angle, from the position of coincidence
with one leg to that of coincidence with the other, is said to
turn through the angle, and the angle is the greater as the
quantity of turning is the greater. Again, since the line may
turn from one position to the other in either of two ways,
two angles are formed by two lines drawn from a point.
Thus if AB, AC be the legs, a line may turn from the
position AB to the position AC in the two ways indicated
by the arrows. The smaller of the angles thus formed is to be
understood as the angle contained by the lines. The larger,
called a re-entrant angle, seldom occurs in the “Elements.”
xi. Designation of Angles.—A particular angle in a figure is denoted by
three letters, as BAC, of which the middle one, A, is at the vertex, and the
other two along the legs. The angle is then read BAC.

xii. The angle formed by joining two or more angles together is called
their sum. Thus the sum of the two angles ABC, P QR is the angle AB ′ R,
formed by applying the side QP to the side BC,
so that the vertex Q shall fall on the vertex B,
and the side QR on the opposite side of BC
from BA.
xiii. When the sum of two angles BAC,
CAD is such that the legs BA, AD form one
right line, they are called supplements of each
other.
Hence, when one line stands on another, the two angles which it makes on the same side
of that on which it stands are supplements of each other.

3
 xiv. When one line stands on another, and
makes the adjacent angles at both sides of itself
equal, each of the angles is called a right angle,
and the line which stands on the other is called a
perpendicular to it.
Hence a right angle is equal to its supplement.
xv. An acute angle is one which is less than
a right angle, as A.

xvi. An obtuse angle is one which is greater than a right angle, as BAC.
The supplement of an acute angle is obtuse, and conversely, the supplement of an obtuse
angle is acute.
xvii. When the sum of two angles is a right angle,
each is called the complement of the other. Thus, if
the angle BAC be right, the angles BAD, DAC are
complements of each other.

Concurrent Lines.

xviii. Three or more right lines passing through

the same point are called concurrent lines.
xix. A system of more than three concurrent lines is called a pencil of lines.
Each line of a pencil is called a ray, and the common point through which the
rays pass is called the vertex .

The Triangle.

xx. A triangle is a figure formed by three right lines joined end to end. The
three lines are called its sides.
xxi. A triangle whose three sides are unequal is said to be scalene, as A;
a triangle having two sides equal, to be isosceles, as B; and and having all its
sides equal, to be equilateral , as C.

xxii. A right-angled triangle is one that has one of its angles a right angle,
as D. The side which subtends the right angle is called the hypotenuse.

4
 xxiii. An obtuse-angled triangle is one that has one of its angles obtuse, as
E.
xxiv. An acute-angled triangle is one that has its three angles acute, as F .

xxv. An exterior angle of a triangle is one that is formed by any side and
the continuation of another side.
Hence a triangle has six exterior angles; and also each exterior angle is the supplement of
the adjacent interior angle.

The Polygon.

xxvi. A rectilineal figure bounded by more than three right lines is usually
called a polygon.
xxvii. A polygon is said to be convex when it has no re-entrant angle.
xxviii. A polygon of four sides is called a quadrilateral.
xxix. A quadrilateral whose four sides are equal is called a lozenge.
xxx. A lozenge which has a right angle is called a square.
xxxi. A polygon which has five sides is called a pentagon; one which has six
sides, a hexagon, and so on.

The Circle.

xxxii. A circle is a plane figure formed by a curved

line called the circumference, and is such that all right
lines drawn from a certain point within the figure to the
circumference are equal to one another. This point is
called the centre.
xxxiii. A radius of a circle is any right line drawn
from the centre to the circumference, such as CD.
xxxiv. A diameter of a circle is a right line drawn through the centre and
terminated both ways by the circumference, such as AB.
From the definition of a circle it follows at once that the path of a movable point in a
plane which remains at a constant distance from a fixed point is a circle; also that any point
P in the plane is inside, outside, or on the circumference of a circle according as its distance
from the centre is less than, greater than, or equal to, the radius.

Postulates.

Let it be granted that—

i. A right line may be drawn from any one point to any other point.
When we consider a straight line contained between two fixed points which are its ends,
such a portion is called a finite straight line.
ii. A terminated right line may be produced to any length in a right line.

5
 Every right line may extend without limit in either direction or in both. It is in these
cases called an indefinite line. By this postulate a finite right line may be supposed to be
produced, whenever we please, into an indefinite right line.
iii. A circle may be described from any centre, and with any distance from
that centre as radius.
If there be two points A and B, and if with any instruments,
such as a ruler and pen, we draw a line from A to B, this will
evidently have some irregularities, and also some breadth and
thickness. Hence it will not be a geometrical line no matter how nearly it may approach to
one. This is the reason that Euclid postulates the drawing of a right line from one point to
another. For if it could be accurately done there would be no need for his asking us to let it be
granted. Similar observations apply to the other postulates. It is also worthy of remark that
Euclid never takes for granted the doing of anything for which a geometrical construction,
founded on other problems or on the foregoing postulates, can be given.

Axioms.

i. Things which are equal to the same, or to equals, are equal to each other.
Thus, if there be three things, and if the first, and the second, be each equal to the third,
we infer by this axiom that the first is equal to the second. This axiom relates to all kinds of
magnitude. The same is true of Axioms ii., iii., iv., v., vi., vii., ix.; but viii., x., xi., xii., are
strictly geometrical.
ii. If equals be added to equals the sums will be equal.
iii. If equals be taken from equals the remainders will be equal.
iv. If equals be added to unequals the sums will be unequal.
v. If equals be taken from unequals the remainders will be unequal.
vi. The doubles of equal magnitudes are equal.
vii. The halves of equal magnitudes are equal.
viii. Magnitudes that can be made to coincide are equal.
The placing of one geometrical magnitude on another, such as a line on a line, a triangle
on a triangle, or a circle on a circle, &c., is called superposition. The superposition employed
in Geometry is only mental, that is, we conceive one magnitude placed on the other; and
then, if we can prove that they coincide, we infer, by the present axiom, that they are equal.
Superposition involves the following principle, of which, without explicitly stating it, Euclid
makes frequent use:—“Any figure may be transferred from one position to another without
change of form or size.”
ix. The whole is greater than its part.
This axiom is included in the following, which is a fuller statement:—
ix′ . The whole is equal to the sum of all its parts.
x. Two right lines cannot enclose a space.
This is equivalent to the statement, “If two right lines have two points common to both,
they coincide in direction,” that is, they form but one line, and this holds true even when one
of the points is at infinity.
xi. All right angles are equal to one another.
This can be proved as follows:—Let there be two right lines AB, CD, and two perpendic-
ulars to them, namely, EF , GH, then if AB, CD be made to coincide by superposition, so
that the point E will coincide with G; then since a right angle is equal to its supplement, the
line EF must coincide with GH. Hence the angle AEF is equal to CGH.
xii. If two right lines (AB, CD) meet a third line (AC), so as to make the
sum of the two interior angles (BAC, ACD) on the same side less than two
right angles, these lines being produced shall meet at some finite distance.

6
 This axiom is the converse of Prop. xvii., Book I.

Explanation of Terms.

Axioms.—“Elements of human reason,” according to Dugald Stewart, are

certain general propositions, the truths of which are self-evident, and which are
so fundamental, that they cannot be inferred from any propositions which are
more elementary; in other words, they are incapable of demonstration. “That
two sides of a triangle are greater than the third” is, perhaps, self-evident; but
it is not an axiom, inasmuch as it can be inferred by demonstration from other
propositions; but we can give no proof of the proposition that “things which are
equal to the same are equal to one another,” and, being self-evident, it is an
axiom.
Propositions which are not axioms are properties of figures obtained by pro-
cesses of reasoning. They are divided into theorems and problems.
A Theorem is the formal statement of a property that may be demonstrated
from known propositions. These propositions may themselves be theorems or
axioms. A theorem consists of two parts, the hypothesis, or that which is as-
sumed, and the conclusion, or that which is asserted to follow therefrom. Thus,
in the typical theorem,

If X is Y, then Z is W, (i.)

the hypothesis is that X is Y , and the conclusion is that Z is W .

Converse Theorems.—Two theorems are said to be converse, each of the
other, when the hypothesis of either is the conclusion of the other. Thus the
converse of the theorem (i.) is—

If Z is W, then X is Y. (ii.)

From the two theorems (i.) and (ii.) we may infer two others, called their
contrapositives. Thus the contrapositive

of (i.) is, If Z is not W , then X is not Y ; (iii.)

of (ii.) is, If X is not Y , then Z is not W . (iv.)

The theorem (iv.) is called the obverse of (i.), and (iii.) the obverse of (ii.).
A Problem is a proposition in which something is proposed to be done, such
as a line to be drawn, or a figure to be constructed, under some given conditions.

7
 The Solution of a problem is the method of construction which accomplishes
the required end.
The Demonstration is the proof, in the case of a theorem, that the conclusion
follows from the hypothesis; and in the case of a problem, that the construction
accomplishes the object proposed.
The Enunciation of a problem consists of two parts, namely, the data, or
things supposed to be given, and the quaesita, or things required to be done.
Postulates are the elements of geometrical construction, and occupy the same
relation with respect to problems as axioms do to theorems.
A Corollary is an inference or deduction from a proposition.
A Lemma is an auxiliary proposition required in the demonstration of a
principal proposition.
A Secant or Transversal is a line which cuts a system of lines, a circle, or
any other geometrical figure.
Congruent figures are those that can be made to coincide by superposi-
tion. They agree in shape and size, but differ in position. Hence it follows,
by Axiom viii., that corresponding parts or portions of congruent figures are
congruent, and that congruent figures are equal in every respect.
Rule of Identity.—Under this name the following principle will be sometimes
referred to:—“If there is but one X and one Y , then, from the fact that X is
Y , it necessarily follows that Y is X.”—Syllabus.

PROP. I.—Problem.
On a given finite right line (AB) to construct an equilateral triangle.

Sol.—With A as centre, and AB

as radius, describe the circle BCD
(Post. iii.). With B as centre, and BA
as radius, describe the circle ACE, cut-
ting the former circle in C. Join CA,
CB (Post. i.). Then ABC is the equi-
lateral triangle required.
Dem.—Because A is the centre of
the circle BCD, AC is equal to AB
(Def. xxxii.). Again, because B is the
centre of the circle ACE, BC is equal to BA. Hence we have proved.

AC = AB,
and BC = AB.

But things which are equal to the same are equal to one another (Axiom i.);
therefore AC is equal to BC; therefore the three lines AB, BC, CA are equal
to one another. Hence the triangle ABC is equilateral (Def. xxi.); and it is
described on the given line AB, which was required to be done.

8
 Questions for Examination.
1. What is the datum in this proposition?
2. What is the quaesitum?
3. What is a finite right line?
4. What is the opposite of finite?
5. In what part of the construction is the third postulate quoted? and for what purpose?
Where is the first postulate quoted?
6. Where is the first axiom quoted?
7. What use is made of the definition of a circle? What is a circle?
8. What is an equilateral triangle?

Exercises.
The following exercises are to be solved when the pupil has mastered the First Book:—
1. If the lines AF , BF be joined, the figure ACBF is a lozenge.
2. If AB be produced to D and E, the triangles CDF and CEF are equilateral.
3. If CA, CB be produced to meet the circles again in G and H, the points G, F , H are
collinear, and the triangle GCH is equilateral.
4. If CF be joined, CF 2 = 3AB 2 .
5. Describe a circle in the space ACB, bounded by the line AB and the two circles.

PROP. II.—Problem.
From a given point (A) to draw a right line equal to a given finite right line
(BC).

Sol.—Join AB (Post. i.); on AB de-

scribe the equilateral triangle ABD [i.].
With B as centre, and BC as radius, de-
scribe the circle ECH (Post iii.). Pro-
duce DB to meet the circle ECH in E
(Post. ii.). With D as centre, and DE as
radius, describe the circle EF G (Post. iii.).
Produce DA to meet this circle in F . AF
is equal to BC.
Dem.—Because D is the centre of
the circle EF G, DF is equal to DE
(Def. xxxii.). And because DAB is an
equilateral triangle, DA is equal to DB
(Def. xxi.). Hence we have

DF = DE,
and DA = DB;

and taking the latter from the former, the remainder AF is equal to the remain-
der BE (Axiom iii.). Again, because B is the centre of the circle ECH, BC is
equal to BE; and we have proved that AF is equal to BE; and things which
are equal to the same thing are equal to one another (Axiom i.). Hence AF

9
is equal to BC. Therefore from the given point A the line AF has been drawn
equal to BC.
It is usual with commentators on Euclid to say that he allows the use of the rule and
compass. Were such the case this Proposition would have been unnecessary. The fact is,
Euclid’s object was to teach Theoretical and not Practical Geometry, and the only things
he postulates are the drawing of right lines and the describing of circles. If he allowed the
mechanical use of the rule and compass he could give methods of solving many problems that
go beyond the limits of the “geometry of the point, line, and circle.”—See Notes D, F at the
end of this work.

Exercises.
1. Solve the problem when the point A is in the line BC itself.
2. Inflect from a given point A to a given line BC a line equal to a given line. State the
number of solutions.

PROP. III.—Problem.
From the greater (AB) of two given right lines to cut off a part equal to (C)
the less.

Sol.—From A, one of the extremities of

AB, draw the right line AD equal to C [ii.];
and with A as centre, and AD as radius, de-
scribe the circle EDF (Post. iii.) cutting AB
in E. AE shall be equal to C.
Dem.—Because A is the centre of the circle
EDF , AE is equal to AD (Def. xxxii.), and
C is equal to AD (const.); and things which
are equal to the same are equal to one another
(Axiom i.); therefore AE is equal to C. Where-
fore from AB, the greater of the two given lines, a part, AE, has been out off
equal to C, the less.

Questions for Examination.

1. What previous problem is employed in the solution of this?
2. What postulate?
3. What axiom in the demonstration?
4. Show how to produce the less of two given lines until the whole produced line becomes
equal to the greater.

PROP. IV.—Theorem.

If two triangles (BAC, EDF ) have two sides (BA, AC) of one equal re-
spectively to two sides (ED, DF ) of the other, and have also the angles (A, D)
included by those sides equal, the triangles shall be equal in every respect—that
is, their bases or third sides (BC, EF ) shall be equal, and the angles (B, C)
at the base of one shall be respectively equal to the angles (E, F ) at the base of
the other; namely, those shall be equal to which the equal sides are opposite.

10
 Dem.—Let us conceive the triangle
BAC to be applied to EDF , so that the
point A shall coincide with D, and the
line AB with DE, and that the point C
shall be on the same side of DE as F ;
then because AB is equal to DE, the
point B shall coincide with E. Again,
because the angle BAC is equal to the
angle EDF , the line AC shall coincide with DF ; and since AC is equal to DF
(hyp.), the point C shall coincide with F ; and we have proved that the point B
coincides with E. Hence two points of the line BC coincide with two points of
the line EF ; and since two right lines cannot enclose a space, BC must coincide
with EF . Hence the triangles agree in every respect; therefore BC is equal to
EF , the angle B is equal to the angle E, the angle C to the angle F , and the
triangle BAC to the triangle EDF .

Questions for Examination.

1. How many parts in the hypothesis of this Proposition? Ans. Three. Name them.
2. How many in the conclusion? Name them.
3. What technical term is applied to figures which agree in everything but position? Ans.
They are said to be congruent.
4. What is meant by superposition?
5. What axiom is made use of in superposition?
6. How many parts in a triangle? Ans. Six; namely, three sides and three angles.
7. When it is required to prove that two triangles are congruent, how many parts of one
must be given equal to corresponding parts of the other? Ans. In general, any three except
the three angles. This will be established in Props. viii. and xxvi., taken along with iv.
8. What property of two lines having two common points is quoted in this Proposition?
They must coincide.

Exercises.
1. The line that bisects the vertical angle of an isosceles triangle bisects the base perpen-
dicularly.
2. If two adjacent sides of a quadrilateral be equal, and the diagonal bisects the angle
between them, their other sides are equal.
3. If two lines be at right angles, and if each bisect the other, then any point in either is
equally distant from the extremities of the other.
4. If equilateral triangles be described on the sides of any triangle, the distances between
the vertices of the original triangle and the opposite vertices of the equilateral triangles are
equal. (This Proposition should be proved after the student has read Prop. xxxii.)

PROP. V.—Theorem.

The angles (ABC, ACB) at the base (BC) of an isosceles triangle are equal
to one another, and if the equal sides (AB, AC) be produced, the external angles
(DEC, ECB) below the base shall be equal.

11
 Dem.—In BD take any point F , and from
AE, the greater, cut off AG equal to AF [iii].
Join BG, CF (Post. i.). Because AF is equal to
AG (const.), and AC is equal to AB (hyp.), the
two triangles F AC, GAB have the sides F A,
AC in one respectively equal to the sides GA,
AB in the other; and the included angle A is
common to both triangles. Hence [iv.] the base
F C is equal to GB, the angle AF C is equal to
AGB, and the angle ACF is equal to the angle
ABG.
Again, because AF is equal to AG (const.),
and AB to AC (hyp.), the remainder, BF , is equal to CG (Axiom iii); and we
have proved that F C is equal to GB, and the angle BF C equal to the angle
CGB. Hence the two triangles BF C, CGB have the two sides BF , F C in one
equal to the two sides CG, GB in the other; and the angle BF C contained
by the two sides of one equal to the angle CGB contained by the two sides
of the other. Therefore [iv.] these triangles have the angle F BC equal to the
angle GCB, and these are the angles below the base. Also the angle F CB equal
to GBC; but the whole angle F CA has been proved equal to the whole angle
GBA. Hence the remaining angle ACB is equal to the remaining angle ABC,
and these are the angles at the base.
Observation.—The great difficulty which be-
ginners find in this Proposition is due to the fact
that the two triangles ACF , ABG overlap each
other. The teacher should make these triangles sep-
arate, as in the annexed diagram, and point out the
corresponding parts thus:—
AF = AG,
AC = AB;
angle F AC = angle GAB.

Hence [iv.], angle ACF = angle ABG.

and angle AF C = angle AGB.
The student should also be shown how to apply one of the triangles to the other, so as to
bring them into coincidence. Similar Illustrations may be given of the triangles BF C, CGB.
The following is a very easy proof of this Proposition.
Conceive the △ ACB to be turned, without alteration, round
the line AC, until it falls on the other side. Let ACD be its
new position; then the angle ADC of the displaced triangle
is evidently equal to the angle ABC, with which it originally
coincided. Again, the two △s BAC, CAD have the sides
BA, AC of one respectively equal to the sides AC, AD of
the other, and the included angles equal; therefore [iv.] the
angle ACB opposite to the side AB is equal to the angle
ADC opposite to the side AC; but the angle ADC is equal
to ABC; therefore ACB is equal to ABC.
Cor.—Every equilateral triangle is equiangular.

12
 Def.—A line in any figure, such as AC in the preceding diagram, which is
such that, by folding the plane of the figure round it, one part of the diagram
will coincide with the other, is called an axis of symmetry of the figure.

Exercises.
1. Prove that the angles at the base are equal without producing the sides. Also by
producing the sides through the vertex.
2. Prove that the line joining the point A to the intersection of the lines CF and BG is
an axis of symmetry of the figure.
3. If two isosceles triangles be on the same base, and be either at the same or at opposite
sides of it, the line joining their vertices is an axis of symmetry of the figure formed by them.
4. Show how to prove this Proposition by assuming as an axiom that every angle has a
bisector.
5. Each diagonal of a lozenge is an axis of symmetry of the lozenge.
6. If three points be taken on the sides of an equilateral triangle, namely, one on each side,
at equal distances from the angles, the lines joining them form a new equilateral triangle.

PROP. VI.—Theorem.
If two angles (B, C) of a triangle be equal, the sides (AC, AB) opposite to
them are also equal.

Dem.—If AB, AC are not equal, one must be greater

than the other. Suppose AB is the greater, and that the
part BD is equal to AC. Join CD (Post. i.). Then the
two triangles DBC, ACB have BD equal to AC, and BC
common to both. Therefore the two sides DB, BC in one
are equal to the two sides AC, CB in the other; and the
angle DBC in one is equal to the angle ACB in the other
(hyp). Therefore [iv.] the triangle DBC is equal to the
triangle ACB—the less to the greater, which is absurd; hence AC, AB are not
unequal, that is, they are equal.

Questions for Examination.

1. What is the hypothesis in this Proposition?
2. What Proposition is this the converse of?
3. What is the obverse of this Proposition?
4. What is the obverse of Prop. v.?
5. What is meant by an indirect proof?
6. How does Euclid generally prove converse Propositions?
7. What false assumption is made in the demonstration?
8. What does this assumption lead to?

PROP. VII—Theorem.

If two triangles (ACB, ADB) on the same base (AB) and on the same side
of it have one pair of conterminous sides (AC, AD) equal to one another, the
other pair of conterminous sides (BC, BD) must be unequal.

13
 Dem.—1. Let the vertex of each triangle be without
the other. Join CD. Then because AD is equal to AC
(hyp.), the triangle ACD is isosceles; therefore [v.] the
angle ACD is equal to the angle ADC; but ADC is greater
than BDC (Axiom ix.); therefore ACD is greater than
BDC: much, more is BCD greater than BDC. Now if the
side BD were equal to BC, the angle BCD would be equal
to BDC [v.]; but it has been proved to be greater. Hence
BD is not equal to BC.
2. Let the vertex of one triangle ADB
fall within the other triangle ACB. Pro-
duce the sides AC, AD to E and F .
Then because AC is equal to AD (hyp.),
the triangle ACD is isosceles, and [v.]
the external angles ECD, F DC at the
other side of the base CD are equal; but
ECD is greater than BCD (Axiom ix.).
Therefore F DC is greater than BCD:
much more is BDC greater than BCD;
but if BC were equal to BD, the angle BDC would be equal to BCD [v.];
therefore BC cannot be equal to BD.
3. If the vertex D of the second triangle fall on the line BC, it is evident
that BC and BD are unequal.

Questions for Examination.

1. What use is made of Prop. vii.? Ans. As a lemma to Prop. viii.
2. In the demonstration of Prop. vii. the contrapositive of Prop. v. occurs; show where.
3. Show that two circles can intersect each other only in one point on the same side of
the line joining their centres, and hence that two circles cannot have more than two points of
intersection.

PROP. VIII.—Theorem.

If two triangles (ABC, DEF ) have

two sides (AB, AC) of one respectively
equal to two sides (DE, DF ) of the
other, and have also the base (BC) of
one equal to the base (EF ) of the other;
then the two triangles shall be equal, and
the angles of one shall be respectively
equal to the angles of the other—namely,
those shall be equal to which the equal sides are opposite.
Dem.—Let the triangle ABC be applied to DEF , so that the point B will
coincide with E, and the line BC with the line EF ; then because BC is equal
to EF , the point C shall coincide with F . Then if the vertex A fall on the same

14
side of EF as the vertex D, the point A must coincide with D; for if not, let
it take a different position G; then we have EG equal to BA, and BA is equal
to ED (hyp.). Hence (Axiom i.) EG is equal to ED: in like manner, F G is
equal to F D, and this is impossible [vii.]. Hence the point A must coincide with
D, and the triangle ABC agrees in every respect with the triangle DEF ; and
therefore the three angles of one are respectively equal to the three angles of the
other—namely, A to D, B to E, and C to F , and the two triangles are equal.
This Proposition is the converse of iv., and is the second case of the con-
gruence of triangles in the Elements.

Philo’s Proof.—Let the equal bases be applied as in the foregoing proof, but let the vertices
be on the opposite sides; then let BGC be the position which EDF takes. Join AG. Then
because BG = BA, the angle BAG = BGA. In like manner the angle CAG = CGA. Hence
the whole angle BAC = BGC; but BGC = EDF therefore BAC = EDF .

PROP. IX.—Problem.
To bisect a given rectilineal angle (BAC).
Sol.—In AB take any point D, and cut off
[iii.] AE equal to AD. Join DE (Post. i.), and
upon it, on the side remote from A, describe the
equilateral triangle DEF [i.] Join AF . AF bisects
the given angle BAC.
Dem.—The triangles DAF , EAF have the
side AD equal to AE (const.) and AF common;
therefore the two sides DA, AF are respectively
equal to EA, AF , and the base DF is equal to
the base EF , because they are the sides of an
equilateral triangle (Def. xxi.). Therefore [viii.]
the angle DAF is equal to the angle EAF ; hence
the angle BAC is bisected by the line AF .
Cor.—The line AF is an axis of symmetry of the figure.

15
 Questions for Examination.
1. Why does Euclid describe the equilateral triangle on the side remote from A?
2. In what case would the construction fail, if the equilateral triangle were described on
the other side of DE?

Exercises.
1. Prove this Proposition without using Prop. viii.
2. Prove that AF is perpendicular to DE.
3. Prove that any point in AF is equally distant from the points D and E.
4. Prove that any point in AF is equally distant from the lines AB, AC.

PROP. X.—Problem.
To bisect a given finite right line (AB).
Sol.—Upon AB describe an equilateral triangle
ACB [i.]. Bisect the angle ACB by the line CD [ix.],
meeting AB in D, then AB is bisected in D.
Dem.—The two triangles ACD, BCD, have the
side AC equal to BC, being the sides of an equilateral
triangle, and CD common. Therefore the two sides
AC, CD in one are equal to the two sides BC, CD
in the other; and the angle ACD is equal to the angle
BCD (const.). Therefore the base AD is equal to the
base DB [iv.]. Hence AB is bisected in D.
Exercises.
1. Show how to bisect a finite right line by describing two circles.
2. Every point equally distant from the points A, B is in the line CD.

PROP. XI.—Problem.
From a given point (C) in
a given right line (AB) to draw
a right line perpendicular to the
given line.
Sol.—In AC take any point
D, and make CE equal to CD
[iii.]. Upon DE describe an equi-
lateral triangle DF E [i.]. Join
CF . Then CF shall be at right angles to AB.
Dem.—The two triangles DCF , ECF have CD equal to CE (const.) and
CF common; therefore the two sides CD, CF in one are respectively equal
to the two sides CE, CF in the other, and the base DF is equal to the base
EF , being the sides of an equilateral triangle (Def. xxi.); therefore [viii.] the
angle DCF is equal to the angle ECF , and they are adjacent angles. Therefore
(Def. xiii.) each of them is a right angle, and CF is perpendicular to AB at the
point C.

16
 Exercises.
1. The diagonals of a lozenge bisect each other perpendicularly.
2. Prove Prop. xi. without using Prop. viii.
3. Erect a line at right angles to a given line at one of its extremities without producing
the line.
4. Find a point in a given line that shall be equally distant from two given points.
5. Find a point in a given line such that, if it be joined to two given points on opposite
sides of the line, the angle formed by the joining lines shall be bisected by the given line.
6. Find a point that shall be equidistant from three given points.

PROP. XII.—Problem.
To draw a perpendicular to a given indefinite right line (AB) from a given
point (C) without it.

Sol.—Take any point D on the

other side of AB, and describe
(Post. iii.) a circle, with C as cen-
tre, and CD as radius, meeting AB
in the points F and G. Bisect F G
in H [x.]. Join CH (Post. i.). CH
shall be at right angles to AB.
Dem.—Join CF , CG. Then the
two triangles F HC, GHC have F H equal to GH (const.), and HC com-
mon; and the base CF equal to the base CG, being radii of the circle F DG
(Def. xxxii.). Therefore the angle CHF is equal to the angle CHG [viii.],
and, being adjacent angles, they are right angles (Def. xiii.). Therefore CH is
perpendicular to AB.

Exercises.
1. Prove that the circle cannot meet AB in more than two points.
2. If one angle of a triangle be equal to the sum of the other two, the triangle can be
divided into the sum of two isosceles triangles, and the base is equal to twice the line from its
middle point to the opposite angle.

PROP. XIII.—Theorem.

The adjacent angles (ABC, ABD) which one right line (AB) standing on
another (CD) makes with it are either both right angles, or their sum is equal
to two right angles.

17
 Dem.—If AB is perpendicular to CD, as in fig. 1, the angles ABC, ABD
are right angles. If not, draw BE perpendicular to CD [xi.]. Now the angle
CBA is equal to the sum of the two angles CBE, EBA (Def. xi.). Hence,
adding the angle ABD, the sum of the angles CBA, ABD is equal to the sum
of the three angles CBE, EBA, ABD. In like manner, the sum of the angles
CBE, EBD is equal to the sum of the three angles CBE, EBA, ABD. And
things which are equal to the same are equal to one another. Therefore the sum
of the angles CBA, ABD is equal to the sum of the angles CBE, EBD; but
CBE, EBD are right angles; therefore the sum of the angles CBA, ABD is
two right angles.
Or thus: Denote the angle EBA by θ; then evidently
the angle CBA = right angle + θ;
the angle ABD = right angle − θ;
therefore CBA + ABD = two right angles.
Cor. 1.—The sum of two supplemental angles is two right angles.
Cor. 2.—Two right lines cannot have a common segment.
Cor. 3.—The bisector of any angle bisects the corresponding re-entrant angle.
Cor. 4.—The bisectors of two supplemental angles are at right angles to each
other.
Cor. 5.—The angle EBA is half the difference of the angles CBA, ABD.

PROP. XIV.–Theorem.

If at a point (B) in a right line (BA) two

other right lines (CB, BD) on opposite sides
make the adjacent angles (CBA, ABD) to-
gether equal to two right angles, these two
right lines form one continuous line.
Dem.—If BD be not the continuation of
CB, let BE be its continuation. Now, since
CBE is a right line, and BA stands on it, the
sum of the angles CBA, ABE is two right
angles (xiii.); and the sum of the angles CBA, ABD is two right angles (hyp.);

18
therefore the sum of the angles CBA, ABE is equal to the sum of the angles
CBA, ABD. Reject the angle CBA, which is common, and we have the angle
ABE equal to the angle ABD—that is, a part equal to the whole—which is
absurd. Hence BD must be in the same right line with CB.

PROP. XV.—Theorem.
If two right lines (AB, CD) intersect one another, the opposite angles are
equal (CEA = DEB, and BEC = AED).

Dem.—Because the line AE stands on CD,

the sum of the angles CEA, AED is two right
angles [xiii.]; and because the line CE stands on
AB, the sum of the angles BEC, CEA is two
right angles; therefore the sum of the angles CEA,
AED is equal to the sum of the angles BEC,
CEA. Reject the angle CEA, which is common,
and we have the angle AED equal to BEC. In
like manner, the angle CEA is equal to DEB.
The foregoing proof may be briefly given, by saying that opposite angles are
equal because they have a common supplement.

Questions for Examination on Props. XIII., XIV., XV.

1. What problem is required in Euclid’s proof of Prop. xiii.?
2. What theorem? Ans. No theorem, only the axioms.
3. If two lines intersect, how many pairs of supplemental angles do they make?
4. What relation does Prop. xiv. bear to Prop. xiii.?
5. What three lines in Prop. xiv. are concurrent?
6. What caution is required in the enunciation of Prop. xiv.?
7. State the converse of Prop. xv. Prove it.
8. What is the subject of Props. xiii., xiv., xv.? Ans. Angles at a point.

PROP. XVI.—Theorem.
If any side (BC) of a triangle (ABC) be pro-
duced, the exterior angle (ACD) is greater than ei-
ther of the interior non-adjacent angles.
Dem.—Bisect AC in E [x.]. Join BE (Post. i.).
Produce it, and from the produced part cut off EF
equal to BE [iii]. Join CF . Now because EC is
equal to EA (const.), and EF is equal to EB, the
triangles CEF , AEB have the sides CE, EF in one
equal to the sides AE, EB in the other; and the
angle CEF equal to AEB [xv.]. Therefore [iv.] the
angle ECF is equal to EAB; but the angle ACD
is greater than ECF ; therefore the angle ACD is
greater than EAB.

19
 In like manner it may be shown, if the side AC
be produced, that the exterior angle BCG is greater
than the angle ABC; but BCG is equal to ACD
[xv.]. Hence ACD is greater than ABC. There-
fore ACD is greater than either of the interior non-
adjacent angles A or B of the triangle ABC.
Cor. 1.—The sum of the three interior angles of
the triangle BCF is equal to the sum of the three
interior angles of the triangle ABC.
Cor. 2.—The area of BCF is equal to the area
of ABC.
Cor. 3.—The lines BA and CF , if produced,
cannot meet at any finite distance. For, if they met
at any finite point X, the triangle CAX would have
an exterior angle BAC equal to the interior angle
ACX.

PROP. XVII.—Theorem.
Any two angles (B, C) of a triangle
(ABC) are together less than two right angles.

Dem.—Produce BC to D; then the exterior angle

ACD is greater than ABC [xvi.]: to each add the
angle ACB, and we have the sum of the angles ACD,
ACB greater than the sum of the angles ABC, ACB;
but the sum of the angles ACD, ACB is two right
angles [xiii.]. Therefore the sum of the angles ABC,
ACB is less than two right angles.
In like manner we may show that the sum of the angles A, B, or of the
angles A, C, is less than two right angles.
Cor. 1.—Every triangle must have at least two acute angles.
Cor. 2.—If two angles of a triangle be unequal, the lesser must be acute.

Exercise.
Prove Prop. xvii. without producing a side.

PROP. XVIII.—Theorem.

If in any triangle (ABC) one side (AC) be greater than another (AB), the
angle opposite to the greater side is greater than the angle opposite to the less.

20
 Dem.—From AC cut off AD equal to AB
[iii]. Join BD (Post. i.). Now since AB is equal
to AD, the triangle ABD is isosceles; there-
fore [v.] the angle ADB is equal to ABD; but
the angle ADB is greater than the angle ACB
[xvi.]; therefore ABD is greater than ACB.
Much more is the angle ABC greater than the
angle ACB.
Or thus: From A as centre, with the lesser
side AB as radius, describe the circle BED,
cutting BC in E. Join AE. Now since AB is
equal to AE, the angle AEB is equal to ABE;
but AEB is greater than ACB (xvi.); therefore
ABE is greater than ACB.

Exercises.
1. If in the second method the circle cut the line CB produced through B, prove the
Proposition.
2. This Proposition may be proved by producing the less side.
3. If two of the opposite sides of a quadrilateral be respectively the greatest and least, the
angles adjacent to the least are greater than their opposite angles.
4. In any triangle, the perpendicular from the vertex opposite the side which is not less
than either of the remaining sides falls within the triangle.

PROP. XIX.—Theorem.

If one angle (B) of a triangle (ABC) be greater than another angle (C), the
side (AC) which it opposite to the greater angle is greater than the side (AB)
which is opposite to the less.
Dem.—If AC be not greater than AB, it must
be either equal to it or less than it. Let us examine
each case:—
1. If AC were equal to AB, the triangle ACB
would be isosceles, and then the angle B would
be equal to C [v.]; but it is not by hypothesis;
therefore AB is not equal to AC.
2. If AC were less than AB, the angle B would
be less than the angle C [xviii.]; but it is not by hypothesis; therefore AC is
not less than AB; and since AC is neither equal to AB nor less than it, it must
be greater.

Exercises.
1. Prove this Proposition by a direct demonstration.
2. A line from the vertex of an isosceles triangle to any point in the base is less than either
of the equal sides, but greater if the point be in the base produced.
3. Three equal lines could not be drawn from the same point to the same line.

21
 4. The perpendicular is the least line which can be drawn from a given point to a given
line; and of all others that may be drawn to it, that which is nearest to the perpendicular is
less than any one more remote.
5. If in the fig., Prop. xvi., AB be the greatest side of the △ ABC, BF is the greatest
side of the △ F BC, and the angle BF C is less than half the angle ABC.
6. If ABC be a △ having AB not greater than AC, a line AG, drawn from A to any point
G in BC, is less than AC. For the angle ACB [xviii.] is not greater than ABC; but AGC
[xvi.] is greater than ABC; therefore AGC is greater than ACG. Hence AC is greater than
AG.

PROP. XX.—Theorem.
The sum of any two sides (BA, AC) of a triangle (ABC) is greater than the
third.

Dem.—Produce BA to D (Post. ii.),

and make AD equal to AC [iii.]. Join CD.
Then because AD is equal to AC, the angle
ACD is equal to ADC (v.); therefore the
angle BCD is greater than the angle BDC;
hence the side BD opposite to the greater
angle is greater than BC opposite to the
less [xix.]. Again, since AC is equal to AD,
adding BA to both, we have the sum of the
sides BA, AC equal to BD. Therefore the
sum of BA, AC is greater than BC.
Or thus: Bisect the angle BAC by AE [ix.] Then the angle BEA is greater than EAC;
but EAC = EAB (const.); therefore the angle BEA is greater than EAB. Hence AB is
greater than BE [xix.]. In like manner AC is greater than EC. Therefore the sum of BA,
AC is greater than BC.

Exercises.
1. In any triangle, the difference between any two sides is less than the third.
2. If any point within a triangle be joined to its angular points, the sum of the joining
lines is greater than its semiperimeter.
3. If through the extremities of the base of a triangle, whose sides are unequal, lines
be drawn to any point in the bisector of the vertical angle, their difference is less than the
difference of the sides.
4. If the lines be drawn to any point in the bisector of the external vertical angle, their
sum is greater than the sum of the sides.
5. Any side of any polygon is less than the sum of the remaining sides.
6. The perimeter of any triangle is greater than that of any inscribed triangle, and less
than that of any circumscribed triangle.
7. The perimeter of any polygon is greater than that of any inscribed, and less than that
of any circumscribed, polygon of the same number of sides.
8. The perimeter of a quadrilateral is greater than the sum of its diagonals.
Def.—A line drawn from any angle of a triangle to the middle point of the opposite side
is called a median of the triangle.
9. The sum of the three medians of a triangle is less than its perimeter.
10. The sum of the diagonals of a quadrilateral is less than the sum of the lines which can
be drawn to its angular points from any point except the intersection of the diagonals.

22
 PROP. XXI.—Theorem.

If two lines (BD, CD) be drawn to a point (D) within a triangle from the
extremities of its base (BC), their sum is less than the sum of the remaining
sides (BA, CA), but they contain a greater angle.
Dem.—1. Produce BD (Post. ii.) to meet
AC in E. Then, in the triangle BAE, the sum
of the sides BA, AE is greater than the side BE
[xx.]: to each add EC, and we have the sum
of BA, AC greater than the sum of BE, EC.
Again, the sum of the sides DE, EC of the tri-
angle DEC is greater than DC: to each add BD,
and we get the sum of BE, EC greater than the
sum of BD, DC; but it has been proved that the sum of BA, AC is greater
than the sum of BE, EC. Therefore much more is the sum of BA, AC greater
than the sum of BD, DC.
2. The external angle BDC of the triangle DEC is greater than the internal
angle BEC [xvi.], and the angle BEC, for a like reason, is greater than BAC.
Therefore much more is BDC greater than BAC.
Part 2 may be proved without producing either of the sides BD, DC. Thus:
join AD and produce it to meet BC in F ; then the angle BDF is greater than
the angle BAF [xvi.], and F DC is greater than F AC. Therefore the whole
angle BDC is greater than BAC.
Exercises.
1. The sum of the lines drawn from any point
within a triangle to its angular points is less than the
perimeter. (Compare Ex. 2, last Prop.)
2. If a convex polygonal line ABCD lie within
a convex polygonal line AM N D terminating in the
same extremities, the length of the former is less than
that of the latter.

PROP. XXII.—Problem.

To construct a triangle whose three sides shall be respectively equal to three

given lines (A, B, C), the sum of every two of which is greater than the third.
Sol.—Take any right line DE, terminated
at D, but unlimited towards E, and cut off
[iii.] DF equal to A, F G equal to B, and GH
equal to C. With F as centre, and F D as ra-
dius, describe the circle KDL (Post. iii.); and
with G as centre, and GH as radius, describe
the circle KHL, intersecting the former cir-
cle in K. Join KF , KG. KF G is the triangle
required.

23
 Dem.—Since F is the centre of the circle
KDL, F K is equal to F D; but F D is equal
to A (const.); therefore (Axiom i.) F K is
equal to A. In like manner GK is equal to
C, and F G is equal to B (const.) Hence the
three sides of the triangle KF G are respec-
tively equal to the three lines A, B, C.
Questions for Examination.
1. What is the reason for stating in the enuncia-
tion that the sum of every two of the given lines must
be greater than the third?
2. Prove that when that condition is fulfilled the
two circles must intersect.
3. Under what conditions would the circles not
intersect?
4. If the sum of two of the lines were equal to the
third, would the circles meet? Prove that they would
not intersect.

PROP. XXIII.—Problem.
At a given point (A)
in a given right line (AB) to make an angle
equal to a given rectilineal angle (DEF ).

24
 Sol.—In the sides ED, EF of the given
angle take any arbitrary points D and F . Join
DF , and construct [xxii.] the triangle BAC,
whose sides, taken in order, shall be equal
to those of DEF —namely, AB equal to ED,
AC equal to EF , and CB equal to F D; then
the angle BAC will [viii.] be equal to DEF .
Hence it is the required angle.

Exercises.
1. Construct a triangle, being given two sides and
the angle between them.
2. Construct a triangle, being given two angles
and the side between them.
3. Construct a triangle, being given two sides and
the angle opposite to one of them.
4. Construct a triangle, being given the base, one
of the angles at the base, and the sum or difference of
the sides.
5. Given two points, one of which is in a given
line, it is required to find another point in the given
line, such that the sum or difference of its distances
from the former points may be given. Show that two
such points may be found in each case.

PROP. XXIV.—Theorem.

If two triangles (ABC, DEF ) have two sides (AB, AC) of one respectively
equal to two sides (DE, DF ) of the other, but the contained angle (BAC) of
one greater than the contained angle (EDF ) of the other, the base of that which
has the greater angle is greater than the base of the other.
Dem.—Of the two sides AB,
AC, let AB be the one which is not
the greater, and with it make the
angle BAG equal to EDF [xxiii.].
Then because AB is not greater
than AC, AG is less than AC [xix.,
Exer. 6]. Produce AG to H, and
make AH equal to DF or AC [iii.].
Join BH, CH.
In the triangles BAH, EDF , we
have AB equal to DE (hyp.), AH
equal to DF (const.), and the angle
BAH equal to the angle EDF (const.); therefore the base [iv.] BH is equal to
EF . Again, because AH is equal to AC (const.), the triangle ACH is isosceles;
therefore the angle ACH is equal to AHC [v.]; but ACH is greater than BCH;
therefore AHC is greater than BCH: much more is the angle BHC greater than

25
BCH, and the greater angle is subtended by the greater side [xix.]. Therefore
BC is greater than BH; but BH has been proved to be equal to EF ; therefore
BC is greater than EF .
The concluding part of this Proposition may be proved without joining CH, thus:—
BG + GH > BH [xx.],
AG + GC > AC [xx.];
therefore BC + AH > BH + AC;
but AH = AC (const.);
therefore BC is > BH.
Or thus: Bisect the angle CAH by AO. Join OH. Now in the △s CAO, HAO we have
the sides CA, AO in one equal to the sides AH, AO in the other, and the contained angles
equal; therefore the base OC is equal to the base OH [iv.]: to each add BO, and we have BC
equal to the sum of BO, OH; but the sum of BO, OH is greater than BH [xx.]. Therefore
BC is greater than BH, that is, greater than EF .

Exercises.
1. Prove this Proposition by making the angle ABH to the left of AB.
2. Prove that the angle BCA is greater than EF D.

PROP. XXV.—Theorem.

If two triangles (ABC, DEF ) have two sides (AB, AC) of one respectively
equal to two sides (DE, DF ) of the other, but the base (BC) of one greater
than the base (EF ) of the other, the angle (A) contained by the sides of that
which has the greater base is greater them the angle (D) contained by the sides
of the other.
Dem.—If the angle A be not
greater than D, it must be either
equal to it or less than it. We
shall examine each case:—
1. If A were equal to D, the
triangles ABC, DEF would have
the two sides AB, AC of one re-
spectively equal to the two sides
DE, DF of the other, and the an-
gle A contained by the two sides
of one equal to the angle D contained by the two sides of the other. Hence [iv.]
BC would be equal to EF ; but BC is, by hypothesis, greater than EF ; hence
the angle A is not equal to the angle D.
2. If A were less than D, then D would be greater than A, and the triangles
DEF , ABC would have the two sides DE, DF of one respectively equal to the
two sides AB, AC of the other, and the angle D contained by the two sides of
one greater than the angle A contained by the two sides of the other. Hence
[xxiv.] EF would be greater than BC; but EF (hyp.) is not greater than BC.
Therefore A is not less than D, and we have proved that it is not equal to it;
therefore it must be greater.

26
 Or thus, directly: Construct
the triangle ACG, whose three
sides AG, GC, CA shall be re-
spectively equal to the three sides
DE, EF , F D of the triangle
DEF [xxii.]. Join BG. Then
because BC is greater than EF ,
BC is greater than CG. Hence
[xviii.] the angle BGC is greater
than GBC; and make (xxiii.)
the angle BGH equal to GBH, and join AH. Then [vi.] BH is equal to
GH. Therefore the triangles ABH, AGH have the sides AB, AH of one equal
to the sides AG, AH of the other, and the base BH equal to GH. Therefore
[viii.] the angle BAH is equal to GAH. Hence the angle BAC is greater than
CAG, and therefore greater than EDF .

Exercise.
Demonstrate this Proposition directly by cutting off from BC a part equal to EF .

PROP. XXVI.—Theorem.

If two triangles (ABC, DEF ) have two angles (B, C) of one equal respec-
tively to two angles (E, F ) of the other, and a side of one equal to a side
similarly placed with respect to the equal angles of the other, the triangles are
equal in every respect.
Dem.—This Proposition breaks up into two according as the sides given to
be equal are the sides adjacent to the equal angles, namely BC and EF , or
those opposite equal angles.
1. Let the equal sides be BC and EF ;
then if DE be not equal to AB, suppose GE
to be equal to it. Join GF ; then the triangles
ABC, GEF have the sides AB, BC of one
respectively equal to the sides GE, EF of the
other, and the angle ABC equal to the angle
GEF (hyp.); therefore [iv.] the angle ACB is
equal to the angle GF E; but the angle ACB
is (hyp.) equal to DF E; hence GF E is equal
to DF E—a part equal to the whole, which is absurd; therefore AB and DE are
not unequal, that is, they are equal. Consequently the triangles ABC, DEF
have the sides AB, BC of one respectively equal to the sides DE, EF of the
other; and the contained angles ABC and DEF equal; therefore [iv.] AC is
equal to DF , and the angle BAC is equal to the angle EDF .

27
 2. Let the sides given to be equal be
AB and DE; it is required to prove that
BC is equal to EF , and AC to DF . If
BC be not equal to EF , suppose BG to
be equal to it. Join AG. Then the trian-
gles ABG, DEF have the two sides AB,
BG of one respectively equal to the two
sides DE, EF of the other, and the angle
ABG equal to the angle DEF ; therefore
[iv.] the angle AGB is equal to DF E; but the angle ACB is equal to DF E
(hyp.). Hence (Axiom i.) the angle AGB is equal to ACB, that is, the exterior
angle of the triangle ACG is equal to the interior and non-adjacent angle, which
[xvi.] is impossible. Hence BC must be equal to EF , and the same as in 1, AC
is equal to DF , and the angle BAC is equal to the angle EDF .
This Proposition, together with iv. and viii., includes all the cases of the congruence of
two triangles. Part I. may be proved immediately by superposition. For it is evident if ABC
be applied to DEF , so that the point B shall coincide with E, and the line BC with EF ,
since BC is equal to EF , the point C shall coincide with F ; and since the angles B, C are
respectively equal to the angles E, F , the lines BA, CA shall coincide with ED and F D.
Hence the triangles are congruent.

Def.—If every point on a geometrical figure satisfies an assigned condition,

that figure is called the locus of the point satisfying the condition. Thus, for
example, a circle is the locus of a point whose distance from the centre is equal
to its radius.

Exercises.
1. The extremities of the base of an isosceles triangle are equally distant from any point
in the perpendicular from the vertical angle on the base.
2. If the line which bisects the vertical angle of a triangle also bisects the base, the triangle
is isosceles.
3. The locus of a point which is equally distant from two fixed lines is the pair of lines
which bisect the angles made by the fixed lines.
4. In a given right line find a point such that the perpendiculars from it on two given lines
may be equal. State also the number of solutions.
5. If two right-angled triangles have equal hypotenuses, and an acute angle of one equal
to an acute angle of the other, they are congruent.
6. If two right-angled triangles have equal hypotenuses, and a side of one equal to a side
of the other, they are congruent.
7. The bisectors of the three internal angles of a triangle are concurrent.
8. The bisectors of two external angles and the bisector of the third internal angle are
concurrent.
9. Through a given point draw a right line, such that perpendiculars on it from two given
points on opposite sides may be equal to each other.
10. Through a given point draw a right line intersecting two given lines, and forming an
isosceles triangle with them.

Parallel Lines.

28
 Def. i.—If two right lines in the same plane be such that, when produced
indefinitely, they do not meet at any finite distance, they are said to be paral-
lel.
Def. ii.—A parallelogram is a quadrilateral, both pairs of whose opposite
sides are parallel.
Def. iii.—The right line joining either pair of opposite angles of a quadri-
lateral is called a diagonal .
Def. iv.—If both pairs of opposite sides of a quadrilateral be produced to
meet, the right line joining their points of intersection is called its third diagonal .
Def. v.—A quadrilateral which has one pair of opposite sides parallel is
called a trapezium.
Def. vi.—If from the extremities of one right
line perpendiculars be drawn to another, the inter-
cept between their feet is called the projection of the
first line on the second.
Def. vii.—When a right line intersects two
other right lines in two distinct points it makes
with them eight angles, which have received spe-
cial names in relation to one another. Thus, in the
figure—1, 2; 7, 8 are called exterior angles; 3, 4; 5, 6, interior angles. Again,
4; 6; 3, 5 are called alternate angles; lastly, 1, 5; 2, 6; 3, 8; 4, 7 are called
corresponding angles.

PROP. XXVII.—Theorem.
If a right line (EF ) intersecting two right lines (AB, CD) makes the alternate
angles (AEF, EF D) equal to each other, these lines are parallel.
Dem.—If AB and CD are not paral-
lel they must meet, if produced, at some
finite distance: if possible let them meet
in G; then the figure EGF is a triangle,
and the angle AEF is an exterior angle,
and EF D a non-adjacent interior angle.
Hence [xvi.] AEF is greater than EF D;
but it is also equal to it (hyp.), that is, both equal and greater, which is absurd.
Hence AB and CD are parallel.
Or thus: Bisect EF in O; turn the whole figure round O as a centre, so that
EF shall fall on itself; then because OE = OF , the point E shall fall on F ; and
because the angle AEF is equal to the angle EF D, the line EA will occupy
the place of F D, and the line F D the place of EA; therefore the lines AB, CD
interchange places, and the figure is symmetrical with respect to the point O.
Hence, if AB, CD meet on one side of O, they must also meet on the other
side; but two right lines cannot enclose a space (Axiom x.); therefore they do
not meet at either side. Hence they are parallel.

29
 PROP. XXVIII.—Theorem.

If a right line (EF ) intersecting two right lines (AB, CD) makes the exterior
angle (EGB) equal to its corresponding interior angle (GHD), or makes two
interior angles (BGH, GHD) on the same side equal to two right angles, the
two right lines are parallel.
Dem.—1. Since the lines AB, EF inter-
sect, the angle AGH is equal to EGB [xv.];
but EGB is equal to GHD (hyp.); therefore
AGH is equal to GHD, and they are alternate
angles. Hence [xxvii.] AB is parallel to CD.
2. Since AGH and BGH are adjacent an-
gles, their sum is equal to two right angles
[xiii.]; but the sum of BGH and GHD is two
right angles (hyp.); therefore rejecting the angle BGH we have AGH equal
GHD, and they are alternate angles; therefore AB is parallel to CD [xxvii.].

PROP. XXIX.—Theorem.

If a right line (EF ) intersect two parallel right lines (AB, CD), it makes—
1. the alternate angles (AGH, GHD) equal to one another; 2. the exterior angle
(EGB) equal to the corresponding interior angle (GHD); 3. the two interior
angles (BGH, GHD) on the same side equal to two right angles.
Dem.—If the angle AGH be not equal to
GHD, one must be greater than the other. Let
AGH be the greater; to each add BGH, and
we have the sum of the angles AGH, BGH
greater than the sum of the angles BGH,
GHD; but the sum of AGH, BGH is two right
angles; therefore the sum of BGH, GHD is
less than two right angles, and therefore (Ax-
iom xii.) the lines AB, CD, if produced, will meet at some finite distance: but
since they are parallel (hyp.) they cannot meet at any finite distance. Hence
the angle AGH is not unequal to GHD—that is, it is equal to it.
2. Since the angle EGB is equal to AGH [xv.], and GHD is equal to AGH
(1), EGB is equal to GHD (Axiom i.).
3. Since AGH is equal to GHD (1), add HGB to each, and we have the sum
of the angles AGH, HGB equal to the sum of the angles GHD, HGB; but the
sum of the angles AGH, HGB [xiii.] is two right angles; therefore the sum of
the angles BGH, GHD is two right angles.

30
 Exercises.
1. Demonstrate both parts of Prop. xxviii. without using Prop. xxvii.
2. The parts of all perpendiculars to two parallel lines intercepted between them are equal.
3. If ACD, BCD be adjacent angles, any parallel to AB will meet the bisectors of these
angles in points equally distant from where it meets CD.
4. If through the middle point O of any right line terminated by two parallel right lines
any other secant be drawn, the intercept on this line made by the parallels is bisected in O.
5. Two right lines passing through a point equidistant from two parallels intercept equal
portions on the parallels.
6. The perimeter of the parallelogram, formed by drawing parallels to two sides of an
equilateral triangle from any point in the third side, is equal to twice the side.
7. If the opposite sides of a hexagon be equal and parallel, its diagonals are concurrent.
8. If two intersecting right lines be respectively parallel to two others, the angle between
the former is equal to the angle between the latter. For if AB, AC be respectively parallel to
DE, DF , and if AC, DE meet in G, the angles A, D are each equal to G [xxix.].

PROP. XXX.—Theorem.
If two right lines (AB, CD) be parallel to the same right line (EF ), they are
parallel to one another.

Dem.—Draw any secant GHK. Then since

AB and EF are parallel, the angle AGH is equal
to GHF [xxix.]. In like manner the angle GHF
is equal to HKD [xxix.]. Therefore the angle
AGK is equal to the angle GKD (Axiom i.).
Hence [xxvii.] AB is parallel to CD.

PROP. XXXI.—Problem.
Through a given point (C) to draw a right line parallel to a given right line.

Sol.—Take any point D in AB. Join CD

(Post. i.), and make the angle DCE equal to the
angle ADC [xxiii.]. The line CE is parallel to
AB [xxvii.].

Exercises.
1. Given the altitude of a triangle and the base angles, construct it.
2. From a given point draw to a given line a line making with it an angle equal to a given
angle. Show that there will be two solutions.
3. Prove the following construction for trisecting a given line AB:—On AB describe an
equilateral △ ABC. Bisect the angles A, B by the lines AD, BD, meeting in D; through D
draw parallels to AC, BC, meeting AB in E, F : E, F are the points of trisection of AB.
4. Inscribe a square in a given equilateral triangle, having its base on a given side of the
triangle.
5. Draw a line parallel to the base of a triangle so that it may be—1. equal to the intercept
it makes on one of the sides from the extremity of the base; 2. equal to the sum of the two
intercepts on the sides from the extremities of the base; 3. equal to their difference. Show
that there are two solutions in each case.

31
 6. Through two given points in two parallel lines draw two lines forming a lozenge with
the given parallels.
7. Between two lines given in position place a line of given length which shall be parallel
to a given line. Show that there are two solutions.

PROP. XXXII.—Theorem.

If any side (AB) of a triangle (ABC) be

produced (to D), the external angle (CBD)
is equal to the sum of the two internal non-
adjacent angles (A, C), and the sum of the
three internal angles is equal to two right an-
gles.
Dem.—Draw BE parallel to AC [xxxi.].
Now since BC intersects the parallels BE,
AC, the alternate angles EBC, ACB are
equal [xxix.]. Again, since AB intersects the parallels BE, AC, the angle
EBD is equal to BAC [xxix.]; hence the whole angle CBD is equal to the sum
of the two angles ACB, BAC: to each of these add the angle ABC and we
have the sum of CBD, ABC equal to the sum of the three angles ACB, BAC,
ABC: but the sum of CBD, ABC is two right angles [xiii.]; hence the sum of
the three angles ACB, BAC, ABC is two right angles.
Cor. 1.—If a right-angled triangle be isosceles, each base angle is half a right
angle.
Cor. 2.—If two triangles have two angles in one respectively equal to two
angles in the other, their remaining angles are equal.
Cor. 3.—Since a quadrilateral can be divided into two triangles, the sum of
its angles is equal to four right angles.
Cor. 4.—If a figure of n sides be divided into triangles by drawing diagonals
from any one of its angles there will be (n − 2) triangles; hence the sum of its
angles is equal 2(n − 2) right angles.
Cor. 5.—If all the sides of any convex polygon be produced, the sum of the
external angles is equal to four right angles.
Cor. 6.—Each angle of an equilateral triangle is two-thirds of a right angle.
Cor. 7.—If one angle of a triangle be equal to the sum of the other two, it
is a right angle.
Cor. 8.—Every right-angled triangle can be divided into two isosceles trian-
gles by a line drawn from the right angle to the hypotenuse.

Exercises.
1. Trisect a right angle.
2. Any angle of a triangle is obtuse, right, or acute, according as the opposite side is
greater than, equal to, or less than, twice the median drawn from that angle.
3. If the sides of a polygon of n sides be produced, the sum of the angles between each
alternate pair is equal to 2(n − 4) right angles.

32
 4. If the line which bisects the external vertical angle be parallel to the base, the triangle
is isosceles.
5. If two right-angled △s ABC, ABD be on the same hypotenuse AB, and the vertices
C and D be joined, the pair of angles subtended by any side of the quadrilateral thus formed
are equal.
6. The three perpendiculars of a triangle are concurrent.
7. The bisectors of two adjacent angles of a parallelogram are at right angles.
8. The bisectors of the external angles of a quadrilateral form a circumscribed quadrilat-
eral, the sum of whose opposite angles is equal to two right angles.
9. If the three sides of one triangle be respectively perpendicular to those of another
triangle, the triangles are equiangular.
10. Construct a right-angled triangle, being given the hypotenuse and the sum or difference
of the sides.
11. The angles made with the base of an isosceles triangle by perpendiculars from its
extremities on the equal sides are each equal to half the vertical angle.
12. The angle included between the internal bisector of one base angle of a triangle and
the external bisector of the other base angle is equal to half the vertical angle.
13. In the construction of Prop. xviii. prove that the angle DBC is equal to half the
difference of the base angles.
14. If A, B, C denote the angles of a △, prove that 12 (A + B), 12 (B + C), 12 (C + A) will
be the angles of a △ formed by any side and the bisectors of the external angles between that
side and the other sides produced.

PROP. XXXIII.—Theorem.
The right lines (AC, BD) which join the adjacent extremities of two equal and
parallel right lines (AB, CD) are equal and parallel.

Dem.—Join BC. Now since AB is paral-

lel to CD, and BC intersects them, the an-
gle ABC is equal to the alternate angle DCB
[xxix.]. Again, since AB is equal to CD, and
BC common, the triangles ABC, DCB have
the sides AB, BC in one respectively equal to
the sides DC, CB in the other, and the angles
ABC, DCB contained by those sides equal;
therefore [iv.] the base AC is equal to the base
BD, and the angle ACB is equal to the angle CBD; but these are alternate
angles; hence [xxvii.] AC is parallel to BD, and it has been proved equal to it.
Therefore AC is both equal and parallel to BD.

Exercises.
1. If two right lines AB, BC be respectively equal and parallel to two other right lines
DE, EF , the right line AC joining the extremities of the former pair is equal to the right line
DF joining the extremities of the latter.
2. Right lines that are equal and parallel have equal projections on any other right line;
and conversely, parallel right lines that have equal projections on another right line are equal.
3. Equal right lines that have equal projections on another right line are parallel.
4. The right lines which join transversely the extremities of two equal and parallel right
lines bisect each other.

33
 PROP. XXXIV.—Theorem.

The opposite sides (AB, CD; AC, BD) and the opposite angles (A, D;
B, C) of a parallelogram are equal to one another, and either diagonal bisects
the parallelogram.
Dem.—Join BC. Since AB is parallel to
CD, and BC intersects them, the angle ABC
is equal to the angle BCD [xxix.]. Again,
since BC intersects the parallels AC, BD, the
angle ACB is equal to the angle CBD; hence
the triangles ABC, DCB have the two angles
ABC, ACB in one respectively equal to the
two angles BCD, CBD in the other, and the
side BC common. Therefore [xxvi.] AB is equal to CD, and AC to BD; the
angle BAC to the angle BDC, and the triangle ABC to the triangle BDC.
Again, because the angle ACB is equal to CBD, and DCB equal to ABC,
the whole angle ACD is equal to the whole angle ABD.
Cor. 1.—If one angle of a parallelogram be a right angle, all its angles are
right angles.
Cor. 2.—If two adjacent sides of a parallelogram be equal, it is a lozenge.
Cor. 3.—If both pairs of opposite sides of a quadrilateral be equal, it is a
parallelogram.
Cor. 4.—If both pairs of opposite angles of a quadrilateral be equal, it is a
parallelogram.
Cor. 5.—If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, it is a paral-
lelogram.
Cor. 6.—If both diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect the quadrilateral, it is a
parallelogram.
Cor. 7.—If the adjacent sides of a parallelogram be equal, its diagonals bisect
its angles.
Cor. 8.—If the adjacent sides of a parallelogram be equal, its diagonals
intersect at right angles.
Cor. 9.—In a right-angled parallelogram the diagonals are equal.
Cor. 10.—If the diagonals of a parallelogram be perpendicular to each other,
it is a lozenge.
Cor. 11.—If a diagonal of a parallelogram bisect the angles whose vertices
it joins, the parallelogram is a lozenge.

Exercises.
1. The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.
2. If the diagonals of a parallelogram be equal, all its angles are right angles.
3. Divide a right line into any number of equal parts.
4. The right lines joining the adjacent extremities of two unequal parallel right lines will
meet, if produced, on the side of the shorter parallel.
5. If two opposite sides of a quadrilateral be parallel but not equal, and the other pair
equal but not parallel, its opposite angles are supplemental.
6. Construct a triangle, being given the middle points of its three sides.

34
 7. The area of a quadrilateral is equal to the area of a triangle, having two sides equal to
its diagonals, and the contained angle equal to that between the diagonals.

PROP. XXXV.—Theorem.
Parallelograms on the same base (BC) and between the same parallels are
equal.
Dem.—1. Let the sides AD, DF
of the parallelograms AC, BF op-
posite to the common base BC ter-
minate in the same point D, then
[xxxiv.] each parallelogram is dou-
ble of the triangle BCD. Hence they
are equal to one another.
2. Let the sides AD, EF (figures
(α), (β)) opposite to BC not terminate in the same point.

Then because ABCD is a parallelogram, AD is equal to BC [xxxiv.]; and

since BCEF is a parallelogram, EF is equal to BC; therefore (see fig. (α))
take away ED, and in fig. (β) add ED, and we have in each case AE equal to
DF , and BA is equal to CD [xxxiv.]. Hence the triangles BAE, CDF have
the two sides BA, AE in one respectively equal to the two sides CD, DF in
the other, and the angle BAE [xxix.] equal to the angle CDF ; hence [iv.] the
triangle BAE is equal to the triangle CDF ; and taking each of these triangles
in succession from the quadrilateral BAF C, there will remain the parallelogram
BCF E equal to the parallelogram BCDA.
Or thus: The triangles ABE, DCF have [xxxiv.] the sides AB, BE in
one respectively equal to the sides DC, CF in the other, and the angle ABE
equal to the angle DCF [xxix., Ex. 8]. Hence the triangle ABE is equal to the
triangle DCF ; and, taking each away from the quadrilateral BAF C, there will
remain the parallelogram BCF E equal to the parallelogram BCDA.
Observation.—By the second method of proof the subdivision of the demonstration into
cases is avoided. It is easy to see that either of the two parallelograms ABCD, EBCF can be
divided into parts and rearranged so as to make it congruent with the other. This Proposition
affords the first instance in the Elements in which equality which is not congruence occurs.
This equality is expressed algebraically by the symbol =, while congruence is denoted by ≡,
called also the symbol of identity. Figures that are congruent are said to be identically equal.

35
 PROP. XXXVI.—Theorem.
Parallelograms (BD, F H) on equal bases (BC, F G) and between the same
parallels are equal.
Dem.—Join BE, CH. Now
since F H is a parallelogram, F G
is equal to EH [xxxiv.]; but BC
is equal to F G (hyp.); therefore
BC is equal to EH (Axiom i.).
Hence BE, CH, which join their
adjacent extremities, are equal
and parallel; therefore BH is a
parallelogram. Again, since the parallelograms BD, BH are on the same base
BC, and between the same parallels BC, AH, they are equal [xxxv.]. In like
manner, since the parallelograms HB, HF are on the same base EH, and be-
tween the same parallels EH, BG, they are equal. Hence BD and F H are each
equal to BH. Therefore (Axiom i.) BD is equal to F H.
Exercise.—Prove this Proposition without joining BE, CH.

PROP. XXXVII.—Theorem.
Triangles (ABC, DBC) on the same base (BC) and between the same
parallels (AD, BC) are equal.
Dem.—Produce AD both
ways. Draw BE parallel to
AC, and CF parallel to BD
[xxxi.] Then the figures AEBC,
DBCF are parallelograms; and
since they are on the same base
BC, and between the same par-
allels BC, EF they are equal
[xxxv.]. Again, the triangle ABC is half the parallelogram AEBC [xxxiv.],
because the diagonal AB bisects it. In like manner the triangle DBC is half
the parallelogram DBCF , because the diagonal DC bisects it, and halves of
equal things are equal (Axiom vii.). Therefore the triangle ABC is equal to the
triangle DBC.
Exercises.
1. If two equal triangles be on the same base, but on opposite sides, the right line joining
their vertices is bisected by the base.
2. Construct a triangle equal in area to a given quadrilateral figure.
3. Construct a triangle equal in area to a given rectilineal figure.
4. Construct a lozenge equal to a given parallelogram, and having a given side of the
parallelogram for base.
5. Given the base and the area of a triangle, find the locus of the vertex.
6. If through a point O, in the production of the diagonal AC of a parallelogram ABCD,
any right line be drawn cutting the sides AB, BC in the points E, F , and ED, F D be joined,
the triangle EF D is less than half the parallelogram.

36
 PROP. XXXVIII.—Theorem.
Two triangles on equal bases and between the same parallels are equal.
Dem.—By a construction similar to the last, we see that the triangles are
the halves of parallelograms, on equal bases, and between the same parallels.
Hence they are the halves of equal parallelograms [xxxvi.]. Therefore they are
equal to one another.
Exercises.
1. Every median of a triangle bisects the triangle.
2. If two triangles have two sides of one respectively equal to two sides of the other, and
the contained angles supplemental, their areas are equal.
3. If the base of a triangle be divided into any number of equal parts, right lines drawn
from the vertex to the points of division will divide the whole triangle into as many equal
parts.
4. Right lines from any point in the diagonal of a parallelogram to the angular points
through which the diagonal does not pass, and the diagonal, divide the parallelogram into
four triangles which are equal, two by two.
5. If one diagonal of a quadrilateral bisects the other, it also bisects the quadrilateral, and
conversely.
6. If two △s ABC, ABD be on the same base AB, and between the same parallels, and
if a parallel to AB meet the sides AC, BC in the point E, F ; and the sides AD, BD in the
point G, H; then EF = GH.
7. If instead of triangles on the same base we have triangles on equal bases and between
the same parallels, the intercepts made by the sides of the triangles on any parallel to the
bases are equal.
8. If the middle points of any two sides of a triangle be joined, the triangle so formed with
the two half sides is one-fourth of the whole.
9. The triangle whose vertices are the middle points of two sides, and any point in the
base of another triangle, is one-fourth of that triangle.
10. Bisect a given triangle by a right line drawn from a given point in one of the sides.
11. Trisect a given triangle by three right lines drawn from a given point within it.
12. Prove that any right line through the intersection of the diagonals of a parallelogram
bisects the parallelogram.
13. The triangle formed by joining the middle point of one of the non-parallel sides of a
trapezium to the extremities of the opposite side is equal to half the trapezium.

PROP. XXXIX.—Theorem.
Equal triangles (BAC, BDC) on the same base (BC) and on the same side of
it are between the same parallels.
Dem.—Join AD. Then if AD be not par-
allel to BC, let AE be parallel to it, and let
it cut BD in E. Join EC. Now since the tri-
angles BEC, BAC are on the same base BC,
and between the same parallels BC, AE, they
are equal [xxxvii.]; but the triangle BAC is
equal to the triangle BDC (hyp.). Therefore
(Axiom i.) the triangle BEC is equal to the
triangle BDC—that is, a part equal to the whole which is absurd. Hence AD
must be parallel to BC.

37
 PROP. XL.—Theorem.

Equal triangles (ABC, DEF ) on equal bases (BC, EF ) which form parts
of the same right line, and on the same side of the line, are between the same
parallels.
Dem.—Join AD. If AD be not
parallel to BF , let AG be parallel
to it. Join GF . Now since the tri-
angles GEF and ABC are on equal
bases BC, EF , and between the same
parallels BF , AG, they are equal
[xxxviii.]; but the triangle DEF is
equal to the triangle ABC (hyp.). Hence GEF is equal to DEF (Axiom i.)—
that is, a part equal to the whole, which is absurd. Therefore AD must be
parallel to BF .
Def.—The altitude of a triangle is the perpendicular from the vertex on the
base.

Exercises.
1. Triangles and parallelograms of equal bases and altitudes are respectively equal.
2. The right line joining the middle points of two sides of a triangle is parallel to the
third; for the medians from the extremities of the base to these points will each bisect the
original triangle. Hence the two triangles whose base is the third side and whose vertices are
the points of bisection are equal.
3. The parallel to any side of a triangle through the middle point of another bisects the
third.
4. The lines of connexion of the middle points of the sides of a triangle divide it into four
congruent triangles.
5. The line of connexion of the middle points of two sides of a triangle is equal to half the
third side.
6. The middle points of the four sides of a convex quadrilateral, taken in order, are the
angular points of a parallelogram whose area is equal to half the area of the quadrilateral.
7. The sum of the two parallel sides of a trapezium is double the line joining the middle
points of the two remaining sides.
8. The parallelogram formed by the line of connexion of the middle points of two sides of
a triangle, and any pair of parallels drawn through the same points to meet the third side, is
equal to half the triangle.
9. The right line joining the middle points of opposite sides of a quadrilateral, and the
right line joining the middle points of its diagonals, are concurrent.

PROP. XLI.—Theorem.

If a parallelogram (ABCD) and a triangle (EBC) be on the same base (BC)

and between the same parallels, the parallelogram is double of the triangle.

38
 Dem.—Join AC. The parallelogram
ABCD is double of the triangle ABC [xxxiv.];
but the triangle ABC is equal to the trian-
gle EBC [xxxvii.]. Therefore the parallelogram
ABCD is double of the triangle EBC.
Cor. 1.—If a triangle and a parallelogram
have equal altitudes, and if the base of the tri-
angle be double of the base of the parallelogram,
the areas are equal.
Cor. 2.—The sum of the triangles whose bases are two opposite sides of
a parallelogram, and which have any point between these sides as a common
vertex, is equal to half the parallelogram.

PROP. XLII.—Problem.
To construct a parallelogram equal to a given triangle (ABC), and having an
angle equal to a given angle (D).

Sol.—Bisect AB in E. Join EC. Make the angle BEF [xxiii.] equal to D.

Draw CG parallel to AB [xxxi.], and BG parallel to EF . EG is a parallelogram
fulfilling the required conditions.
Dem.—Because AE is equal to EB (const.), the triangle AEC is equal
to the triangle EBC [xxxviii.], therefore the triangle ABC is double of the
triangle EBC; but the parallelogram EG is also double of the triangle EBC
[xli.], because they are on the same base EB, and between the same parallels
EB and CG. Therefore the parallelogram EG is equal to the triangle ABC,
and it has (const.) the angle BEF equal to D. Hence EG is a parallelogram
fulfilling the required conditions.

PROP. XLIII.—Theorem.

The parallels (EF, GH) through any

point (K) in one of the diagonals (AC) of
a parallelogram divide it into four parallelo-
grams, of which the two (BK, KD) through
which the diagonal does not pass, and which

39
are called the complements of the other
two, are equal.
Dem.—Because the diagonal bisects the
parallelograms AC, AK, KC we have [xxxiv.] the triangle ADC equal to the
triangle ABC, the triangle AHK equal to AEK, and the triangle KF C equal
to the triangle KGC. Hence, subtracting the sums of the two last equalities
from the first, we get the parallelogram DK equal to the parallelogram KB.
Cor. 1.—If through a point K within a parallelogram ABCD lines drawn
parallel to the sides make the parallelograms DK, KB equal, K is a point in
the diagonal AC.
Cor. 2.—The parallelogram BH is equal to AF , and BF to HC.
Cor. 2. supplies an easy demonstration of a fundamental Proposition in Statics.

Exercises.
1. If EF , GH be parallels to the adja-
cent sides of a parallelogram ABCD, the di-
agonals EH, GF of two of the four s into
which they divide it and one of the diagonals
of ABCD are concurrent.
Dem.—Let EH, GF meet in M ;
through M draw M P , M J parallel to AB,
BC. Produce AD, GH, BC to meet M P ,
and AB, EF , DC to meet M J. Now the
complement OF = F J: to each add the
F L, and we get the figure OF L = CJ.
Again, the complement P H = HK [xliii.]:
to each add the OC, and we get the
P C = figure OF L. Hence the P C = CJ. Therefore they are about the same di-
agonal [xliii., Cor. 1]. Hence AC produced will pass through M .
2. The middle points of the three diagonals AC, BD, EF of a quadrilateral ABCD are
collinear.

Dem.—Complete the AEBG. Draw DH, CI parallel to AG, BG. Join IH, and
produce; then AB, CD, IH are concurrent (Ex. 1); therefore IH will pass through F . Join

40
EI, EH. Now [xi., Ex. 2, 3] the middle points of EI, EH, EF are collinear, but [xxxiv.,
Ex. 1] the middle points of EI, EH are the middle points of AC, BD. Hence the middle
points of AC, BD, EF are collinear.

PROP. XLIV.—Problem.

To a given, right line (AB) to apply a parallelogram which shall be equal to

a given triangle (C), and have one of its angles equal to a given angle (D).

Sol.—Construct the parallelogram BEF G [xlii.] equal to the given triangle

C, and having the angle B equal to the given angle D, and so that its side BE
shall be in the same right line with AB. Through A draw AH parallel to BG
[xxxi.], and produce F G to meet it in H. Join HB. Then because HA and F E
are parallels, and HF intersects them, the sum of the angles AHF , HF E is two
right angles [xxix.]; therefore the sum of the angles BHF , HF E is less than
two right angles; and therefore (Axiom xii.) the lines HB, F E, if produced,
will meet as at K. Through K draw KL parallel to AB [xxxi.], and produce
HA and GB to meet it in the points L and M . Then AM is a parallelogram
fulfilling the required conditions.
Dem.—The parallelogram AM is equal to GE [xliii.]; but GE is equal to
the triangle C (const.); therefore AM is equal to the triangle C. Again, the
angle ABM is equal to EBG [xv.], and EBG is equal to D (const.); therefore
the angle ABM is equal to D; and AM is constructed on the given line; therefore
it is the parallelogram required.

PROP. XLV.—Problem.
To construct a parallelogram equal to a given rectilineal figure (ABCD), and
having an angle equal to a given rectilineal angle (X).

41
 Sol.—Join BD. Construct a parallelogram EG [xlii.] equal to the triangle
ABD, and having the angle E equal to the given angle X; and to the right line
GH apply the parallelogram HI equal to the triangle BCD, and having the
angle GHK equal to X [xliv.], and so on for additional triangles if there be
any. Then EI is a parallelogram fulfilling the required conditions.
Dem.—Because the angles GHK, F EH are each equal to X (const.), they
are equal to one another: to each add the angle GHE, and we have the sum
of the angles GHK, GHE equal to the sum of the angles F EH, GHE; but
since HG is parallel to EF , and EH intersects them, the sum of F EH, GHE
is two right angles [xxix.]. Hence the sum of GHK, GHE is two right angles;
therefore EH, HK are in the same right line [xiv.].
Again, because GH intersects the parallels F G, EK, the alternate angles
F GH, GHK are equal [xxix.]: to each add the angle HGI, and we have the
sum of the angles F GH, HGI equal to the sum of the angles GHK, HGI; but
since GI is parallel to HK, and GH intersects them, the sum of the angles
GHK, HGI is equal to two right angles [xxix.]. Hence the sum of the angles
F GH, HGI is two right angles; therefore F G and GI are in the same right line
[xiv.].
Again, because EG and HI are parallelograms, EF and KI are each parallel
to GH; hence [xxx.] EF is parallel to KI, and the opposite sides EK and F I
are parallel; therefore EI is a parallelogram; and because the parallelogram EG
(const.) is equal to the triangle ABD, and HI to the triangle BCD, the whole
parallelogram EI is equal to the rectilineal figure ABCD, and it has the angle
E equal to the given angle X. Hence EI is a parallelogram fulfilling the required
conditions.
It would simplify Problems xliv., xlv., if they were stated as the constructing of rectan-
gles, and in this special form they would be better understood by the student, since rectangles
are the simplest areas to which others are referred.

Exercises.
1. Construct a rectangle equal to the sum of two or any number of rectilineal figures.
2. Construct a rectangle equal to the difference of two given figures.

42
 PROP. XLVI.—Problem.
On a given right line (AB) to describe a square.

Sol.—Erect AD at right angles to AB [xi.], and make

it equal to AB [iii.]. Through D draw DC parallel to AB
[xxxi.], and through B draw BC parallel to AD; then
AC is the square required.
Dem.—Because AC is a parallelogram, AB is equal
to CD [xxxiv.]; but AB is equal to AD (const.); there-
fore AD is equal to CD, and AD is equal to BC [xxxiv.].
Hence the four sides are equal; therefore AC is a lozenge,
and the angle A is a right angle. Therefore AC is a
square (Def. xxx.).

Exercises.
1. The squares on equal lines are equal; and, conversely, the sides of equal squares are
equal.
2. The parallelograms about the diagonal of a square are squares.
3. If on the four sides of a square, or on the sides produced, points be taken equidistant
from the four angles, they will be the angular points of another square, and similarly for a
regular pentagon, hexagon, &c.
4. Divide a given square into five equal parts; namely, four right-angled triangles, and a
square.

PROP. XLVII.—Theorem.
In a right-angled triangle (ABC) the square on the hypotenuse (AB) is equal
to the sum of the squares on the other two sides (AC, BC).

Dem.—On the sides AB, BC,

CA describe squares [xlvi.]. Draw
CL parallel to AG. Join CG, BK.
Then because the angle ACB is right
(hyp.), and ACH is right, being the
angle of a square, the sum of the an-
gles ACB, ACH is two right angles;
therefore BC, CH are in the same
right line [xiv.]. In like manner AC,
CD are in the same right line. Again,
because BAG is the angle of a square
it is a right angle: in like manner
CAK is a right angle. Hence BAG
is equal to CAK: to each add BAC,
and we get the angle CAG equal to
KAB. Again, since BG and CK are squares, BA is equal to AG, and CA to
AK. Hence the two triangles CAG, KAB have the sides CA, AG in one respec-
tively equal to the sides KA, AB in the other, and the contained angles CAG,

43
KAB also equal. Therefore [iv.] the triangles are equal; but the parallelogram
AL is double of the triangle CAG [xli.], because they are on the same base AG,
and between the same parallels AG and CL. In like manner the parallelogram
AH is double of the triangle KAB, because they are on the same base AK, and
between the same parallels AK and BH; and since doubles of equal things are
equal (Axiom vi.), the parallelogram AL is equal to AH. In like manner it can
be proved that the parallelogram BL is equal to BD. Hence the whole square
AF is equal to the sum of the two squares AH and BD.

44
 Or thus: Let all the squares be made in reversed di-
rections. Join CG, BK, and through C draw OL parallel
to AG. Now, taking the ∠BAC from the right ∠s BAG,
CAK, the remaining ∠s CAG, BAK are equal. Hence the
△s CAG, BAK have the side CA = AK, and AG = AB,
and the ∠CAG = BAK; therefore [iv.] they are equal; and
since [xli.] the s AL, AH are respectively the doubles of
these triangles, they are equal. In like manner the s BL,
BD are equal; hence the whole square AF is equal to the
sum of the two squares AH, BD.
This proof is shorter than the usual one, since it is not
necessary to prove that AC, CD are in one right line. In a
similar way the Proposition may be proved by taking any of
the eight figures formed by turning the squares in all possible
directions. Another simplification of the proof would be got
by considering that the point A is such that one of the △s CAG, BAK can be turned round
it in its own plane until it coincides with the other; and hence that they are congruent.

Exercises.
1. The square on AC is equal to the rectangle AB . AO, and the square on BC = AB . BO.
2. The square on CO = AO . OB.
3. AC 2 − BC 2 = AO2 − BO2 .
4. Find a line whose square shall be equal to the sum of two given squares.
5. Given the base of a triangle and the difference of the squares of its sides, the locus of
its vertex is a right line perpendicular to the base.
6. The transverse lines BK, CG are perpendicular to each other.
7. If EG be joined, its square is equal to AC 2 + 4BC 2 .
8. The square described on the sum of the sides of a right-angled triangle exceeds the
square on the hypotenuse by four times the area of the triangle (see fig., xlvi., Ex. 3). More
generally, if the vertical angle of a triangle be equal to the angle of a regular polygon of n
sides, then the regular polygon of n sides, described on a line equal to the sum of its sides,
exceeds the area of the regular polygon of n sides described on the base by n times the area
of the triangle.
9. If AC and BK intersect in P , and through P a line be drawn parallel to BC, meeting
AB in Q; then CP is equal to P Q.
10. Each of the triangles AGK and BEF , formed by joining adjacent corners of the
squares, is equal to the right-angled triangle ABC.
11. Find a line whose square shall be equal to the difference of the squares on two lines.
12. The square on the difference of the sides AC, CB is less than the square on the
hypotenuse by four times the area of the triangle.
13. If AE be joined, the lines AE, BK, CL, are concurrent.
14. In an equilateral triangle, three times the square on any side is equal to four times the
square on the perpendicular to it from the opposite vertex.
15. On BE, a part of the side BC of a square ABCD, is described the square BEF G,
having its side BG in the continuation of AB; it is required to divide the figure AGF ECD
into three parts which will form a square.
16. Four times the sum of the squares on the medians which bisect the sides of a right-
angled triangle is equal to five times the square on the hypotenuse.
17. If perpendiculars be let fall on the sides of a polygon from any point, dividing each
side into two segments, the sum of the squares on one set of alternate segments is equal to
the sum of the squares on the remaining set.
18. The sum of the squares on lines drawn from any point to one pair of opposite angles
of a rectangle is equal to the sum of the squares on the lines from the same point to the
remaining pair.
19. Divide the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle into two parts, such that the difference
between their squares shall be equal to the square on one of the sides.

45
 20. From the extremities of the base of a triangle perpendiculars are let fall on the opposite
sides; prove that the sum of the rectangles contained by the sides and their lower segments is
equal to the square on the base.

PROP. XLVIII.—Theorem.

If the square on one side (AB) of a triangle be equal to the sum of the squares
on the remaining sides (AC, CB), the angle (C) opposite to that side is a right
angle.
Dem.—Erect CD at right angles to CB [xi.], and
make CD equal to CA [iii.]. Join BD. Then because
AC is equal to CD, the square on AC is equal to the
square on CD: to each add the square on CB, and
we have the sum of the squares on AC, CB equal
to the sum of the squares on CD, CB; but the sum
of the squares on AC, CB is equal to the square on
AB (hyp.), and the sum of the squares on CD, CB
is equal to the square on BD [xlvii.]. Therefore the
square on AB is equal to the square on BD. Hence AB is equal to BD [xlvi.,
Ex. 1]. Again, because AC is equal to CD (const.), and CB common to the
two triangles ACB, DCB, and the base AB equal to the base DB, the angle
ACB is equal to the angle DCB; but the angle DCB is a right angle (const.).
Hence the angle ACB is a right angle.
The foregoing proof forms an exception to Euclid’s
demonstrations of converse propositions, for it is direct.
The following is an indirect proof:—If CB be not at right
angles to AC, let CD be perpendicular to it. Make CD =
CB. Join AD. Then, as before, it can be proved that AD
is equal to AB, and CD is equal to CB (const.). This is
contrary to Prop. vii. Hence the angle ACB is a right
angle.

Questions for Examination on Book I.

1. What is Geometry?
2. What is geometric magnitude? Ans. That which has extension in space.
3. Name the primary concepts of geometry. Ans. Points, lines, surfaces, and solids.
4. How may lines be divided? Ans. Into straight and curved.
5. How is a straight line generated? Ans. By the motion of a point which has the same
direction throughout.
6. How is a curved line generated? Ans. By the motion of a point which continually
changes its direction.
7. How may surfaces be divided? Ans. Into planes and curved surfaces.
8. How may a plane surface be generated. Ans. By the motion of a right line which crosses
another right line, and moves along it without changing its direction.
9. Why has a point no dimensions?
10. Why has a line neither breadth nor thickness?
11. How many dimensions has a surface?
12. What is Plane Geometry?

46
 13. What portion of plane geometry forms the subject of the “First Six Books of Euclid’s
Elements”? Ans. The geometry of the point, line, and circle.
14. What is the subject-matter of Book I.?
15. How many conditions are necessary to fix the position of a point in a plane? Ans. Two;
for it must be the intersection of two lines, straight or curved.
16. Give examples taken from Book I.
17. In order to construct a line, how many conditions must be given? Ans. Two; as, for
instance, two points through which it must pass; or one point through which it must pass and
a line to which it must be parallel or perpendicular, &c.
18. What problems on the drawing of lines occur in Book I.? Ans. ii., ix., xi., xii., xxiii.,
xxxi., in each of which, except Problem 2, there are two conditions. The direction in Problem
2 is indeterminate.
19. How many conditions are required in order to describe a circle? Ans. Three; as, for
instance, the position of the centre (which depends on two conditions) and the length of the
radius (compare Post. iii.).
20. How is a proposition proved indirectly? Ans. By proving that its contradictory is false.
21. What is meant by the obverse of a proposition?
22. What propositions in Book I. are the obverse respectively of Propositions iv., v., vi.,
xxvii.?
23. What proposition is an instance of the rule of identity?
24. What are congruent figures?
25. What other name is applied to them? Ans. They are said to be identically equal.
26. Mention all the instances of equality which are not congruence that occur in Book I.
27. What is the difference between the symbols denoting congruence and identity?
28. Classify the properties of triangles and parallelograms proved in Book I.
29. What proposition is the converse of Prop. xxvi., Part I.?
30. Define adjacent, exterior, interior, alternate angles respectively.
31. What is meant by the projection of one line on another?
32. What are meant by the medians of a triangle?
33. What is meant by the third diagonal of a quadrilateral?
34. Mention some propositions in Book I. which are particular cases of more general ones
that follow.
35. What is the sum of all the exterior angles of any rectilineal figure equal to?
36. How many conditions must be given in order to construct a triangle? Ans. Three;
such as the three sides, or two sides and an angle, &c.

Exercises on Book I.
1. Any triangle is equal to the fourth part of that which is formed by drawing through
each vertex a line parallel to its opposite side.
2. The three perpendiculars of the first triangle in question 1 are the perpendiculars at
the middle points of the sides of the second triangle.
3. Through a given point draw a line so that the portion intercepted by the legs of a given
angle may be bisected in the point.
4. The three medians of a triangle are concurrent.
5. The medians of a triangle divide each other in the ratio of 2 : 1.
6. Construct a triangle, being given two sides and the median of the third side.
7. In every triangle the sum of the medians is less than the perimeter, and greater than
three-fourths of the perimeter.
8. Construct a triangle, being given a side and the two medians of the remaining sides.
9. Construct a triangle, being given the three medians.
10. The angle included between the perpendicular from the vertical angle of a triangle
on the base, and the bisector of the vertical angle, is equal to half the difference of the base
angles.
11. Find in two parallels two points which shall be equidistant from a given point, and
whose line of connexion shall be parallel to a given line.
12. Construct a parallelogram, being given two diagonals and a side.

47
 13. The smallest median of a triangle corresponds to the greatest side.
14. Find in two parallels two points subtending a right angle at a given point and equally
distant from it.
15. The sum of the distances of any point in the base of an isosceles triangle from the
equal sides is equal to the distance of either extremity of the base from the opposite side.
16. The three perpendiculars at the middle points of the sides of a triangle are concurrent.
Hence prove that perpendiculars from the vertices on the opposite sides are concurrent [see
Ex. 2].
17. Inscribe a lozenge in a triangle having for an angle one angle of the triangle.
18. Inscribe a square in a triangle having its base on a side of the triangle.
19. Find the locus of a point, the sum or the difference of whose distance from two fixed
lines is equal to a given length.
20. The sum of the perpendiculars from any point in the interior of an equilateral triangle
is equal to the perpendicular from any vertex on the opposite side.
21. The distance of the foot of the perpendicular from either extremity of the base of a
triangle on the bisector of the vertical angle, from the middle point of the base, is equal to
half the difference of the sides.
22. In the same case, if the bisector of the external vertical angle be taken, the distance
will be equal to half the sum of the sides.
23. Find a point in one of the sides of a triangle such that the sum of the intercepts made
by the other sides, on parallels drawn from the same point to these sides, may be equal to a
given length.
24. If two angles have their legs respectively parallel, their bisectors are either parallel or
perpendicular.
25. If lines be drawn from the extremities of the base of a triangle to the feet of perpen-
diculars let fall from the same points on either bisector of the vertical angle, these lines meet
on the other bisector of the vertical angle.
26. The perpendiculars of a triangle are the bisectors of the angles of the triangle whose
vertices are the feet of these perpendiculars.
27. Inscribe in a given triangle a parallelogram whose diagonals shall intersect in a given
point.
28. Construct a quadrilateral, the four sides being given in magnitude, and the middle
points of two opposite sides being given in position.
29. The bases of two or more triangles having a common vertex are given, both in mag-
nitude and position, and the sum of the areas is given; prove that the locus of the vertex is a
right line.
30. If the sum of the perpendiculars let fall from a given point on the sides of a given
rectilineal figure be given, the locus of the point is a right line.
31. ABC is an isosceles triangle whose equal sides are AB, AC; B ′ C ′ is any secant cutting
the equal sides in B ′ , C ′ , so that AB ′ + AC ′ = AB + AC: prove that B ′ C ′ is greater than
BC.
32. A, B are two given points, and P is a point in a given line L; prove that the difference
of AP and P B is a maximum when L bisects the angle AP B; and that their sum is a minimum
if it bisects the supplement.
33. Bisect a quadrilateral by a right line drawn from one of its angular points.
34. AD and BC are two parallel lines cut obliquely by AB, and perpendicularly by AC;
and between these lines we draw BED, cutting AC in E, such that ED = 2AB; prove that
the angle DBC is one-third of ABC.
35. If O be the point of concurrence of the bisectors of the angles of the triangle ABC,
and if AO produced meet BC in D, and from O, OE be drawn perpendicular to BC; prove
that the angle BOD is equal to the angle COE.
36. If the exterior angles of a triangle be bisected, the three external triangles formed on
the sides of the original triangle are equiangular.
37. The angle made by the bisectors of two consecutive angles of a convex quadrilateral
is equal to half the sum of the remaining angles; and the angle made by the bisectors of two
opposite angles is equal to half the difference of the two other angles.

48
 38. If in the construction of the figure, Proposition xlvii., EF , KG be joined,
EF 2 + KG2 = 5AB 2 .
39. Given the middle points of the sides of a convex polygon of an odd number of sides,
construct the polygon.
40. Trisect a quadrilateral by lines drawn from one of its angles.
41. Given the base of a triangle in magnitude and position and the sum of the sides; prove
that the perpendicular at either extremity of the base to the adjacent side, and the external
bisector of the vertical angle, meet on a given line perpendicular to the base.
42. The bisectors of the angles of a convex quadrilateral form a quadrilateral whose op-
posite angles are supplemental. If the first quadrilateral be a parallelogram, the second is a
rectangle; if the first be a rectangle, the second is a square.
43. The middle points of the sides AB, BC, CA of a triangle are respectively D, E, F ; DG
is drawn parallel to BF to meet EF ; prove that the sides of the triangle DCG are respectively
equal to the three medians of the triangle ABC.
44. Find the path of a billiard ball started from a given point which, after being reflected
from the four sides of the table, will pass through another given point.
45. If two lines bisecting two angles of a triangle and terminated by the opposite sides be
equal, the triangle is isosceles.
46. State and prove the Proposition corresponding to Exercise 41, when the base and
difference of the sides are given.
47. If a square be inscribed in a triangle, the rectangle under its side and the sum of the
base and altitude is equal to twice the area of the triangle.
48. If AB, AC be equal sides of an isosceles triangle, and if BD be a perpendicular on
AC; prove that BC 2 = 2AC . CD.
49. The sum of the equilateral triangles described on the legs of a right-angled triangle is
equal to the equilateral triangle described on the hypotenuse.
50. Given the base of a triangle, the difference of the base angles, and the sum or difference
of the sides; construct it.
51. Given the base of a triangle, the median that bisects the base, and the area; construct
it.
52. If the diagonals AC, BD of a quadrilateral ABCD intersect in E, and be bisected in
the points F , G, then
4 △ EF G = (AEB + ECD) − (AED + EBC).
53. If squares be described on the sides of any triangle, the lines of connexion of the adja-
cent corners are respectively—(1) the doubles of the medians of the triangle; (2) perpendicular
to them.

49
 BOOK II.
THEORY OF RECTANGLES

Every Proposition in the Second Book has either a square or a rectangle in

its enunciation. Before commencing it the student should read the following
preliminary explanations: by their assistance it will be seen that this Book,
which is usually considered difficult, will be rendered not only easy, but almost
intuitively evident.
1. As the linear unit is that by which we express all linear measures, so the square unit is
that to which all superficial measures are referred. Again, as there are different linear units
in use, such as in this country, inches, feet, yards, miles, &c., and in France, metres, and their
multiples or sub-multiples, so different square units are employed.
2. A square unit is the square described on a line whose length is the linear unit. Thus
a square inch is the square described on a line whose length is an inch; a square foot is the
square described on a line whose length is a foot, &c.
3. If we take a linear foot, describe a square on it, divide two adjacent sides each into
twelve equal parts, and draw parallels to the sides, we evidently divide the square foot into
square inches; and as there will manifestly be 12 rectangular parallelograms, each containing
12 square inches, the square foot contains 144 square inches.
In the same manner it can be shown that a square yard contains 9 square feet; and so in
general the square described on any line contains n2 times the square described on the nth
part of the line. Thus, as a simple case, the square on a line is four times the square on its
half. On account of this property the second power of a quantity is called its square; and,
conversely, the square on a line AB is expressed symbolically by AB 2 .
4. If a rectangular parallelogram be such that two adjacent sides contain respectively m
and n linear units, by dividing one side into m and the other into n equal parts, and drawing
parallels to the sides, the whole area is evidently divided into mn square units. Hence the area
of the parallelogram is found by multiplying its length by its breadth, and this explains why
we say (see Def. iv.) a rectangle is contained by any two adjacent sides; for if we multiply the
length of one by the length of the other we have the area. Thus, if AB, AD be two adjacent
sides of a rectangle, the rectangle is expressed by AB . AD.

Definitions.

i. If a point C be taken in a line AB, the

parts AC, CB are called segments, and C a point
of division.
ii. If C be taken in the line AB produced,
AC, CB are still called the segments of the
line AB; but C is called a point of external division.
iii. A parallelogram whose angles are right angles is called a rectangle.
iv. A rectangle is said to be contained by
any two adjacent sides. Thus the rectangle
ABCD is said to be contained by AB, AD, or
by AB, BC, &c.
v. The rectangle contained by two sepa-
rate lines such as AB and CD is the parallel-
ogram formed by erecting a perpendicular to

50
AB, at A, equal to CD, and drawing parallels:
the area of the rectangle will be AB . CD.

vi. In any parallelogram the figure which

is composed of either of the parallelograms
about a diagonal and the two complements
[see I., xliii.] is called a gnomon. Thus, if we
take away either of the parallelograms AO,
OC from the parallelogram AC, the remain-
der is called a gnomon.

PROP. I.—Theorem.

If there be two lines (A, BC), one of which is divided into any number of
parts (BD, DE, EC), the rectangle contained by the two lines (A, BC), is
equal to the sum of the rectangles contained by the undivided line (A) and the
several parts of the divided line.
Dem.—Erect BF at right an-
gles to BC [I., xi.] and make it
equal to A. Complete the parallel-
ogram BK (Def. v.). Through D,
E draw DG, EH parallel to BF .
Because the angles at B, D, E are
right angles, each of the quadrilat-
erals BG, DH, EK is a rectangle.
Again, since A is equal to BF (const.), the rectangle contained by A and BC
is the rectangle contained by BF and BC (Def. v.); but BK is the rectangle
contained by BF and BC. Hence the rectangle contained by A and BC is BK.
In like manner the rectangle contained by A and BD is BG. Again, since A is
equal to BF (const.), and BF is equal to DG [I. xxxiv.], A is equal to DG.
Hence the rectangle contained by A and DE is the figure DH (Def. v.). In like
manner the rectangle contained by A and EC is the figure EK. Hence we have
the following identities:—
Rectangle contained by A and BD ≡ BG.
,, ,, A ,, DE ≡ DH.
,, ,, A ,, EC ≡ EK.
,, ,, A ,, BC ≡ BK.
But BK is equal to the sum of BG, DH, EK (I., Axiom ix.). Therefore the
rectangle contained by A and BC is equal to the sum of the rectangles contained
by A and BD, A and DE, A and EC.
If we denote the lines BD, DE, EC by a, b, c, the Proposition asserts that the rectangle
contained by A, and a + b + c is equal to the sum of the rectangles contained by A and a, A

51
and b, A and c, or, as it may be written, A(a + b + c) = Aa + Ab + Ac. This corresponds to
the distributive law in multiplication, and shows that rectangles in Geometry, and products
in Arithmetic and Algebra, are subject to the same rules.
Illustration.—Suppose A to be 6 inches; BD, 5 inches; DE, 4 inches; EC, 3 inches; then
BC will be 12 inches; and the rectangles will have the following values:—
Rectangle A . BC = 6 × 12 = 72 square inches.
,, A . BD = 6 × 5 = 30 ,,
,, A . DE = 6 × 4 = 24 ,,
,, A . EC = 6 × 3 = 18 ,,
Now the sum of the three last rectangles, viz. 30, 24, 18, is 72. Hence the rectangle
A . BC = A . BD + A . DE + A . EC.

The Second Book is occupied with the relations between the segments of a
line divided in various ways. All these can be proved in the most simple man-
ner by Algebraic Multiplication. We recommend the student to make himself
acquainted with the proofs by this method as well as with those of Euclid. He
will thus better understand the meaning of each Proposition.
Cor. 1.—The rectangle contained by a line and the difference of two others
is equal to the difference of the rectangles contained by the line and each of the
others.
Cor. 2.—The area of a triangle is equal to half the rectangle contained by its
base and perpendicular.
Dem.—From the vertex C let fall the per-
pendicular CD. Draw EF parallel to AB, and
AE, BF each parallel to CD. Then AF is the
rectangle contained by AB and BF ; but BF is
equal to CD. Hence AF = AB . CD; but [I. xli.]
the triangle ABC is = half the parallelogram AF .
Therefore the triangle ABC is = 12 AB . CD.

PROP. II.—Theorem.
If a line (AB) be divided into any two parts (at C), the square on the whole
line is equal to the sum of the rectangles contained by the whole and each of the
segments (AC, CB).
Dem.—On AB describe the square ABDF
[I. xlvi.], and through C draw CE parallel to AF
[I. xxxi.]. Now, since AB is equal to AF , the rectan-
gle contained by AB and AC is equal to the rectangle
contained by AF and AC; but AE is the rectangle
contained by AF and AC. Hence the rectangle con-
tained by AB and AC is equal to AE. In like manner
the rectangle contained by AB and CB is equal to the
figure CD. Therefore the sum of the two rectangles
AB . AC, AB . CB is equal to the square on AB.
Or thus: AB = AC + CB,
and AB = AB.
Hence, multiplying, we get AB 2 = AB . AC + AB . CB.

52
 This Proposition is the particular case of i. when the divided and undivided lines are
equal, hence it does not require a separate Demonstration.

PROP. III.—Theorem.

If a line (AB) be divided into two segments (at C), the rectangle contained
by the whole line and either segment (CB) is equal to the square on that segment
together with the rectangle contained by the segments.
Dem.—On BC describe the square BCDE
[I. xlvi.]. Through A draw AF parallel to CD:
produce ED to meet AF in F . Now since CB
is equal to CD, the rectangle contained by AC,
CB is equal to the rectangle contained by AC,
CD; but the rectangle contained by AC, CD is
the figure AD. Hence the rectangle AC . CB is equal to the figure AD, and the
square on CB is the figure CE. Hence the rectangle AC . CB, together with
the square on CB, is equal to the figure AE.
Again, since CB is equal to BE, the rectangle AB . CB is equal to the
rectangle AB . BE; but the rectangle AB . BE is equal to the figure AE. Hence
the rectangle AB . CB is equal to the figure AE. And since things which are
equal to the same are equal to one another, the rectangle AC . CB, together with
the square on CB, is equal to the rectangle AB . CB.
Or thus: AB = AC + CB,
CB = CB.
Hence AB . CB = AC . CB + CB 2 .
Prop. iii. is the particular case of Prop. i., when the undivided line is equal to a segment
of the divided line.

PROP. IV.—Theorem.

If a line (AB) be divided into any two parts (at C), the square on the whole
line is equal to the sum of the squares on the parts (AC, CB), together with
twice their rectangle.
Dem.—On AB describe a square ABDE. Join
EB; through C draw CF parallel to AE, intersecting
BE in G; and through G draw HI parallel to AB.
Now since AE is equal to AB, the angle ABE
is equal to AEB [I. v.]; but since BE intersects the
parallels AE, CF , the angle AEB is equal to CGB
[I. xxix.]. Hence the angle CBG is equal to CGB,
and therefore [I. vi.] CG is equal to CB; but CG is
equal to BI and CB to GI. Hence the figure CBIG
is a lozenge, and the angle CBI is right. Hence (I., Def. xxx.) it is a square.
In like manner the figure EF GH is a square.

53
 Again, since CB is equal to CG, the rectangle AC . CB is equal to the
rectangle AC . CG; but AC . CG is the figure AG (Def. iv.). Therefore the
rectangle AC . CB is equal to the figure AG. Now the figures AG, GD are
equal [I. xliii.], being the complements about the diagonal of the parallelogram
AD. Hence the parallelograms AG, GD are together equal to twice the rectangle
AC . CB. Again, the figure HF is the square on HG, and HG is equal to AC.
Therefore HF is equal to the square on AC, and CI is the square on CB; but
the whole figure AD, which is the square on AB, is the sum of the four figures
HF , CI, AG, GD. Therefore the square on AB is equal to the sum of the
squares on AC, CB, and twice the rectangle AC . CB.
Or thus: On AB describe the square ABDE, and cut off
AH, EG, DF each equal to CB. Join CF , F G, GH, HC. Now
the four △s ACH, CBF , F DG, GEH are evidently equal;
therefore their sum is equal to four times the △ACH; but the
△ACH is half the rectangle AC . AH (i. Cor. 2)—that is, equal
to half the rectangle AC . CB. Therefore the sum of the four
triangles is equal to 2AC . CB.
Again, the figure CF GH is a square [I. xlvi., Cor. 3], and
equal to AC 2 + AH 2 [I. xlvii.]—that is, equal to AC 2 + CB 2 .
Hence the whole figure ABDE = AC 2 + CB 2 + 2AC . CB.

Or thus: AB = AC + CB.
Squaring, we get AB 2 =AC 2 + 2AC . CB + CB 2 .

Cor. 1.—The parallelograms about the diagonal of a square are squares.

Cor. 2.—The square on a line is equal to four
times the square on its half.
For let AB = 2AC, then AB 2 = 4AC 2 .
This Cor. may be proved by the First Book
thus: Erect CD at right angles to AB, and make
CD = AC or CB. Join AD, DB.

Then AD2 = AC 2 + CD2 = 2AC 2

In like manner, DB 2 = 2CB 2 ;
therefore AD2 + DB 2 = 2AC 2 + 2CB 2 = 4AC 2 .

But since the angle ADB is right, AD2 + DB 2 = AB 2 ;

therefore AB 2 = 4AC 2 .

Cor. 3.—If a line be divided into any number of parts, the square on the
whole is equal to the sum of the squares on all the parts, together with twice the
sum of the rectangles contained by the several distinct pairs of parts.

54
 Exercises.
1. Prove Proposition iv. by using Propositions ii. and iii.
2. If from the vertical angle of a right-angled triangle a perpendicular be let fall on the
hypotenuse, its square is equal to the rectangle contained by the segments of the hypotenuse.
3. From the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle portions are cut off equal to the adjacent
sides; prove that the square on the middle segment is equal to twice the rectangle contained
by the extreme segments.
4. In any right-angled triangle the square on the sum of the hypotenuse and perpendicular,
from the right angle on the hypotenuse, exceeds the square on the sum of the sides by the
square on the perpendicular.
5. The square on the perimeter of a right-angled triangle is equal to twice the rectangle
contained by the sum of the hypotenuse and one side, and the sum of the hypotenuse and the
other side.

PROP. V.—Theorem.

If a line (AB) be divided into two equal parts (at C), and also into two
unequal parts (at D), the rectangle (AD . DB) contained by the unequal parts,
together with the square on the part (CD) between the points of section, is equal
to the square on half the line.
Dem.—On CB describe the square
CBEF [I. xlvi.]. Join BF . Through D
draw DG parallel to CF , meeting BF in
H. Through H draw KM parallel to AB,
and through A draw AK parallel to CL
[I. xxxi.].
The parallelogram CM is equal to DE
[I. xliii., Cor. 2]; but AL is equal to CM [I. xxxvi.], because they are on equal
bases AC, CB, and between the same parallels; therefore AL is equal to DE:
to each add CH, and we get the parallelogram AH equal to the gnomon CM G;
but AH is equal to the rectangle AD . DH, and therefore equal to the rectangle
AD . DB, since DH is equal to DB [iv., Cor. 1]; therefore the rectangle AD . DB
is equal to the gnomon CM G, and the square on CD is equal to the figure LG.
Hence the rectangle AD . DB, together with the square on CD, is equal to the
whole figure CBEF —that is, to the square on CB.

Or thus: AD = AC + CD = BC + CD;
DB = BC − CD;
therefore AD . BD = (BC + CD)(BC − CD) = BC 2 − CD2 .
Hence AD . BD + CD2 = BC 2 .

Cor. 1.—The rectangle AD . DB is the rectangle contained by the sum of the

lines AC, CD and their difference; and we have proved it equal to the difference
between the square on AC and the square on CD. Hence the difference of the

55
squares on two lines is equal to the rectangle contained by their sum and their
difference.
Cor. 2.—The perimeter of the rectangle AH is equal to 2AB, and is therefore
independent of the position of the point D on the line AB; and the area of the
same rectangle is less than the square on half the line by the square on the
segment between D and the middle point of the line; therefore, when D is the
middle point, the rectangle will have the maximum area. Hence, of all rectangles
having the same perimeter, the square has the greatest area.

Exercises.
1. Divide a given line so that the rectangle contained by its parts may have a maximum
area.
2. Divide a given line so that the rectangle contained by its segments may be equal to a
given square, not exceeding the square on half the given line.
3. The rectangle contained by the sum and the difference of two sides of a triangle is equal
to the rectangle contained by the base and the difference of the segments of the base, made
by the perpendicular from the vertex.
4. The difference of the sides of a triangle is less than the difference of the segments of
the base, made by the perpendicular from the vertex.
5. The difference between the square on one of the equal sides of an isosceles triangle, and
the square on any line drawn from the vertex to a point in the base, is equal to the rectangle
contained by the segments of the base.
6. The square on either side of a right-angled triangle is equal to the rectangle contained
by the sum and the difference of the hypotenuse and the other side.

PROP. VI.—Theorem.

If a line (AB) be bisected (at C), and divided externally in any point (D),
the rectangle (AD . BD) contained by the segments made by the external point,
together with the square on half the line, is equal to the square on the segment
between the middle point and the point of external division.
Dem.—On CD describe the square
CDF E [I. xlvi.], and join DE; through
B draw BHG parallel to CE [I. xxxi.],
meeting DE in H; through H draw KLM
parallel to AD; and through A draw AK
parallel to CL. Then because AC is equal
to CB, the rectangle AL is equal to CH
[I. xxxvi.]; but the complements CH, HF
are equal [I. xliii.]; therefore AL is equal
to HF . To each of these equals add CM and LG, and we get AM and LG
equal to the square CDF E; but AM is equal to the rectangle AD . DM , and
therefore equal to the rectangle AD . DB, since DB is equal to DM ; also LG
is equal to the square on CB, and CDF E is the square on CD. Hence the
rectangle AD . DB, together with the square on CB, is equal to the square on
CD.

56
 Or thus:—
Dem.—On CB describe the square
CBEF [I. xlvi.]. Join BF . Through D
draw DG parallel to CF , meeting F B pro-
duced in H. Through H draw KM parallel
to AB. Through A draw AK parallel to CL
[I. xxxi.].
The parallelogram CM is equal to DE
[I. xliii.]; but AL is equal to CM [I. xxxvi.],
because they are on equal bases AC, CB, and
between the same parallels; therefore AL is equal to DE. To each add CH, and
we get the parallelogram AH equal to the gnomon CM G; but AH is equal
to the rectangle AD . DH, and therefore equal to the rectangle AD . DB, since
DH is equal to DB [iv., Cor. 1]; therefore the rectangle AD . DB is equal to
the gnomon CM G, and the square on CB is the figure CE. Therefore the
rectangle AD . DB, together with the square on CB, is equal to the whole figure
LHGF —that is, equal to the square on LH or to the square on CD.

Or thus: AD = AC + CD = CD + CB;
BD = CD − CB.
Hence AD . DB = (CD + CB)(CD − CB) = CD2 − CB 2 ;
therefore AD . DB + CB 2 = CD2 .

Exercises.
1. Show that Proposition vi. is reduced to Proposition v. by producing the line in the
opposite direction.
2. Divide a given line externally, so that the rectangle contained by its segments may be
equal to the square on a given line.
3. Given the difference of two lines and the rectangle contained by them; find the lines.
4. The rectangle contained by any two lines is equal to the square on half the sum, minus
the square on half the difference.
5. Given the sum or the difference of two lines and the difference of their squares; find the
lines.
6. If from the vertex C of an isosceles triangle a line CD be drawn to any point in the
base produced, prove that CD2 − CB 2 = AD . DB.
7. Give a common enunciation which will include Propositions v. and vi.

PROP. VII.—Theorem.

If a right line (AB) be divided into any two parts (at C), the sum of the
squares on the whole line (AB) and either segment (CB) is equal to twice the
rectangle (2AB . CB) contained by the whole line and that segment, together
with the square on the other segment.

57
 Dem.—On AB describe the square ABDE. Join
BE. Through C draw CG parallel to AE, intersecting
BE in F . Through F draw HK parallel to AB.
Now the square AD is equal to the three figures AK,
F D, and GH: to each add the square CK, and we have
the sum of the squares AD, CK equal to the sum of the
three figures AK, CD, GH; but CD is equal to AK;
therefore the sum of the squares AD, CK is equal to
twice the figure AK, together with the figure GH. Now AK is the rectangle
AB . BK; but BK is equal to BC; therefore AK is equal to the rectangle
AB . BC, and AD is the square on AB; CK the square on CB; and GH is the
square on HF , and therefore equal to the square on AC. Hence the sum of the
squares on AB and BC is equal to twice the rectangle AB . BC, together with
the square on AC.
Or thus: On AC describe the square ACDE. Produce
the sides CD, DE, EA, and make each produced part
equal to CB. Join BF , F G, GH, HB. Then the figure
BF GH is a square [I. xlvi., Ex. 3], and it is equal to the
square on AC, together with the four equal triangles HAB,
BCF , F DG, GEH. Now [I. xlvii.], the figure BF GH is
equal to the sum of the squares on AB, AH—that is, equal
to the sum of the squares on AB, BC; and the sum of the
four triangles is equal to twice the rectangle AB . BC, for
each triangle is equal to half the rectangle AB . BC. Hence
the sum of the squares on AB, BC is equal to twice the
rectangle AB . BC, together with the square on AC.
Or thus: AC = AB − BC;
therefore AC 2 = AB 2 − 2AB . BC + BC 2 ;
therefore AC 2 + 2AB . BC = AB 2 + BC 2 .
Comparison of iv. and vii.
By iv., square on sum = sum of squares + twice rectangle.
By vii., square on difference = sum of squares-twice rectangle.
Cors. from iv. and vii.
1. Square on the sum, the sum of the squares, and the square on the difference
of any two lines, are in arithmetical progression.
2. Square on the sum + square on the difference of any two lines = twice
the sum of the squares on the lines (Props. ix. and x.).
3. The square on the sum − the square on the difference of any two lines =
four times the rectangle under lines (Prop. viii.).

PROP. VIII.–Theorem.

If a line (AB) be divided into two parts (at C), the square on the sum of the
whole line (AB) and either segment (BC) is equal to four times the rectangle
contained by the whole line (AB) and that segment, together with the square on
the other segment (AC).

58
 Dem.—Produce AB to D. Make BD equal to
BC. On AD describe the square AEF D [I. xlvi.].
Join DE. Through C, B draw CH, BL parallel to
AE [I. xxxi.], and through K, I draw M N , P O
parallel to AD.
Since CO is the square on CD, and CK the
square on CB, and CB is the half of CD, CO is
equal to four times CK [iv., Cor. 1]. Again, since
CG, GI are the sides of equal squares, they are equal [I. xlvi., Cor. 1]. Hence
the parallelogram AG is equal to M I [I. xxxvi.]. In like manner IL is equal
to JF ; but M I is equal to IL [I. xliii.]. Therefore the four figures AG, M I,
IL, JF are all equal; hence their sum is equal to four times AG; and the square
CO has been proved to be equal to four times CK. Hence the gnomon AOH is
equal to four times the rectangle AK—that is, equal to four times the rectangle
AB . BC, since BC is equal to BK.
Again, the figure P H is the square on P I, and therefore equal to the square
on AC. Hence the whole figure AF , that is, the square on AD, is equal to four
times the rectangle AB . BC, together with the square on AC.
Or thus: Produce BA to D, and make AD = BC. On DB
describe the square DBEF . Cut off BG, EI, F L each equal to
BC. Through A and I draw lines parallel to DF , and through
G and L, lines parallel to AB.
Now it is evident that the four rectangles. AG, GI, IL,
LA are all equal; but AG is the rectangle AB . BG or AB . BC.
Therefore the sum of the four rectangles is equal to 4AB . BC.
Again, the figure N P is evidently equal to the square on AC.
Hence the whole figure, which is the square on BD, or the
square on the sum of AB and BC, is equal to 4AB . BC + AC 2 .
Or thus: AB + BC = AC + 2BC;
therefore (AB + BC)2 = AC 2 + 4AC . CB + 4BC 2
= AC 2 + 4(AC + CB) . CB
= AC 2 + 4AB . BC.

Direct sequence from v. or vi.

Since by v. or vi. the rectangle contained by any two lines is = the square
on half their sum − the square on half their difference; therefore four times the
rectangle contained by any two lines = the square on their sum − the square
on their difference.
Direct sequence of viii. from iv. and vii.
By iv., the square on the sum = the sum of the squares + twice the rectangle.
By vii., the square on the difference = the sum of the squares − twice the
rectangle. Therefore, by subtraction, the square on the sum − the square on
the difference = four times the rectangle.

59
 Exercises.
1. In the figure [I. xlvii.] if EF , GK be joined, prove EF 2 − CO2 = (AB + BO)2 .
2. Prove GK 2 − EF 2 = 3AB(AO − BO).
3. Given the difference of two lines = R, and their rectangle = 4R2 ; find the lines.
1

PROP. IX.—Theorem.

If a line (AB) be bisected (at C) and divided into two unequal parts (at D),
the sum of the squares on the unequal parts (AD, DB) is double the sum of the
squares on half the line (AC), and on the segment (CD) between the points of
section.
Dem.—Erect CE at right angles to AB,
and make it equal to AC or CB. Join AE,
EB. Draw DF parallel to CE, and F G
parallel to CD. Join AF .
Because AC is equal to CE, and the an-
gle ACE is right, the angle CEA is half
a right angle. In like manner the angles
CEB, CBE are half right angles; therefore
the whole angle AEF is right. Again, be-
cause GF is parallel to CB, and CE intersects them, the angle EGF is equal to
ECB; but ECB is right (const.); therefore EGF is right; and GEF has been
proved to be half a right angle; therefore the angle GF E is half a right angle [I.
xxxii.]. Therefore [I. vi.] GE is equal to GF . In like manner F D is equal to
DB.
Again, since AC is equal to CE, AC 2 is equal to CE 2 ; but AE 2 is equal to
AC 2 + CE 2 [I. xlvii.]. Therefore AE 2 is equal to 2AC 2 . In like manner EF 2 is
equal to 2GF 2 or 2CD2 . Therefore AE 2 + EF 2 is equal to 2AC 2 + 2CD2 ; but
AE 2 +EF 2 is equal to AF 2 [I. xlvii.]. Therefore AF 2 is equal to 2AC 2 +2CD2 .
Again, since DF is equal to DB, DF 2 is equal to DB 2 : to each add AD2 ,
and we get AD2 + DF 2 equal to AD2 + DB 2 ; but AD2 + DF 2 is equal to
AF 2 ; therefore AF 2 is equal to AD2 + DB 2 ; and we have proved AF 2 equal to
2AC 2 + 2CD2 . Therefore AD2 + DB 2 is equal to 2AC 2 + 2CD2 .

Or thus: AD = AC + CD; DB = AC − CD.

Square and add, and we get AD2 + DB 2 = 2AC 2 + 2CD2 .

1 Ex. 3 occurs in the solution of the problem of the inscription of a regular polygon of

seventeen sides in a circle. See note C.

60
 Exercises.
1. The sum of the squares on the segments of a line of given length is a minimum when
it is bisected.
2. Divide a given line internally, so that the sum of the squares on the parts may be equal
to a given square, and state the limitation to its possibility.
3. If a line AB be bisected in C and divided unequally in D,
AD2 + DB 2 = 2AD . DB + 4CD2 .
4. Twice the square on the line joining any point in the hypotenuse of a right-angled
isosceles triangle to the vertex is equal to the sum of the squares on the segments of the
hypotenuse.
5. If a line be divided into any number of parts, the continued product of all the parts is
a maximum, and the sum of their squares is a minimum when all the parts are equal.

PROP. X.—Theorem.

If a line (AB) be bisected (at C) and divided externally (at D), the sum of
the squares on the segments (AD, DB) made by the external point is equal to
twice the square on half the line, and twice the square on the segment between
the points of section.
Dem.—Erect CE at right an-
gles to AB, and make it equal to
AC or CB. Join AE, EB. Draw
DF parallel to CE, and produce
EB. Now since DF is parallel to
EC, the angle BDF is = to BCE
[I. xxix.], and [I. xv.] the angle
DBF is = to EBC; but the sum of
the angles BCE, EBC is less than
two right angles [I. xvii.]; therefore
the sum of the angles BDF , DBF
is less than two right angles, and therefore [I., Axiom xii.] the lines EB, DF ,
if produced, will meet. Let them meet in F . Through F draw F G parallel to
AB, and produce EC to meet it in G. Join AF .
Because AC is equal to CE, and the angle ACE is right, the angle CEA is
half a right angle. In like manner the angles CEB, CBE are half right angles;
therefore the whole angle AEF is right. Again, because GF is parallel to CB,
and GE intersects them, the angle EGF is equal to ECB [I. xxix.]; but ECB
is right (const.); therefore EGF is right, and GEF has been proved to be half
a right angle; therefore [I. xxxii.] GF E is half a right angle, and therefore [I.
vi.] GE is equal to GF . In like manner F D is equal to DB.
Again, since AC is equal to CE, AC 2 is equal to CE 2 ; but AE 2 is equal to
AC 2 + CE 2 [I. xlvii.]; therefore AE 2 is equal to 2AC 2 . In like manner EF 2 is
equal to 2GF 2 or 2CD2 ; therefore AE 2 + EF 2 is equal to 2AC 2 + 2CD2 ; but
AE 2 +EF 2 is equal to AF 2 [I. xlvii.]. Therefore AF 2 is equal to 2AC 2 +2CD2 .
Again, since DF is equal to DB, DF 2 is equal to DB 2 : to each add AD2 ,
and we get AD2 + DF 2 equal to AD2 + DB 2 ; but AD2 + DF 2 is equal to

61
AF 2 ; therefore AF 2 is equal to AD2 + DB 2 ; and AF 2 has been proved equal
to 2AC 2 + 2CD2 . Therefore AD2 + DB 2 is equal to 2AC 2 + 2CD2 .

Or thus: AD = CD + AC,
BD = CD − AC.

Square and add, and we get AD2 + BD2 = 2CD2 + 2AC 2 .

The following enunciations include Propositions ix. and x.:—
1. The square on the sum of any two lines plus the square on their difference
equal twice the sum of their squares.
2. The sum of the squares on any two lines it equal to twice the square on
half the sum plus twice the square on half the difference of the lines.
3. If a line be cut into two unequal parts, and also into two equal parts, the
sum of the squares on the two unequal parts exceeds the sum of the squares on
the two equal parts by the sum of the squares of the two differences between the
equal and unequal parts.

Exercises

.
1. Given the sum or the difference of any two lines, and the sum of their squares; find the
lines.
2. The sum of the squares on two sides AC, CB of a triangle is equal to twice the square
on half the base AB, and twice the square on the median which bisects AB.
3. If the base of a triangle be given both in magnitude and position, and the sum of the
squares on the sides in magnitude, the locus of the vertex is a circle.
4. If in the △ ABC a point D in the base BC be such that
BA2 + BD2 = CA2 + CD2 ;
prove that the middle point of AD is equally distant from B and C.
5. The sum of the squares on the sides of a parallelogram is equal to the sum of the squares
on its diagonals.

PROP. XI.—Problem.

To divide a given finite line (AB) into two segments

(in H), so that the rectangle (AB . BH) contained by the
whole line and one segment may be equal to the square
on the other segment.
Sol.—On AB describe the square ABDC [I. xlvi.].
Bisect AC in E. Join BE. Produce EA to F , and make
EF equal to EB. On AF describe the square AF GH.
H is the point required.
Dem.—Produce GH to K. Then because CA is
bisected in E, and divided externally in F , the rectangle
CF . AF , together with the square on EA, is equal to
the square on EF [vi.]; but EF is equal to EB (const.);

62
therefore the rectangle CF . AF , together with EA2 , is equal to EB 2 —that is
[I. xlvii.] equal to EA2 + AB 2 . Rejecting EA2 , which is common, we get the
rectangle CF . AF equal to AB 2 . Again, since AF is equal to F G, being the
sides of a square, the rectangle CF . AF is equal to CF . F G—that is, to the
figure CG; and AB 2 is equal to the figure AD; therefore CG is equal to AD.
Reject the part AK, which is common, and we get the figure F H equal to the
figure HD; but HD is equal to the rectangle AB . BH, because BD is equal to
AB, and F H is the square on AH. Therefore the rectangle AB . BH is equal to
the square on AH.
Def.—A line divided as in this Proposition is said to be divided in “extreme
and mean ratio.”
Cor. 1.—The line CF is divided in “extreme and mean ratio” at A.
Cor. 2.—If from the greater segment CA of CF we take a segment equal to
AF , it is evident that CA will be divided into parts respectively equal to AH,
HB. Hence, if a line be divided in extreme and mean ratio, the greater segment
will be cut in the same manner by taking on it a part equal to the less; and the
less will be similarly divided by taking on it a part equal to the difference, and
so on, &c.
Cor. 3.—Let AB be divided in “extreme
and mean ratio” in C, then it is evident (Cor.
2) that AC is greater than CB. Cut off CD =
CB; then (Cor. 2) AC is cut in “extreme and mean ratio” at D, and CD is
greater than AD. Next, cut off DE equal to AD, and in the same manner we
have DE greater than EC, and so on. Now since CD is greater than AD, it
is evident that CD is not a common measure of AC and CB, and therefore
not a common measure of AB and AC. In like manner AD is not a common
measure of AC and CD, and therefore not a common measure of AB and AC.
Hence, no matter how far we proceed we cannot arrive at any remainder which
will be a common measure of AB and AC. Hence, the parts of a line divided in
“extreme and mean ratio” are incommensurable.
Exercises.
1. Cut a line externally in “extreme and mean ratio.”
2. The difference between the squares on the segments of a line divided in “extreme and
mean ratio” is equal to their rectangle.
3. In a right-angled triangle, if the square on one side be equal to the rectangle contained
by the hypotenuse and the other side, the hypotenuse is cut in “extreme and mean ratio” by
the perpendicular on it from the right angle.
4. If AB be cut in “extreme and mean ratio” at C, prove that
(1) AB 2 + BC 2 = 3AC 2 .
(2) (AB + BC)2 = 5AC 2 .
5. The three lines joining the pairs of points G, B; F , D; A, K, in the construction of
Proposition xi., are parallel.
6. If CH intersect BE in O, AO is perpendicular to CH.
7. If CH be produced, it meets BF at right angles.
8. ABC is a right-angled triangle having AB = 2AC: if AH be made equal to the difference
between BC and AC, AB is divided in “extreme and mean ratio” at H.

63
 PROP. XII.—Theorem.

In an obtuse-angled triangle (ABC), the square on the side (AB) subtending

the obtuse angle exceeds the sum of the squares on the sides (BC, CA) contain-
ing the obtuse angle, by twice the rectangle contained by either of them (BC),
and its continuation (CD) to meet a perpendicular (AD) on it from the opposite
angle.
Dem.—Because BD is divided into two
parts in C, we have

BD2 = BC 2 + CD2 + 2BC . CD [iv.]

and AD2 = AD2 .

Hence, adding, since [I. xlvii.] BD2 + AD2 =

AB 2 , and CD2 + AD2 = CA2 , we get

AB 2 = BC 2 + CA2 + 2BC . CD.

Therefore AB 2 is greater than BC 2 + CA2 by 2BC . CD.

The foregoing proof differs from Euclid’s only in
the use of symbols. I have found by experience that
pupils more readily understand it than any other
method.
Or thus: By the First Book: Describe squares
on the three sides. Draw AE, BF , CG perpendic-
ular to the sides of the squares. Then it can be
proved exactly as in the demonstration of [I. xlvii.],
that the rectangle BG is equal to BE, AG to AF ,
and CE to CF . Hence the sum of the two squares
on AC, CB is less than the square on AB by twice
the rectangle CE; that is, by twice the rectangle
BC . CD.
Cor. 1.—If perpendiculars from A and B to the
opposite sides meet them in H and D, the rectangle
AC . CH is equal to the rectangle BC . CD.

Exercises.
1. If the angle ACB of a triangle be equal to twice the angle of an equilateral triangle,
AB 2 = BC 2 + CA2 + BC . CA.
2. ABCD is a quadrilateral whose opposite angles B and D are right, and AD, BC
produced meet in E; prove AE . DE = BE . CE.
3. ABC is a right-angled triangle, and BD is a perpendicular on the hypotenuse AC;
Prove AB . DC = BD . BC.
4. If a line AB be divided in C so that AC 2 = 2CB 2 ; prove that AB 2 + BC 2 = 2AB . AC.
5. If AB be the diameter of a semicircle, find a point C in AB such that, joining C to a fixed
point D in the circumference, and erecting a perpendicular CE meeting the circumference in
E, CE 2 − CD2 may be equal to a given square.
6. If the square of a line CD, drawn from the angle C of an equilateral triangle ABC to
a point D in the side AB produced, be equal to 2AB 2 ; prove that AD is cut in “extreme and
mean ratio” at B.

64
 PROP. XIII.—Theorem.
In any triangle (ABC), the square on any side subtending an acute angle (C)
is less than the sum of the squares on the sides containing that angle, by twice
the rectangle (BC, CD) contained by either of them (BC) and the intercept
(CD) between the acute angle and the foot of the perpendicular on it from the
opposite angle.
Dem.—Because BC is divided into two seg-
ments in D,
BC 2 + CD2 = BD2 + 2BC . CD [vii.];

and AD2 = AD2 .

Hence, adding, since
CD2 + AD2 = AC 2 [I. xlvii.],
and BD2 + AD2 = AB 2 ,
we get BC 2 + AC 2 = AB 2 + 2BC . CD.
Therefore AB 2 is less than BC 2 + AC 2 by 2BC . CD.

Or thus: Describe squares on the sides. Draw AE, BF , CG perpendicular

to the sides; then, as in the demonstration of [I. xlvii.], the rectangle BG is
equal to BE; AG to AF , and CE to CF . Hence the sum of the squares on AC,
CB exceeds the square on AB by twice CE—that is, by 2BC . CD.
Observation.—By comparing the proofs of the pairs of Props. iv. and vii.; v. and vi.;
ix. and x.; xii. and xiii., it will be seen that they are virtually identical. In order to render
this identity more apparent, we have made some slight alterations in the usual proofs. The
pairs of Propositions thus grouped are considered in Modern Geometry not as distinct, but
each pair is regarded as one Proposition.

65
 Exercises.
1. If the angle C of the △ ACB be equal to an angle of an equilateral △, AB 2 =
AC 2 + BC 2 − AC . BC.
2. The sum of the squares on the diagonals of a quadrilateral, together with four times
the square on the line joining their middle points, is equal to the sum of the squares on its
sides.
3. Find a point C in a given line AB produced, so that AC 2 + BC 2 = 2AC . BC.

PROP. XIV.—Problem.
To construct a square equal to a given rectilineal figure (X).

Sol.—Construct [I. xlv.] the rectangle AC equal to X. Then, if the adjacent

sides AB, BC be equal, AC is a square, and the problem is solved; if not,
produce AB to E, and make BE equal to BC; bisect AE in F ; with F as
centre and F E as radius, describe the semicircle AGE; produce CB to meet it
in G. The square described on BG will be equal to X.
Dem.—Join F G. Then because AE is divided equally in F and unequally
in B, the rectangle AB . BE, together with F B 2 is equal to F E 2 [v.], that is,
to F G2 ; but F G2 is equal to F B 2 + BG2 [I. xlvii.]. Therefore the rectangle
AB . BE + F B 2 is equal to F B 2 + BG2 . Reject F B 2 , which is common, and we
have the rectangle AB . BE = BG2 ; but since BE is equal to BC, the rectangle
AB . BE is equal to the figure AC. Therefore BG2 is equal to the figure AC,
and therefore equal to the given rectilineal figure (X).
Cor.—The square on the perpendicular from any point in a semicircle on the
diameter is equal to the rectangle contained by the segments of the diameter.

Exercises.
1. Given the difference of the squares on two lines and their rectangle; find the lines.
2. Divide a given line, so that the rectangle contained by another given line and one
segment may be equal to the square on the other segment.

66
 Questions for Examination on Book II.
1. What is the subject-matter of Book II.? Ans. Theory of rectangles.
2. What is a rectangle? A gnomon?
3. What is a square inch? A square foot? A square perch? A square mile? Ans. The
square described on a line whose length is an inch, a foot, a perch, &c.
4. What is the difference between linear and superficial measurement? Ans. Linear mea-
surement has but one dimension; superficial has two.
5. When is a line said to be divided internally? When externally?
6. How is the area of a rectangle found?
7. How is a line divided so that the rectangle contained by its segments may be a maxi-
mum?
8. How is the area of a parallelogram found?
9. What is the altitude of a parallelogram whose base is 65 metres and area 1430 square
metres?
10. How is a line divided when the sum of the squares on its segments is a minimum?
11. The area of a rectangle is 108.60 square metres and its perimeter is 48.20 linear metres;
find its dimensions.
12. What Proposition in Book II. expresses the distributive law of multiplication?
13. On what proposition is the rule for extracting the square root founded?
14. Compare I. xlvii. and II. xii. and xiii.
15. If the sides of a triangle be expressed by x2 +1, x2 −1, and 2x linear units, respectively;
prove that it is right-angled.
16. How would you construct a square whose area would be exactly an acre? Give a
solution by I. xlvii.
17. What is meant by incommensurable lines? Give an example from Book II.
18. Prove that a side and the diagonal of a square are incommensurable.
19. The diagonals of a lozenge are 16 and 30 metres respectively; find the length of a side.
20. The diagonal of a rectangle is 4.25 perches, and its area is 7.50 square perches; what
are its dimensions?
21. The three sides of a triangle are 8, 11, 15; prove that it has an obtuse angle.
22. The sides of a triangle are 13, 14, 15; find the lengths of its medians; also the lengths
of its perpendiculars, and prove that all its angles are acute.
23. If the sides of a triangle be expressed by m2 + n2 , m2 − n2 , and 2mn linear units,
respectively; prove that it is right-angled.
24. If on each side of a square containing 5.29 square perches we measure from the corners
respectively a distance of 1.5 linear perches; find the area of the square formed by joining the
points thus found.

Exercises on Book II.

1. The squares on the diagonals of a quadrilateral are together double the sum of the
squares on the lines joining the middle points of opposite sides.
2. If the medians of a triangle intersect in O, AB 2 + BC 2 + CA2 = 3(OA2 + OB 2 + OC 2 ).
3. Through a given point O draw three lines OA, OB, OC of given lengths, such that
their extremities may be collinear, and that AB = BC.
4. If in any quadrilateral two opposite sides be bisected, the sum of the squares on the
other two sides, together with the sum of the squares on the diagonals, is equal to the sum of
the squares on the bisected sides, together with four times the square on the line joining the
points of bisection.
5. If squares be described on the sides of any triangle, the sum of the squares on the lines
joining the adjacent corners is equal to three times the sum of the squares on the sides of the
triangle.
6. Divide a given line into two parts, so that the rectangle contained by the whole and
one segment may be equal to any multiple of the square on the other segment.
7. If P be any point in the diameter AB of a semicircle, and CD any parallel chord, then
CP 2 + P D2 = AP 2 + P B 2 .

67
 8. If A, B, C, D be four collinear points taken in order,
AB . CD + BC . AD = AC . BD.
9. Three times the sum of the squares on the sides of any pentagon exceeds the sum of the
squares on its diagonals, by four times the sum of the squares on the lines joining the middle
points of the diagonals.
10. In any triangle, three times the sum of the squares on the sides is equal to four times
the sum of the squares on the medians.
11. If perpendiculars be drawn from the angular points of a square to any line, the sum of
the squares on the perpendiculars from one pair of opposite angles exceeds twice the rectangle
of the perpendiculars from the other pair by the area of the square.
12. If the base AB of a triangle be divided in D, so that mAD = nBD, then
mAC 2 + nBC 2 = mAD2 + nDB 2 + (m + n)CD2 .
13. If the point D be taken in AB produced, so that mAD = nDB, then
mAC 2 − nBC 2 = mAD2 − nDB 2 + (m − n)CD2 .
14. Given the base of a triangle in magnitude and position, and the sum or the difference
of m times the square on one side and n times the square on the other side, in magnitude,
the locus of the vertex is a circle.
15. Any rectangle is equal to half the rectangle contained by the diagonals of squares
described on its adjacent sides.
16. If A, B, C. &c., be any number of fixed points, and P a variable point, find the locus
of P , if AP 2 + BP 2 + CP 2 + &c., be given in magnitude.
17. If the area of a rectangle be given, its perimeter is a minimum when it is a square.
18. If a transversal cut in the points A, C, B three lines issuing from a point D, prove
that
BC . AD2 + AC . BD2 − AB . CD2 = AB . BC . CA.
19. Upon the segments AC, CB of a line AB equilateral triangles are described: prove that
if D, D′ be the centres of circles described about these triangles, 6DD′2 = AB 2 + AC 2 + CB 2 .
20. If a, b, p denote the sides of a right-angled triangle about the right angle, and the
1 1 1
perpendicular from the right angle on the hypotenuse, 2 + 2 = 2 .
a b p
21. If, upon the greater segment AB of a line AC, divided in extreme and mean ratio, an
equilateral triangle ABD be described, and CD joined, CD2 = 2AB 2 .
22. If a variable line, whose extremities rest on the circumferences of two given concentric
circles, subtend a right angle at any fixed point, the locus of its middle point is a circle.

68
 BOOK III.
THEORY OF THE CIRCLE

DEFINITIONS.

i. Equal circles are those whose radii are equal.

This is a theorem, and not a definition. For if two circles have equal radii, they are
evidently congruent figures, and therefore equal. From this way of proving this theorem
Props. xxvi.–xxix. follow as immediate inferences.

ii. A chord of a circle is the line joining two points in its circumference.
If the chord be produced both ways, the whole line is called a secant, and each of the
parts into which a secant divides the circumference is called an arc—the greater the major
conjugate arc, and the lesser the minor conjugate arc.—Newcomb.

iii. A right line is said to touch a circle when

it meets the circle, and, being produced both
ways, does not cut it; the line is called a tangent
to the circle, and the point where it touches it
the point of contact.
In Modern Geometry a curve is considered as made
up of an infinite number of points, which are placed in
order along the curve, and then the secant through two
consecutive points is a tangent. Euclid’s definition for a
tangent is quite inadequate for any curve but the circle,
and those derived from it by projection (the conic sections); and even for these the modern
definition is better.

iv. Circles are said to touch one an-

other when they meet, but do not inter-
sect. There are two species of contact:—
1. When each circle is external to the
other.
2. When one is inside the other.
The following is the modern definition of
curve-contact:— When two curves have two,
three, four, &c., consecutive points common,
they have contact of the first, second, third, &c., orders.
v. A segment of a circle is a figure bounded by a chord and one of the arcs
into which it divides the circumference.
vi. Chords are said to be equally distant from the centre when the perpen-
diculars drawn to them from the centre are equal.
vii. The angle contained by two lines, drawn from any point in the circum-
ference of a segment to the extremities of its chord, is called an angle in the
segment.

69
 viii. The angle of a segment is the angle contained between its chord and
the tangent at either extremity.
A theorem is tacitly assumed in this Definition, namely, that the angles which the chord
makes with the tangent at its extremities are equal. We shall prove this further on.
ix. An angle in a segment is said to stand on its conjugate arc.
x. Similar segments of circles are those that contain
equal angles.
xi. A sector of a circle is formed of two radii and
the arc included between them.
To a pair of radii may belong either of the two conjugate arcs
into which their ends divide the circle.—Newcomb.
xii. Concentric circles are those that have the same centre.
xiii. Points which lie on the circumference of a circle are said to be concyclic.
xiv. A cyclic quadrilateral is one which is inscribed in a circle.
xv. It will be proper to give here an explanation of the extended meaning of
the word angle in Modern Geometry. This extension is necessary in Trigonom-
etry, in Mechanics—in fact, in every application of Geometry, and has been
partly given in I. Def. ix.

Thus, if a line OA revolve about the point O, as in figures 1, 2, 3, 4, until

it comes into the position OB, the amount of the rotation from OA to OB is
called an angle. From the diagrams we see that in fig. 1 it is less than two right
angles; in fig. 2 it is equal to two right angles; in fig. 3 greater than two right
angles, but less than four; and in fig. 4 it is greater than four right angles. The
arrow-heads denote the direction or sense, as it is technically termed, in which
the line OA turns. It is usual to call the direction indicated in the above figures
positive, and the opposite negative. A line such as OA, which turns about a
fixed point, is called a ray, and then we have the following definition:—
xvi. A ray which turns in the sense opposite to the hands of a watch describes
a positive angle, and one which turns in the same direction as the hands, a
negative angle.

PROP. I.—Problem.
To find the centre of a given circle (ADB).

70
 Sol.—Take any two points A, B in the circumfer-
ence. Join AB. Bisect it in C. Erect CD at right
angles to AB. Produce DC to meet the circle again
in E. Bisect DE in F . Then F is the centre.
Dem.—If possible, let any other point G be the
centre. Join GA, GC, GB. Then in the triangles
ACG, BCG we have AC equal to CB (const.), CG
common, and the base GA equal to GB, because they
are drawn from G, which is, by hypothesis, the centre,
to the circumference. Hence [I. viii.] the angle ACG is equal to the adjacent
angle BCG, and therefore [I. Def. xiii.] each is a right angle; but the angle
ACD is right (const.); therefore ACD is equal to ACG—a part equal to the
whole—which is absurd. Hence no point can be the centre which is not in the
line DE. Therefore F , the middle point of DE, must be the centre.
The foregoing proof may be abridged as follows:—
Because ED bisects AB at right angles, every point equally distant from, the
points A, B must lie in ED [I. x. Ex. 2]; but the centre is equally distant from
A and B; hence the centre must be in ED; and since it must be equally distant
from E and D, it must be the middle point of DE.
Cor. 1.—The line which bisects any chord of a circle perpendicularly passes
through the centre of the circle.
Cor. 2.—The locus of the centres of the circles which pass through two fixed
points is the line bisecting at right angles that connecting the two points.
Cor. 3.—If A, B, C be three points in the circumference of a circle, the lines
bisecting perpendicularly the chords AB, BC intersect in the centre.

PROP. II.—Theorem.
If any two points (A, B) be taken in the circumference of a circle—1. The
segment (AB) of the indefinite line through these points which lies between them
falls within the circle. 2. The remaining parts of the line are without the circle.
Dem.—1. Let C be the centre. Take any
point D in AB. Join CA, CD, CB. Now the
angle ADC is [I. xvi.] greater than ABC;
but the angle ABC is equal to CAB [I. v.],
because the triangle CAB is isosceles; there-
fore the angle ADC is greater than CAD.
Hence AC is greater than CD [I. xix.]; there-
fore CD is less than the radius of the circle,
consequently the point D must be within the
circle (note on I. Def. xxiii.).
In the same manner every other point between A and B lies within the circle.
2. Take any point E in AB produced either way. Join CE. Then the angle
ABC is greater than AEC [I. xvi.]; therefore CAB is greater than AEC. Hence
CE is greater than CA, and the point E is without the circle.

71
 We have added the second part of this Proposition. The indirect proof given of the first
part in several editions of Euclid is very inelegant; it is one of those absurd things which give
many students a dislike to Geometry.

Cor. 1.—Three collinear points cannot be concyclic.

Cor. 2.—A line cannot meet a circle in more than two points.
Cor. 3.—The circumference of a circle is everywhere concave towards the
centre.

PROP. III.–Theorem.

If a line (AB) passing through the centre of a circle bisect a chord (CD),
which does not pass through the centre, it cuts it at right angles. 2. If it cuts it
at right angles, it bisects it.
Dem.—1. Let O be the centre of the circle.
Join OC, OD. Then the triangles CEO, DEO
have CE equal to ED (hyp.), EO common, and
OC equal to OD, because they are radii of the
circle; hence [I. viii.] the angle CEO is equal to
DEO, and they are adjacent angles. Therefore [I.
Def. xiii.] each is a right angle. Hence AB cuts
CD at right angles.
2. The same construction being made: because
OC is equal to OD, the angle OCD is equal to
ODC [I. v.], and CEO is equal to DEO (hyp.), because each is right. Therefore
the triangles CEO, DEO have two angles in one respectively equal to two angles
in the other, and the side EO common. Hence [I. xxvi.] the side CE is equal
to ED. Therefore CD is bisected in E.
2. May be proved as follows:—

OC 2 = OE 2 +EC 2 [I. xlvii.], and OD2 = OE 2 + ED2 ;

but OC 2 =OD2 ; ∴ OE 2 + EC 2 = OE 2 + ED2 .
Hence EC 2 = ED2 , and EC = ED.
Observation.—The three theorems, namely, Cor. 1., Prop. i., and Parts 1, 2, of Prop. iii.,
are so related, that any one being proved directly, the other two follow by the Rule of Identity.

Cor. 1.—The line which bisects perpendicularly one of two parallel chords
of a circle bisects the other perpendicularly.
Cor. 2.—The locus of the middle points of a system of parallel chords of a
circle is the diameter of the circle perpendicular to them all.
Cor. 3.—If a line intersect two concentric circles, its intercepts between the
circles are equal.
Cor. 4.—The line joining the centres of two intersecting circles bisects their
common chord perpendicularly.

72
 Exercises.
1. If a chord of a circle subtend a right angle at a given point, the locus of its middle point
is a circle.
2. Every circle passing through a given point, and having its centre on a given line, passes
through another given point.
3. Draw a chord in a given circle which shall subtend a right angle at a given point, and
be parallel to a given line.

PROP. IV.—Theorem.
Two chords of a circle (AB, CD) which are not both diameters cannot bisect
each other, though either may bisect the other.

Dem.—Let O be the centre. Let AB, CD in-

tersect in E; then since AB, CD are not both di-
ameters, join OE. If possible let AE be equal to
EB, and CE equal to ED. Now, since OE pass-
ing through the centre bisects AB, which does not
pass through the centre, it is at right angles to it;
therefore the angle AEO is right. In like manner
the angle CEO is right. Hence AEO is equal to
CEO—that is, a part equal to the whole—which
is absurd. Therefore AB and CD do not bisect each other.
Cor.—If two chords of a circle bisect each other, they are both diameters.

PROP. V.—Theorem.
If two circles (ABC, ABD) cut one another in any point (A), they are not
concentric.

Dem.—If possible let them have a common

centre at O. Join OA, and draw any other line
OD, cutting the circles in C and D respectively.
Then because O is the centre of the circle ABC,
OA is equal to OC. Again, because O is the centre
of the circle ABD, OA is equal to OD. Hence OC
is equal to OD—a part equal to the whole—which
is absurd. Therefore the circles are not concentric.

Exercises.
1. If two non-concentric circles intersect in one point, they must intersect in another point.
For, let O, O′ be the centres, A the point of intersection; from A let fall the ⊥ AC on the line
OO′ . Produce AC to B, making BC = CA: then B is another point of intersection.
2. Two circles cannot have three points in common without wholly coinciding.

73
 PROP. VI.—Theorem.

If one circle (ABC) touch another circle (ADE)

internally in any point (A), it is not concentric with
it.
Dem.—If possible let the circles be concentric,
and let O be the centre of each. Join OA, and draw
any other line OD, cutting the circles in the points
B, D respectively. Then because O is the centre of
each circle (hyp.), OB and OD are each equal to
OA; therefore OB is equal to OD, which is impos-
sible. Hence the circles cannot have the same centre.

PROP. VII.—Theorem.

If from any point (P ) within a circle, which is not the centre, lines (P A, P B,
P C, &c.), one of which passes through the centre, be drawn to the circumference,
then—1. The greatest is the line (P A) which passes through the centre. 2. The
production (P E) of this in the opposite direction is the least. 3. Of the others,
that which is nearest to the line through the centre is greater than every one more
remote. 4. Any two lines making equal angles with the diameter on opposite
sides are equal. 5. More than two equal right lines cannot be drawn from the
given point (P ) to the circumference.
Dem.—1. Let O be the centre. Join OB. Now since O is the centre, OA is
equal to OB: to each add OP , and we have AP equal to the sum of OB, OP ;
but the sum of OB, OP is greater than P B [I. xx.]. Therefore P A is greater
than P B.
2. Join OD. Then [I. xx.] the sum of OP ,
P D is greater than OD; but OD is equal to OE
[I. Def. xxx.]. Therefore the sum of OP , P D is
greater than OE. Reject OP , which is common,
and we have P D greater than P E.
3. Join OC; then two triangles P OB, P OC
have the side OB equal to OC [I. Def. xxx.],
and OP common; but the angle P OB is greater
than P OC; therefore [I. xxiv.] the base P B is
greater than P C. In like manner P C is greater
than P D.
4. Make at the centre O the angle P OF equal
to P OD. Join P F . Then the triangles P OD, P OF have the two sides OP ,
OD in one respectively equal to the sides OP , OF in the other, and the angle
P OD equal to the angle P OF ; hence P D is equal to P F [I. iv.], and the angle
OP D equal to the angle OP F . Therefore P D and P F make equal angles with
the diameter.

74
 5. A third line cannot be drawn from P equal to either of the equal lines
P D, P F . If possible let P G be equal to P D, then P G is equal to P F —that is,
the line which is nearest to the one through the centre is equal to the one which
is more remote, which is impossible. Hence three equal lines cannot be drawn
from P to the circumference.
Cor. 1.—If two equal lines P D, P F be drawn from a point P to the circum-
ference of a circle, the diameter through P bisects the angle DP F formed by
these lines.
Cor. 2.—If P be the common centre of circles whose radii are P A, P B, P C,
&c., then—1. The circle whose radius is the maximum line (P A) lies outside
the circle ADE, and touches it in A [Def. iv.]. 2. The circle whose radius is
the minimum line (P E) lies inside the circle ADE, and touches it in E. 3. A
circle having any of the remaining lines (P D) as radius cuts ADE in two points
(D, F ).
Observation.—Proposition vii. affords a good illustration of the following important defini-
tion (see Sequel to Euclid, p. 13):—If a geometrical magnitude varies its position continuously
according to any law, and if it retains the same value throughout, it is said to be a constant,
such as the radius of a circle revolving round the centre; but if it goes on increasing for some
time, and then begins to decrease, it is said to be a maximum at the end of the increase.
Thus, in the foregoing figure, P A, supposed to revolve round P and meet the circle, is a
maximum. Again, if it decreases for some time, and then begins to increase, it is a minimum
at the commencement of the increase. Thus P E, supposed as before to revolve round P and
meet the circle, is a minimum. Proposition viii. will give other illustrations.

PROP. VIII.—Theorem.
If from any point (P ) outside a cir-
cle, lines (P A, P B, P C, &c.) be drawn
to the concave circumference, then—
1. The maximum is that which passes
through the centre. 2. Of the others,
that which is nearer to the one through
the centre is greater than the one more
remote. Again, if lines be drawn to
the convex circumference—3. The min-
imum is that whose production passes
through the centre. 4. Of the oth-
ers, that which is nearer to the min-
imum is less than one more remote.
5. From the given point (P ) there can be
drawn two equal lines to the concave or
the convex circumference, both of which
make equal angles with the line passing
through the centre. 6. More than two
equal lines cannot be drawn from the given point (P ) to either circumference.
Dem.—1. Let O be the centre. Join OB. Now since O is the centre, OA is
equal to OB: to each add OP , and we have AP equal to the sum of OB, OP ;

75
but the sum of OB, OP is greater than BP [I. xx.]. Therefore AP is greater
than BP .
2. Join OC, OD. The two triangles BOP , COP have the side OB equal
to OC, and OP common, and the angle BOP greater than COP ; therefore the
base BP is greater than CP [I. xxiv.]. In like manner CP is greater than DP ,
&c.
3. Join OF . Now in the triangle OF P the sum of the sides OF , F P is
greater than OP [I. xx.]; but OF is equal to OE [I. Def. xxx.]. Reject them,
and F P will remain greater than EP .
4. Join OG, OH. The two triangles GOP , F OP have two sides GO, OP in
one respectively equal to two sides F O, OP in the other; but the angle GOP
is greater than F OP ; therefore [I. xxiv.] the base GP is greater than F P . In
like manner HP is greater than GP .
5. Make the angle P OI equal P OF [I. xxiii.]. Join IP . Now the triangles
IOP , F OP have two sides IO, OP in one respectively equal to two sides F O,
OP in the other, and the angle IOP equal to F OP (const.); therefore [I. iv.]
IP is equal to F P .
6. A third line cannot be drawn from P equal to either of the lines IP , F P .
For if possible let P K be equal to P F ; then P K is equal to P I—that is, one
which is nearer to the minimum equal to one more remote—which is impossible.
Cor. 1.—If P I be produced to meet the circle again in L, P L is equal to
P B.
Cor. 2.—If two equal lines be drawn from P to either the convex or concave
circumference, the diameter through P bisects the angle between them, and the
parts of them intercepted by the circle are equal.
Cor. 3.—If P be the common centre of circles whose radii are lines drawn
from P to the circumference of HDE, then—1. The circle whose radius is the
minimum line (P E) has contact of the first kind with ADE [Def. iv.]. 2. The
circle whose radius is the maximum line (P A) has contact of the second kind.
3. A circle having any of the remaining lines (P F ) as radius intersects HDE in
two points (F, I).

PROP. IX.—Theorem.

A point (P ) within a circle (ABC), from which

more than two equal lines (P A, P B, P C, &c.) can
be drawn to the circumference, is the centre.
Dem.—If P be not the centre, let O be the cen-
tre. Join OP , and produce it to meet the circle in D
and E; then DE is the diameter, and P is a point in
it which is not the centre: therefore [vii.] only two
equal lines can be drawn from P to the circumfer-
ence; but three equal lines are drawn (hyp.), which
is absurd. Hence P must be the centre.

76
 Or thus: Since the lines AP , BP are equal, the line bisecting the angle AP B [vii. Cor. 1]
must pass through the centre: in like manner the line bisecting the angle BP C must pass
through the centre. Hence the point of intersection of these bisectors, that is, the point P ,
must be the centre.

PROP. X.—Theorem.
If two circles have more than two points common, they must coincide.

Dem.—Let X be one of the circles; and if

possible let another circle Y have three points, A,
B, C, in common with X, without coinciding with
it. Find P , the centre of X. Join P A, P B, P C.
Then since P is the centre of X, the three lines
P A, P B, P C are equal to one another.
Again, since Y is a circle and P a point, from
which three equal lines P A, P B, P C can be
drawn to its circumference, P must be the cen-
tre of Y . Hence X and Y are concentric, which
[v.] is impossible.
Cor.—Two circles not coinciding cannot have more than two points common.
Compare I., Axiom x., that two right lines not coinciding cannot have more than
one point common.

PROP. XI.—Theorem.
If one circle (CP D) touch another circle (AP B) internally at any point P , the
line joining the centres must pass through that point.

Dem.—Let O be the centre of AP B. Join OP .

I say the centre of the smaller circle is in the line
OP . If not, let it be in any other position such as
E. Join OE, EP , and produce OE through E to
meet the circles in the points C, A. Now since E is a
point in the diameter of the larger circle between the
centre and A, EA is less than EP [vii. 2]; but EP is
equal to EC (hyp.), being radii of the smaller circle.
Hence EA is less than EC; which is impossible;
consequently the centre of the smaller circle must
be in the line OP . Let it be H; then we see that the line joining the centres
passes through the point P .
Or thus: Since EP is a line drawn from a point within the circle AP B to
the circumference, but not forming part of the diameter through E, the circle
whose centre is E and radius EP cuts [vii., Cor. 2] AP B in P , but it touches
it (hyp.) also in P , which is impossible. Hence the centre of the smaller circle
CP D must be in the line OP .

77
 PROP. XII.—Theorem.
If two circles (P CF, P DE) have external contact at any point P , the line
joining their centres must pass through that point.

Dem.—Let A be the centre of one of

the circles. Join AP , and produce it to
meet the second circle again in E. I say
the centre of the second circle is in the line
P E. If not, let it be elsewhere, as at B.
Join AB, intersecting the circles in C and
D, and join BP . Now since A is the centre
of the circle P CF , AP is equal to AC; and since B is the centre of the circle
P DE, BP is equal to BD. Hence the sum of the lines AP , BP is equal to
the sum of the lines AC, DB; but AB is greater than the sum of AC and DB;
therefore AB is greater than the sum of AP , P B—that is, one side of a triangle
greater than the sum of the other two–which [I. xx.] is impossible. Hence the
centre of the second circle must be in the line P E. Let it be G, and we see that
the line through the centres passes through the point P .
Or thus: Since BP is a line drawn from a point without the circle P CF
to its circumference, and when produced does not pass through the centre, the
circle whose centre is B and radius BP must cut the circle P CF in P [viii.,
Cor. 3]; but it touches it (hyp.) also in P , which is impossible. Hence the centre
of the second circle must be in the line P E.
Observation.—Propositions xi, xii., may both be included in one enunciation as follows:—
“If two circles touch each other at any point, the centres and that point are collinear.” And this
latter Proposition is a limiting case of the theorem given in Proposition iii., Cor. 4, that “The
line joining the centres of two intersecting circles bisects the common chord perpendicularly.”

Suppose the circle whose centre is O and one of the points of intersection A to remain
fixed, while the second circle turns round that point in such a manner that the second point
of intersection B becomes ultimately consecutive to A; then, since the line OO′ always bisects
AB, we see that when B ultimately becomes consecutive to A, the line OO′ passes through
A. In consequence of the motion, the common chord will become in the limit a tangent to
each circle, as in the second diagram.—Comberousse, Géométrie Plane, page 57.
Cor. 1.—If two circles touch each other, their point of contact is the union of two points
of intersection. Hence a contact counts for two intersections.

78
 Cor. 2.—If two circles touch each other at any point, they
cannot have any other common point. For, since two circles
cannot have more than two points common [x.], and that the
point of contact is equivalent to two common points, circles that
touch cannot have any other point common. The following is a
formal proof of this Proposition:—Let O, O′ be the centres of
the two circles, A the point of contact, and let O′ lie between O
and A; take any other point B in the circumference of O. Join
O′ B; then [vii.] O′ B is greater than O′ A; therefore the point C
is outside the circumference of the smaller circle. Hence B cannot be common to both circles.
In like manner, they cannot have any other common point but A.

PROP. XIII.—Theorem.
Two circles cannot have double contact, that it, cannot touch each other in two
points.

Dem.—1. If possible let two circles touch each

other at two points A and B. Now since the two
circles touch each other in A, the line joining their
centres passes through A [xi.]. In like manner,
it passes through B. Hence the centres and the
points A, B are in one right line; therefore AB is a
diameter of each circle. Hence, if AB be bisected
in E, E must be the centre of each circle—that is,
the circles are concentric—which [v.] is impossi-
ble.
2. If two circles touched each other externally in two distinct points, then
[xii.] the line joining the centres should pass through each point, which is
impossible.
Or thus: Draw a line bisecting AB at right angles. Then this line [i., Cor. 1]
must pass through the centre of each circle, and therefore [xi. xii.] must pass
through each point of contact, which is impossible. Hence two circles cannot
have double contact.
This Proposition is an immediate inference from the theorem [xii., Cor. 1], that a point
of contact counts for two intersections, for then two contacts would be equivalent to four
intersections; but there cannot be more than two intersections [x.]. It also follows from
Prop. xii., Cor. 2, that if two circles touch each other in a point A, they cannot have any
other point common; hence they cannot touch again in B.

Exercises.
1. If a variable circle touch two fixed circles externally, the difference of the distances of
its centre from the centres of the fixed circles is equal to the difference or the sum of their
radii, according as the contacts are of the same or of opposite species (Def. iv.).
2. If a variable circle be touched by one of two fixed circles internally, and touch the
other fixed circle either externally or internally, the sum of the distances of its centre from
the centres of the fixed circles is equal to the sum or the difference of their radii, according as
the contact with the second circle is of the first or second kind.
3. If through the point of contact of two touching circles any secant be drawn cutting the
circles again in two points, the radii drawn to these points are parallel.

79
 4. If two diameters of two touching circles be parallel, the lines from the point of contact
to the extremities of one diameter pass through the extremities of the other.

PROP. XIV.—Theorem.
In equal circles—1. equal chords (AB, CD) are equally distant from the
centre. 2. chords which are equally distant from the centre are equal.

Dem.—1. Let O be the centre. Draw the per-

pendiculars OE, OF . Join AO, CO. Then because
AB is a chord in a circle, and OE is drawn from
the centre cutting it at right angles, it bisects it
[iii.]; therefore AE is the half of AB. In like man-
ner, CF is the half of CD; but AB is equal to
CD (hyp.). Therefore AE is equal to CF [I., Ax-
iom vii.]. And because E is a right angle, AO2 is
equal to AE 2 + EO2 . In like manner, CO2 is equal
to CF 2 + F O2 ; but AO2 is equal to CO2 . Therefore
AE 2 + EO2 is equal to CF 2 + F O2 ; and AE 2 has been proved equal to CF 2 .
Hence EO2 is equal to F O2 ; therefore EO is equal to F O. Hence AB, CD are
(Def. vi.) equally distant from the centre.
2. Let EO be equal to F O, it is required to prove AB equal to CD. The same
construction being made, we have, as before, AE 2 + EO2 equal to CF 2 + F O2 ;
but EO2 is equal to F O2 (hyp.). Hence AE 2 is equal to CF 2 , and AE is equal
to CF ; but AB is double of AE, and CD double of CF . Therefore AB is equal
to CD.

Exercise.
If a chord of given length slide round a fixed circle—1. the locus of its middle point is a
circle; 2. the locus of any point fixed in the chord is a circle.

PROP. XV.—Theorem.

The diameter (AB) is the greatest chord in a circle; and of the others, the
chord (CD) which is nearer to the centre is greater than (EF ) one more remote,
and the greater is nearer to the centre than the less.
Dem.—1. Join OC, OD, OE, and draw the
perpendiculars OG, OH; then because O is the
centre, OA is equal to OC [I., Def. xxxii.], and
OB is equal to OD. Hence AB is equal to the
sum of OC and OD; but the sum of OC, OD is
greater than CD [I. xx.]. Therefore AB is greater
than CD.
2. Because the chord CD is nearer to the cen-
tre than EF , OG is less than OH; and since the

80
triangles OGC, OHE are right-angled, we have OC 2 = OG2 + GC 2 , and
OE 2 = OH 2 + HE 2 ; therefore OG2 + GC 2 = OH 2 + HE 2 ; but OG2 is less
than OH 2 ; therefore GC 2 is greater than HE 2 , and GC is greater than HE,
but CD and EF are the doubles of GC and HE. Hence CD is greater than
EF .
3. Let CD be greater than EF , it is required to prove that OG is less than
OH.
As before, we have OG2 + GC 2 equal to OH 2 + HE 2 ; but CG2 is greater
than EH 2 ; therefore OG2 is less than OH 2 . Hence OG is less than OH.

Exercises.
1. The shortest chord which can be drawn through a given point within a circle is the
perpendicular to the diameter which passes through that point.
2. Through a given point, within or without a given circle, draw a chord of length equal
to that of a given chord.
3. Through one of the points of intersection of two circles draw a secant—1. the sum of
whose segments intercepted by the circles shall be a maximum; 2. which shall be of any length
less than that of the maximum.
4. Three circles touch each other externally at A, B, C; the chords AB, AC of two of them
are produced to meet the third again in the points D and E; prove that DE is a diameter of
the third circle, and parallel to the line joining the centres of the others.

PROP. XVI.—Theorem.

1. The perpendicular (BI) to the diameter (AB) of a circle at its extremity

(B) touches the circle at that point. 2. Any other line (BH) through the same
point cuts the circle.
Dem.—1. Take any point I, and join it to
the centre C. Then because the angle CBI is a
right angle, CI 2 is equal to CB 2 +BI 2 [I. xlvii.];
therefore CI 2 is greater than CB 2 . Hence CI
is greater than CB, and the point I [note on I.,
Def. xxxii.] is without the circle. In like manner,
every other point in BI, except B, is without the
circle. Hence, since BI meets the circle at B, but
does not cut it, it must touch it.
2. To prove that BH, which is not perpen-
dicular to AB, cuts the circle. Draw CG perpendicular to HB. Now BC 2 is
equal to CG2 + GB 2 . Therefore BC 2 is greater than CG2 , and BC is greater
than CG. Hence [note on I., Def. xxxii.] the point G must be within the circle,
and consequently the line BG produced must meet the circle again, and must
therefore cut it.
This Proposition may be proved as follows:
At every point on a circle the tangent is perpendicular to the radius.

81
 Let P and Q be two consecutive points on the cir-
cumference. Join CP , CQ, P Q; produce P Q both
ways. Now since P and Q are consecutive points, P Q
is a tangent (Def. iii.). Again, the sum of the three
angles of the triangle CP Q is equal to two right angles;
but the angle C is infinitely small, and the others are
equal. Hence each of them is a right angle. Therefore
the tangent is perpendicular to the diameter.
Or thus: A tangent is a limiting position of a secant, namely, when the
secant moves out until the two points of intersection with the circle become
consecutive; but the line through the centre which bisects the part of the secant
within the circle [iii.] is perpendicular to it. Hence, in the limit the tangent is
perpendicular to the line from the centre to the point of contact.
Or again: The angle CP R is always equal to CQS; hence, when P and
Q come together each is a right angle, and the tangent is perpendicular to the
radius.

Exercises.
1. If two circles be concentric, all chords of the greater which touch the lesser are equal.
2. Draw a parallel to a given line to touch a given circle.
3. Draw a perpendicular to a given line to touch a given circle.
4. Describe a circle having its centre at a given point—1. and touching a given line; 2. and
touching a given circle. How many solutions of this case?
5. Describe a circle of given radius that shall touch two given lines. How many solutions?
6. Find the locus of the centres of a system of circles touching two given lines.
7. Describe a circle of given radius that shall touch a given circle and a given line, or that
shall touch two given circles.

PROP. XVII.—Problem.
From a given point (P ) without a given circle (BCD) to draw a tangent to the
circle.

82
 Sol.—Let O (fig. 1) be the centre of the given circle. Join OP , cutting the
circumference in C. With O as centre, and OP as radius, describe the circle
AP E. Erect CA at right angles to OP . Join OA, intersecting the circle BCD
in B. Join BP ; it will be the tangent required.
Dem.—Since O is the centre of the two circles, we have OA equal to OP ,
and OC equal to OB. Hence the two triangles AOC, P OB have the sides
OA, OC in one respectively equal to the sides OP , OB in the other, and the
contained angle common to both. Hence [I. iv.] the angle OCA is equal to
OBP ; but OCA is a right angle (const.); therefore OBP is a right angle, and
[xvi.] P B touches the circle at B.
Cor.—If AC (fig. 2) be produced to E, OE joined, cutting the circle BCD
in D, and the line DP drawn, DP will be another tangent from P .

Exercises.
1. The two tangents P B, P D (fig. 2) are equal to one another, because the square of each
is equal to the square of OP minus the square of the radius.
2. If two circles be concentric, all tangents to the inner from points on the outer are equal.
3. If a quadrilateral be circumscribed to a circle, the sum of one pair of opposite sides is
equal to the sum of the other pair.
4. If a parallelogram be circumscribed to a circle it must be a lozenge, and its diagonals
intersect in the centre.
5. If BD be joined, intersecting OP in F , OP is perpendicular to BD.
6. The locus of the intersection of two equal tangents to two circles is a right line (called
the radical axis of the two circles).
7. Find a point such that tangents from it to three given circles shall be equal. (This point
is called the radical centre of the three circles.)
8. The rectangle OF . OP is equal to the square of the radius.
Def. Two points, such as F and P , the rectangle of whose distances OF , OP from the
centre is equal to the square of the radius, are called inverse points with respect to the circle.
9. The intercept made on a variable tangent by two fixed tangents subtends a constant
angle at the centre.
10. Draw a common tangent to two circles. Hence, show how to draw a line cutting two
circles, so that the intercepted chords shall be of given lengths.

PROP. XVIII.—Theorem
If a line (CD) touch a circle, the line (OC) from the centre to the point of
contact is perpendicular to it.

Dem.—If not, suppose another line OG

drawn from the centre to be perpendicular to
CD. Let OG cut the circle in F . Then because
the angle OGC is right (hyp.) the angle OCG
[I. xvii.] must be acute. Therefore [I. xix.]
OC is greater than OG; but OC is equal to OF
[I. Def. xxxii.]; therefore OF is greater than
OG—that is, a part greater than the whole,
which is impossible. Hence OC must be per-
pendicular to CD.

83
 Or thus: Since the perpendicular must be the shortest line from O to CD, and OC is
evidently the shortest line; therefore OC must be perpendicular to CD.

PROP. XIX.—Theorem.
If a line (AB) be a tangent to a circle, the line (AC) drawn at right angles to
it from the point of contact passes through the centre.

If the centre be not in AC, let O be the

centre. Join AO. Then because AB touches the
circle, and OA is drawn from the centre to the
point of contact, OA is at right angles to AB
[xviii.]; therefore the angle OAB is right, and
the angle CAB is right (hyp.); therefore OAB
is equal to CAB—a part equal to the whole,
which is impossible. Hence the centre must be
in the line AC.
Cor.—If a number of circles touch the same
line at the same point, the locus of their centres
is the perpendicular to the line at the point.
Observation.—Propositions xvi., xviii., xix., are so related that any two can be inferred
from the third by the “Rule of Identity.” Hence it would, in strict logic, be sufficient to prove
any one of the three, and the others would follow. Again, these three theorems are limiting
cases of Proposition i., Cor. 1., and Parts 1, 2, of Proposition iii., namely, when the points in
which the chord cuts the circle become consecutive.

PROP. XX.—Theorem.
The angle (AOB) at the centre (O) of a circle is double the angle (ACB) at
the circumference standing on the same arc.

Dem.—Join CO, and produce it to E. Then because OA is equal to OC,

the angle ACO is equal to OAC; but the angle AOE is equal to the sum of the
two angles OAC, ACO. Hence the angle AOE is double the angle ACO. In like

84
manner the angle EOB is double the angle OCB. Hence (by adding in figs. (α),
(β), and subtracting in (γ)), the angle AOB is double of the angle ACB.
Cor.—If AOB be a straight line, ACB will be a right angle—that is, the
angle in a semicircle is a right angle (compare xxxi.).

PROP. XXI.—Theorem.
The angles (ACB, ADB) in the same segment of a circle are equal.

Dem.—Let O be the centre. Join OA, OB. Then the angle AOB is double
of the angle ACB [xx.], and also double of the angle ADB. Therefore the angle
ACB is equal to the angle ADB.
The following is the proof of the second part—that is, when the arc AB
is not greater than a semicircle, without using angles greater than two right
angles:—
Let O be the centre. Join CO, and produce
it to meet the circle again in E. Join DE. Now
since O is the centre, the segment ACE is greater
than a semicircle; hence, by the first case, fig. (α),
the angle ACE is equal to ADE. In like manner
the angle ECB is equal to EDB. Hence the whole
angle ACB is equal to the whole angle ADB.
Cor. 1.—If two triangles ACB, ADB on the
same base AB, and on the same side of it, have
equal vertical angles, the four points A, C, D, B are concyclic.
Cor. 2.—If A, B be two fixed points, and if C varies its position in such a
way that the angle ACB retains the same value throughout, the locus of C is a
circle.
In other words—Given the base of a triangle and the vertical angle, the locus
of the vertex is a circle.

85
 Exercises.
1. Given the base of a triangle and the vertical angle, find the locus—
(1) of the intersection of its perpendiculars;
(2) of the intersection of the internal bisectors of its base angles;
(3) of the intersection of the external bisectors of the base angles;
(4) of the intersection of the external bisector of one base angle and the internal bisector
of the other.
2. If the sum of the squares of two lines be given, their sum is a maximum when the lines
are equal.
3. Of all triangles having the same base and vertical angle, the sum of the sides of an
isosceles triangle is a maximum.
4. Of all triangles inscribed in a circle, the equilateral triangle has the maximum perimeter.
5. Of all concyclic figures having a given number of sides, the area is a maximum when
the sides are equal.

PROP. XXII.—Theorem.
The sum of the opposite angles of a quadrilateral (ABCD) inscribed in a circle
is two right angles.

Dem.—Join AC, BD. The angle ABD is equal to ACD, being in the same
segment ABCD [xxi.]; and the angle DBC is equal to DAC, because they are
in the same segment DABC. Hence the whole angle ABC is equal to the sum
of the two angles ACD, DAC. To each add the angle CDA, and we have the
sum of the two angles ABC, CDA equal to the sum of the three angles ACD,
DAC, CDA of the triangle ACD; but the sum of the three angles of a triangle
is equal to two right angles [I. xxxii.]. Therefore the sum of ABC, CDA is two
right angles.
Or thus: Let O be the centre of the circle. Join OA, OC (see fig. 2). Now
the angle AOC is double of CDA [xx.], and the angle COA is double of ABC.
Hence the sum of the angles [I. Def. ix., note] AOC, COA is double of the sum
of the angles CDA, ABC; but the sum of two angles AOC, COA is four right
angles. Therefore the sum of the angles CDA, ABC is two right angles.
Or again: Let O be the centre (fig. 2). Join OA, OB OC, OD. Then the
four triangles AOB, BOC, COD, DOA are each isosceles. Hence the angle
OAB is equal to the angle OBA, and the angle OAD equal to the angle ODA;
therefore the angle BAD is equal to the sum of the angles OBA, ODA. In like

86
manner the angle BCD is equal to the sum of the angles OBC, ODC. Hence
the sum of the two angles BAD, BCD is equal to the sum of the two angles
ABC, ADC, and hence each sum is two right angles.
Cor.—If a parallelogram be inscribed in a circle it is a rectangle.

Exercises.
1. If the opposite angles of a quadrilateral be supplemental, it is cyclic.
2. If a figure of six sides be inscribed in a circle, the sum of any three alternate angles is
four right angles.
3. A line which makes equal angles with one pair of opposite sides of a cyclic quadrilateral,
makes equal angles with the remaining pair and with the diagonals.
4. If two opposite sides of a cyclic quadrilateral be produced to meet, and a perpendicular
be let fall on the bisector of the angle between them from the point of intersection of the
diagonals, this perpendicular will bisect the angle between the diagonals.
5. If two pairs of opposite sides of a cyclic hexagon be respectively parallel to each other,
the remaining pair of sides are also parallel.
6. If two circles intersect in the points A, B, and any two lines ACD, BF E, be drawn
through A and B, cutting one of the circles in the points C, E, and the other in the points
D, F , the line CE is parallel to DF .
7. If equilateral triangles be described on the sides of any triangle, the lines joining the
vertices of the original triangle to the opposite vertices of the equilateral triangles are concur-
rent.
8. In the same case prove that the centres of the circles described about the equilateral
triangles form another equilateral triangle.
9. If a quadrilateral be described about a circle, the angles at the centre subtended by the
opposite sides are supplemental.
10. The perpendiculars of a triangle are concurrent.
11. If a variable tangent meets two parallel tangents it subtends a right angle at the centre.
12. The feet of the perpendiculars let fall on the sides of a triangle from any point in the
circumference of the circumscribed circle are collinear (Simson).
Def.—The line of collinearity is called Simson’s line.
13. If a hexagon be circumscribed about a circle, the sum of the angles subtended at the
centre by any three alternate sides is equal to two right angles.

PROP. XXIII—Theorem.
Two similar segments of circles which do not coincide cannot be constructed
on the same chord (AB), and on the same side of that chord.

Dem.—If possible, let ACB, ADB, be

two similar segments constructed on the
same side of AB. Take any point D in the
inner one. Join AD, and produce it to meet
the outer one in C. Join BC, BD. Then
since the segments are similar, the angle ADB is equal to ACB (Def. x.),
which is impossible [I. xvi.]. Hence two similar segments not coinciding cannot
be described on the same chord and on the same side of it.

87
 PROP. XXIV.—Theorem.
Similar segments of circles (AEB, CF D) on equal chords (AB, CD) are
equal to one another.

Dem.—Since the lines are equal, if AB be applied to CD, so that the point
A will coincide with C, and the line AB with CD, the point B shall coincide
with D; and because the segments are similar, they must coincide [xxiii.]. Hence
they are equal.
This demonstration may be stated as follows:—Since the chords are equal, they are con-
gruent; and therefore the segments, being similar, must be congruent.

PROP. XXV.—Problem.
An arc (ABC) of a circle being given, it is required to describe the whole circle.

Sol.—Take any three points A, B, C in the arc. Join AB, BC. Bisect AB
in D, and BC in E. Erect DF , EF at right angles to AB, BC; then F , the
point of intersection, will be the centre of the circle.
Dem.—Because DF bisects the chord AB and
is perpendicular to it, it passes through the centre
[i., Cor. 1]. In like manner EF passes through the
centre. Hence the point F must be the centre; and
the circle described from F as centre, with F A as
radius, will be the circle required.

PROP. XXVI.—Theorem.
The four Propositions xxvi.–xxix. are so like in their enunciations that students fre-
quently substitute one for another. The following scheme will assist in remembering them:—
In Proposition xxvi. are given angles =, to prove arcs =,
,, xxvii. ,, arcs =, ,, angles =,
,, xxviii. ,, chords =, ,, arcs =,
,, xxix. ,, arcs =, ,, chords =;
so that Proposition xxvii. is the converse of xxvi., and xxix. of xxviii.

In equal circles (ACB, DF E), equal angles at the centres (AOB, DHE) or at
the circumferences (ACB, DF E) stand upon equal arcs.

88
 Dem.—1. Suppose the angles
at the centres to be given equal.
Now because the circles are equal
their radii are equal (Def. i.).
Therefore the two triangles AOB,
DHE have the sides AO, OB in
one respectively equal to the sides
DH, HE in the other, and the
angle AOB equal to DHE (hyp.).
Therefore [I. iv.] the base AB is equal to DE.
Again, since the angles ACB, DF E are [xx.] the halves of the equal angles
AOB, DHE, they are equal [I. Axiom vii.]. Therefore (Def. x.) the segments
ACB, DF E are similar, and their chords AB, DE have been proved equal;
therefore [xxiv.] the segments are equal. And taking these equals from the
whole circles, which are equal (hyp.), the remaining segments AGB, DKE are
equal. Hence the arcs AGB, DKE are equal.
2. The demonstration of this case is included in the foregoing.
Cor. 1.—If the opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral be equal, one of its
diagonals must be a diameter of the circumscribed circle.
Cor. 2.—Parallel chords in a circle intercept equal arcs.
Cor. 3.—If two chords intersect at any point within a circle, the sum of
the opposite arcs which they intercept is equal to the arc which parallel chords
intersecting on the circumference intercept. 2. If they intersect without the
circle, the difference of the arcs they intercept is equal to the arc which parallel
chords intersecting on the circumference intercept.
Cor. 4.—If two chords intersect at right angles, the sum of the opposite arcs
which they intercept on the circle is a semicircle.

PROP. XXVII.—Theorem.

In equal circles (ACB, DF E), angles at the centres (AOB, DHE), or at

the circumferences (ACB, DF E), which stand on equal arcs (AB, DE), are
equal.
Dem.—If possible let one of
them, such as AOB, be greater
than the other, DHE; and sup-
pose a part such as AOL to be
equal to DHE. Then since the
circles are equal, and the angles
AOL, DHE at the centres are
equal (hyp.), the arc AL is equal
to DE [xxvi.]; but AB is equal
to DE (hyp.). Hence AL is equal to AB—that is, a part equal to the whole,
which is absurd. Therefore the angle AOB is equal to DHE.

89
 2. The angles at the circumference, being the halves of the central angles, are
therefore equal.

PROP. XXVIII.—Theorem.

In equal circles (ACB, DF E),

equal chords (AB, DE) di-
vide the circumferences into arcs,
which are equal each to each—
that is, the lesser to the lesser,
and the greater to the greater.
Dem.—If the equal chords be
diameters, the Proposition is evi-
dent. If not, let O, H be the cen-
tres. Join AO, OB, DH, HE; then because the circles are equal their radii are
equal (Def. i.). Hence the two triangles AOB, DHE have the sides AO, OB
in one respectively equal to the sides DH, HE in the other, and the base AB
is equal to DE (hyp.). Therefore [I. viii.] the angle AOB is equal to DHE.
Hence the arc AGB is equal to DKE [xxvi.]; and since the whole circumference
AGBC is equal to the whole circumference DKEF , the remaining arc ACB is
equal to the remaining arc DF E.

Exercises.
1. The line joining the feet of perpendiculars from any point in the circumference of a
circle, on two diameters given in position, is given in magnitude.
2. If a line of given length slide between two lines given in position, the locus of the
intersection of perpendiculars to the given lines at its extremities is a circle. (This is the
converse of 1.)

PROP. XXIX.—Theorem.
In equal circles (ACB, DF E), equal arcs (AGB, DCK) are subtended by
equal chords.

Dem.—Let O, H be the centres (see last fig.). Join AO, OB, DH, HE;
then because the circles are equal, the angles AOB, DHE at the centres, which
stand on the equal arcs AGB, DKE, are equal [xxvii.]. Again, because the
triangles AOB, DHE have the two sides AO, OB in one respectively equal to
the two sides DH, HE in the other, and the angle AOB equal to the angle
DHE, the base AB of one is equal to the base DE of the other.
Observation.—Since the two circles in the four last Propositions are equal, they are con-
gruent figures, and the truth of the Propositions is evident by superposition.

90
 PROP. XXX.—Problem.
To bisect a given arc ACB.

Sol.—Draw the chord AB; bisect it in D; erect DC at right angles to AB,

meeting the arc in C; then the arc is bisected in C.
Dem.—Join AC, BC. Then the triangles
ADC, BDC have the side AD equal to DB
(const.), and DC common to both, and the an-
gle ADC equal to the angle BDC, each being
right. Hence the base AC is equal to the base
BC. Therefore [xxviii.] the arc AC is equal to
the arc BC. Hence the arc AB is bisected in C.

Exercises.
1. ABCD is a semicircle whose diameter is AD; the chord BC produced meets AD
produced in E: prove that if CE is equal to the radius, the arc AB is equal to three times
CD.
2. The internal and the external bisectors of the vertical angle of a triangle inscribed in a
circle meet the circumference again in points equidistant from the extremities of the base.
3. If from A, one of the points of intersection of two given circles, two chords ACD, AC ′ D′
be drawn, cutting the circles in the points C, D; C ′ , D′ , the triangles BCD, BC ′ D′ , formed
by joining these to the second point B of intersection of the circles, are equiangular.
4. If the vertical angle ACB of a triangle inscribed in a circle be bisected by a line CD,
which meets the circle again in D, and from D perpendiculars DE, DF be drawn to the sides,
one of which must be produced: prove that EA is equal to BF , and hence show that CE is
equal to half the sum of AC, BC.

PROP. XXXI.—Theorem.

In a circle—(1). The angle in a semicircle is a right angle. (2). The angle

in a segment greater than a semicircle is an acute angle. (3). The angle in a
segment less than a semicircle is an obtuse angle.
Dem.—(1). Let AB be the diameter, C
any point in the semicircle. Join AC, CB.
The angle ACB is a right angle.
For let O be the centre. Join OC, and
produce AC to F . Then because AO is equal
to OC, the angle ACO is equal to the an-
gle OAC. In like manner, the angle OCB is
equal to CBO. Hence the angle ACB is equal
to the sum of the two angles BAC, CBA; but
[I. xxxii.] the angle F CB is equal to the sum
of the two interior angles BAC, CBA of the
triangle ABC. Hence the angle ACB is equal
to its adjacent angle F CB, and therefore it
is a right angle [I. Def. xiii.].

91
 (2). Let the arc ACE be greater than a semicircle. Join CE. Then the angle
ACE is evidently less than ACB; but ACB is right; therefore ACE is acute.
(3). Let the arc ACD be less than a semicircle; then evidently, from (1), the
angle ACD is obtuse.
Cor. 1.—If a parallelogram be inscribed in a circle, its diagonals intersect at
the centre of the circle.
Cor. 2.—Find the centre of a circle by means of a carpenter’s square.
Cor. 3.—From a point outside a circle draw two tangents to the circle.

PROP. XXXII.—Theorem.

If a line (EF ) be a tangent to a circle, and from the point of contact (A)
a chord (AC) be drawn cutting the circle, the angles made by this line with
the tangent are respectively equal to the angles in the alternate segments of the
circle.
Dem.—(1). If the chord passes through
the centre, the Proposition is evident, for the
angles are right angles; but if not, from the
point of contact A draw AB at right angles
to the tangent. Join BC. Then because EF
is a tangent to the circle, and AB is drawn
from the point of contact perpendicular to
EF , AB passes through this centre [xix.].
Therefore the angle ACB is right [xxxi.].
Hence the sum of the two remaining angles
ABC, CAB is one right angle; but the angle
BAF is right (const.); therefore the sum of the angles ABC, BAC is equal to
BAF . Reject BAC, which is common, and we get the angle ABC equal to the
angle F AC.
(2). Take any point D in the arc AC. It is required to prove that the angle
CAE is equal to CDA.
Since the quadrilateral ABCD is cyclic, the
sum of the opposite angles ABC, CDA is two
right angles [xxii.], and therefore equal to the
sum of the angles F AC, CAE; but the angles
ABC, F AC are equal (1). Reject them, and we
get the angle CDA equal to CAE.
Or thus: Take any point G in the semi-
circle AGB. Join AG, GB, GC. Then the
angle AGB = F AB, each being right, and
CGB = CAB [xxi.]. Therefore the remain-
ing angle AGC = F AC. Again, join BD, CD.
The angle BDA = BAE, each being right, and
CDB = CAB [xxi.]. Hence the angle CDA = CAE.—Lardner.

92
 Or by the method of limits, see Townsend’s
Modern Geometry, vol. i., page 14.
The angle BAC is equal to BDC [xxi.]. Now
let the point B move until it becomes consecutive
to A; then AB will be a tangent, and BD will
coincide with AD, and the angle BDC with ADC.
Hence, if AX be a tangent at A, AC any chord,
the angle which the tangent makes with the chord
is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.

Exercises.
1. If two circles touch, any line drawn through the point of contact will cut off similar
segments.
2. If two circles touch, and any two lines be drawn through the point of contact, cutting
both circles again, the chord connecting their points of intersection with one circle is parallel
to the chord connecting their points of intersection with the other circle.
3. ACB is an arc of a circle, CE a tangent at C, meeting the chord AB produced in E,
and AD a perpendicular to AB in D: prove, if DE be bisected in C, that the arc AC = 2CB.
4. If two circles touch at a point A, and ABC be a chord through A, meeting the circles
in B and C: prove that the tangents at B and C are parallel to each other, and that when one
circle is within the other, the tangent at B meets the outer circle in two points equidistant
from C.
5. If two circles touch externally, their common tangent at either side subtends a right
angle at the point of contact, and its square is equal to the rectangle contained by their
diameters.

PROP. XXXIII.—Problem.
On a given right line (AB) to describe a segment of a circle which shall
contain an angle equal to a given rectilineal angle (X).

Sol.—If X be a right angle, describe a semicircle on the given line, and the
thing required is done; for the angle in a semicircle is a right angle.

If not, make with the given line AB the angle BAE equal to X. Erect AC
at right angles to AE, and BC at right angles to AB. On AC as diameter
describe a circle: it will be the circle required.

93
 Dem.—The circle on AC as diameter passes through B, since the angle
ABC is right [xxxi.] and touches AE, since the angle CAE is right [xvi.].
Therefore the angle BAE [xxxii.] is equal to the angle in the alternate segment;
but the angle BAE is equal to the angle X (const.). Therefore the angle X is
equal to the angle in the segment described on AB.

Exercises.
1. Construct a triangle, being given base, vertical angle, and any of the following data:—1.
Perpendicular. 2. The sum or difference of the sides. 3. Sum or difference of the squares of
the sides. 4. Side of the inscribed square on the base. 5. The median that bisects the base.
2. If lines be drawn from a fixed point to all the points of the circumference of a given
circle, the locus of all their points of bisection is a circle.
3. Given the base and vertical angle of a triangle, find the locus of the middle point of the
line joining the vertices of equilateral triangles described on the sides.
4. In the same case, find the loci of the angular points of a square described on one of the
sides.

PROP. XXXIV.—Problem.
To cut off from a given circle (ABC) a segment which shall contain an angle
equal to a given angle (X).

Sol.—Take any point A in the circumfer-

ence. Draw the tangent AD, and make the
angle DAC equal to the given angle X. AC
will cut off the required segment.
Dem.—Take any point B in the alter-
nate segment. Join BA, BC. Then the angle
DAC is equal to ABC [xxxii.]; but DAC
is equal to X (const.). Therefore the angle
ABC is equal to X.

PROP. XXXV.—Theorem.
If two chords (AB, CD) of a circle intersect in a point (E) within the circle,
the rectangles (AE . EB, CE . ED) contained by the segments are equal.

Dem.—1. If the point of intersection be the

centre, each rectangle is equal to the square of the
radius. Hence they are equal.
2. Let one of the chords AB pass through the
centre O, and cut the other chord CD, which does
not pass through the centre, at right angles. Join
OC. Now because AB passes through the centre,
and cuts the other chord CD, which does not pass
through the centre at right angles, it bisects it [iii.].
Again, because AB is divided equally in O and unequally in E, the rectangle

94
AE . EB, together with OE 2 , is equal to OB 2 —that is, to OC 2 [II. v.]; but
OC 2 is equal to OE 2 + EC 2 [I. xlvii.] Therefore

AE . EB + OE 2 = OE 2 + EC 2 .

Reject OE 2 , which is common, and we have AE . EB = EC 2 ; but CE 2 is equal

to the rectangle CE . ED, since CE is equal to ED. Therefore the rectangle
AE . EB is equal to the rectangle CE . ED.
3. Let AB pass through the centre, and cut CD,
which does not pass through the centre obliquely.
Let O be the centre. Draw OF perpendicular to
CD [I. xi.]. Join OC, OD. Then, since CD is cut at
right angles by OF , which passes through the centre,
it is bisected in F [iii.], and divided unequally in E.
Hence

CE . ED + F E 2 = F D2 [II. v.],
and OF 2 = OF 2 .

Hence, adding, since F E 2 + OF 2 = OE 2 [I. xlvii.], and F D2 + OF 2 = OD2 ,

we get
CE . ED + OE 2 = OD or OB 2 .
Again, since AB is bisected in O and divided unequally in E,

AE . EB + OE 2 = OB 2 [II. v.].
Therefore CE . ED + OE 2 = AE . EB + OE 2 .
Hence CE . ED = AE . EB.

4. Let neither chord pass through the centre.

Through the point E, where they intersect, draw
the diameter F G. Then by 3, the rectangle F E . EG
is equal to the rectangle AE . EB, and also to the
rectangle CE . ED. Hence the rectangle AE . EB is
equal to the rectangle CE . ED.
Cor. 1.—If a chord of a circle be divided in any
point within the circle, the rectangle contained by
its segments is equal to the difference between the
square of the radius and the square of the line drawn
from the centre to the point of section.
Cor. 2.—If the rectangle contained by the segments of one of two intersecting
lines be equal to the rectangle contained by the segments of the other, the four
extremities are concyclic.
Cor. 3.—If two triangles be equiangular, the rectangle contained by the non-
corresponding sides about any two equal angles are equal.

95
 Let ABO, DCO be the equiangular triangles, and
let them be placed so that the equal angles at O may
be vertically opposite, and that the non-corresponding
sides AO, CO may be in one line; then the non-
corresponding sides BO, OD shall be in one line. Now,
since the angle ABD is equal to ACD, the points A, B,
C, D are concyclic [xxi., Cor. 1]. Hence the rectangle
AO . OC is equal to the rectangle BO . OD [xxxv.].

Exercises.
1. In any triangle, the rectangle contained by two sides is equal to the rectangle contained
by the perpendicular on the third side and the diameter of the circumscribed circle.
Def.—The supplement of an arc is the difference between it and a semicircle.
2. The rectangle contained by the chord of an arc and the chord of its supplement is equal
to the rectangle contained by the radius and the chord of twice the supplement.
3. If the base of a triangle be given, and the sum of the sides, the rectangle contained by
the perpendiculars from the extremities of the base on the external bisector of the vertical
angle is given.
4. If the base and the difference of the sides be given, the rectangle contained by the
perpendiculars from the extremities of the base on the internal bisector is given.
5. Through one of the points of intersection of two circles draw a secant, so that the
rectangle contained by the intercepted chords may be given, or a maximum.
6. If the sum of two arcs, AC, CB of a circle
be less than a semicircle, the rectangle AC . CB con-
tained by their chords is equal to the rectangle con-
tained by the radius, and the excess of the chord of
the supplement of their difference above the chord of
the supplement of their sum.—Catalan.
Dem.—Draw DE, the diameter which is perpen-
dicular to AB, and draw the chords CF , BG paral-
lel to DE. Now it is evident that the difference be-
tween the arcs AC, CB is equal to 2CD, and therefore
= CD + EF . Hence the arc CBF is the supplement of
the difference, and CF is the chord of that supplement.
Again, since the angle ABG is right, the arc ABG is a
semicircle. Hence BG is the supplement of the sum of
the arcs AC, CB; therefore the line BG is the chord of
the supplement of the sum. Now (Ex. 1), the rectangle
AC . CB is equal to the rectangle contained by the diameter and CI, and therefore equal to
the rectangle contained by the radius and 2CI; but the difference between CF and BG is
evidently equal to 2CI. Hence the rectangle AC . CB is equal to the rectangle contained by
the radius and the difference between the chords CF , BG.
7. If we join AF , BF we find, as before, the rectangle AF . F B equal to the rectangle
contained by the radius and 2F I—that is, equal to the rectangle contained by the radius
and the sum of CF and BG. Hence—If the sum of two arcs of a circle be greater than a
semicircle, the rectangle contained by their chords is equal to the rectangle contained by the
radius, and the sum of the chords of the supplements of their sum and their difference.
8. Through a given point draw a transversal cutting two lines given in position, so that
the rectangle contained by the segments intercepted between it and the line may be given.

96
 PROP. XXXVI.—Theorem.

If from any point (P ) without a circle two lines be drawn to it, one of which
(P T ) is a tangent, and the other (P A) a secant, the rectangle (AP, BP ) con-
tained by the segments of the secant is equal to the square of the tangent.
Dem.—1. Let P A pass through the
centre O. Join OT . Then because AB
is bisected in O and divided externally
in P , the rectangle AP . BP + OB 2 is
equal to OP 2 [II. vi.]. But since P T is a
tangent, and OT drawn from the centre
to the point of contact, the angle OT P is
right [xviii.]. Hence OT 2 + P T 2 is equal
to OP 2 .

Therefore AP . BP + OB 2 = OT 2 + P T 2 ;
but OB 2 = OT 2 .
Hence the rectangle AP . BP = P T 2 .

2. If AB does not pass through the

centre O, let fall the perpendicular OC
on AB. Join OT , OB, OP . Then be-
cause OC, a line through the centre,
cuts AB, which does not pass through
the centre at right angles, it bisects it
[iii.]. Hence, since AB is bisected in C
and divided externally in P , the rect-
angle

AP . BP + CB 2 = CP 2 [II. vi.];
and OC 2 = OC 2 .

Hence, adding, since CB 2 + OC 2 = OB 2 [I. xlvii.], and CP 2 + OC 2 = OP 2 ,

we get

rectangle AP . BP + OB 2 = OP 2 ;
but OT 2 + P T 2 = OP 2 [I. xlvii.].
Therefore AP . BP + OB 2 = OT 2 + P T 2 ;

and rejecting the equals OB 2 and OT 2 , we have the rectangle

AP . BP = P T 2 .
The two Propositions xxxv., xxxvi., may be included in one enunciation, as follows:—The
rectangle AP . BP contained by the segments of any chord of a given circle passing through
a fixed point P , either within or without the circle, is constant. For let O be the centre: join

97
OA, OB, OP . Then OAB is an isosceles triangle, and OP is a line drawn from its vertex to a
point P in the base, or base produced. Then the rectangle AP . BP is equal to the difference
of the squares of OB and OP , and is therefore constant.
Cor. 1.—If two lines AB, CD produced meet in P , and if the rectangle
AP . BP = CP . DP , the points A, B, C, D are concyclic (compare xxxv.,
Cor. 2).
Cor. 2.—Tangents to two circles from any point in their common chord are
equal (compare xvii., Ex. 6).
Cor. 3.—The common chords of any three intersecting circles are concurrent
(compare xvii., Ex. 7).

Exercise.
If from the vertex A of a △ ABC, AD be drawn, meeting CB produced in D, and making
the angle BAD = ACB, prove DB . DC = DA2 .

PROP. XXXVII.—Theorem.

If the rectangle (AP . BP ) contained by the segments of a secant, drawn from

any point (P ) without a circle, be equal to the square of a line (P T ) drawn from
the same point to meet the circle, the line which meets the circle is a tangent.
Dem.—From P draw P Q touch-
ing the circle [xvii.]. Let O be the
centre. Join OP , OQ, OT . Now
the rectangle AP . BP is equal to the
square on P T (hyp.), and equal to
the square on P Q [xxxvi.]. Hence
P T 2 is equal to P Q2 , and therefore
P T is equal to P Q. Again, the tri-
angles OT P , OQP have the side OT
equal OQ, T P equal QP , and the
base OP common; hence [I. viii.] the angle OT P is equal to OQP ; but OQP is
a right angle, since P Q is a tangent [xviii.]; hence OT P is right, and therefore
[xvi.] P T is a tangent.

Exercises.
1. Describe a circle passing through two given points, and fulfilling either of the following
conditions: 1, touching a given line; 2, touching a given circle.
2. Describe a circle through a given point, and touching two given lines; or touching a
given file and a given circle.
3. Describe a circle passing through a given point, having its centre on a given line and
touching a given circle.
4. Describe a circle through two given points, and intercepting a given arc on a given
circle.
5. A, B, C, D are four collinear points, and EF is a common tangent to the circles
described upon AB, CD as diameters: prove that the triangles AEB, CF D are equiangular.
6. The diameter of the circle inscribed in a right-angled triangle is equal to half the sum of
the diameters of the circles touching the hypotenuse, the perpendicular from the right angle
of the hypotenuse, and the circle described about the right-angled triangle.

98
 Questions for Examination on Book III.
1. What is the subject-matter of Book III.?
2. Define equal circles.
3. What is the difference between a chord and a secant?
4. When does a secant become a tangent?
5. What is the difference between a segment of a circle and a sector?
6. What is meant by an angle in a segment?
7. If an arc of a circle be one-sixth of the whole circumference, what is the magnitude of
the angle in it?
8. What are linear segments?
9. What is meant by an angle standing on a segment?
10. What are concyclic points?
11. What is a cyclic quadrilateral?
12. How many intersections can a line and a circle have?
13. What does the line become when the points of intersection become consecutive?
14. How many points of intersection can two circles have?
15. What is the reason that if two circles touch they cannot have any other common point?
16. Give one enunciation that will include Propositions xi., xii. of Book III.
17. What Proposition is this a limiting case of?
18. Explain the extended meaning of the word angle.
19. What is Euclid’s limit of an angle?
20. State the relations between Propositions xvi., xviii., xix.
21. What Propositions are these limiting cases of?
22. How many common tangents can two circles have?
23. What is the magnitude of the rectangle of the segments of a chord drawn through a
point 3.65 metres distant from the centre of a circle whose radius is 4.25 metres?
24. The radii of two circles are 4.25 and 1.75 feet respectively, and the distance between
their centres 6.5 feet; find the lengths of their direct and their transverse common tangents.
25. If a point be h feet outside the circumference of a circle whose
r diameter is 7920 miles,
3h
prove that the length of the tangent drawn from it to the circle is miles.
2
26. Two parallel chords of a circle are 12 perches and 16 perches respectively, and their
distance asunder is 2 perches; find the length of the diameter.
27. What is the locus of the centres of all circles touching a given circle in a given point?
28. What is the condition that must be fulfilled that four points may be concyclic?
29. If the angle in a segment of a circle be a right angle and a-half, what part of the whole
circumference is it?
30. Mention the converse Propositions of Book III. which are proved directly.
31. What is the locus of the middle points of equal chords in a circle?
32. The radii of two circles are 6 and 8, and the distance between their centres 10; find
the length of their common chord.
33. If a figure of any even number of sides be inscribed in a circle, prove that the sum of
one set of alternate angles is equal to the sum of the remaining angles.

Exercises on Book III.

1. If two chords of a circle intersect at right angles, the sum of the squares on their
segments is equal to the square on the diameter.
2. If a chord of a given circle subtend a right angle at a fixed point, the rectangle of the
perpendiculars on it from the fixed point and from the centre of the given circle is constant.
Also the sum of the squares of perpendiculars on it from two other fixed points (which may
be found) is constant.
3. If through either of the points of intersection of two equal circles any line be drawn
meeting them again in two points, these points are equally distant from the other intersection
of the circles.

99
 4. Draw a tangent to a given circle so that the triangle formed by it and two fixed tangents
to the circle shall be—1, a maximum; 2, a minimum.
5. If through the points of intersection A, B of two circles any two lines ACD, BEF be
drawn parallel to each other, and meeting the circles again in C, D, E, F ; then CD = EF .
6. In every triangle the bisector of the greatest angle is the least of the three bisectors of
the angles.
7. The circles whose diameters are the four sides of any cyclic quadrilateral intersect again
in four concyclic points.
8. The four angular points of a cyclic quadrilateral determine four triangles whose ortho-
centres (the intersections of their perpendiculars) form an equal quadrilateral.
9. If through one of the points of intersection of two circles we draw two common chords,
the lines joining the extremities of these chords make a given angle with each other.
10. The square on the perpendicular from any point in the circumference of a circle, on
the chord of contact of two tangents, is equal to the rectangle of the perpendiculars from the
same point on the tangents.
11. Find a point in the circumference of a given circle, the sum of the squares on whose
distances from two given points may be a maximum or a minimum.
12. Four circles are described on the sides of a quadrilateral as diameters. The common
chord of any two on adjacent sides is parallel to the common chord of the remaining two.
13. The rectangle contained by the perpendiculars from any point in a circle, on the diag-
onals of an inscribed quadrilateral, is equal to the rectangle contained by the perpendiculars
from the same point on either pair of opposite sides.
14. The rectangle contained by the sides of a triangle is greater than the square on the
internal bisector of the vertical angle, by the rectangle contained by the segments of the base.
15. If through A, one of the points of intersection of two circles, we draw any line ABC,
cutting the circles again in B and C, the tangents at B and C intersect at a given angle.
16. If a chord of a given circle pass through a given point, the locus of the intersection of
tangents at its extremities is a right line.
17. The rectangle contained by the distances of the point where the internal bisector of the
vertical angle meets the base, and the point where the perpendicular from the vertex meets
it from the middle point of the base, is equal to the square on half the difference of the sides.
18. State and prove the Proposition analogous to 17 for the external bisector of the vertical
angle.
19. The square on the external diagonal of a cyclic quadrilateral is equal to the sum of
the squares on the tangents from its extremities to the circumscribed circle.
20. If a variable circle touch a given circle and a given line, the chord of contact passes
through a given point.
21. If A, B, C be three points in the circumference of a circle, and D, E the middle points
of the arcs AB, AC; then if the line DE intersect the chords AB, AC in the points F , G, AF
is equal to AG.
22. Given two circles, O, O′ ; then if any secant cut O in the points B, C, and O′ in the
points B ′ , C ′ , and another secant cuts them in the points D, E; D′ , E ′ respectively; the four
chords BD, CE, B ′ D′ , C ′ E ′ form a cyclic quadrilateral.
23. If a cyclic quadrilateral be such that a circle can be inscribed in it, the lines joining
the points of contact are perpendicular to each other.
24. If through the point of intersection of the diagonals of a cyclic quadrilateral the
minimum chord be drawn, that point will bisect the part of the chord between the opposite
sides of the quadrilateral.
25. Given the base of a triangle, the vertical angle, and either the internal or the external
bisector at the vertical angle; construct it.
26. If through the middle point A of a given arc BAC we draw any chord AD, cutting
BC in E, the rectangle AD . AE is constant.
27. The four circles circumscribing the four triangles formed by any four lines pass through
a common point.
28. If X, Y , Z be any three points on the three sides of a triangle ABC, the three circles
about the triangles Y AZ, ZBX, XCY pass through a common point.

100
 29. If the position of the common point in the last question be given, the three angles of
the triangle XY Z are given, and conversely.
30. Place a given triangle so that its three sides shall pass through three given points.
31. Place a given triangle so that its three vertices shall lie on three given lines.
32. Construct the greatest triangle equiangular to a given one whose sides shall pass
through three given points.
33. Construct the least triangle equiangular to a given one whose vertices shall lie on three
given lines.
34. Construct the greatest triangle equiangular to a given one whose sides shall touch
three given circles.
35. If two sides of a given triangle pass through fixed points, the third touches a fixed
circle.
36. If two sides of a given triangle touch fixed circles, the third touches a fixed circle.
37. Construct an equilateral triangle having its vertex at a given point, and the extremities
of its base on a given circle.
38. Construct an equilateral triangle having its vertex at a given point, and the extremities
of its base on two given circles.
39. Place a given triangle so that its three sides shall touch three given circles.
40. Circumscribe a square about a given quadrilateral.
41. Inscribe a square in a given quadrilateral.
42. Describe circles—(1) orthogonal (cutting at right angles) to a given circle and passing
through two given points; (2) orthogonal to two others, and passing through a given point;
(3) orthogonal to three others.
43. If from the extremities of a diameter AB of a semicircle two chords AD, BE be drawn,
meeting in C, AC . AD + BC . BE = AB 2 .
44. If ABCD be a cyclic quadrilateral, and if we describe any circle passing through the
points A and B, another through B and C, a third through C and D, and a fourth through
D and A; these circles intersect successively in four other points E, F , G, H, forming another
cyclic quadrilateral.
45. If ABC be an equilateral triangle, what is the locus of the point M , if M A = M B +
M C?
46. In a triangle, given the sum or the difference of two sides and the angle formed by
these sides both in magnitude and position, the locus of the centre of the circumscribed circle
is a right line.
47. Describe a circle—(1) through two given points which shall bisect the circumference
of a given circle; (2) through one given point which shall bisect the circumference of two given
circles.
48. Find the locus of the centre of a circle which bisects the circumferences of two given
circles.
49. Describe a circle which shall bisect the circumferences of three given circles.
50. AB is a diameter of a circle; AC, AD are two chords meeting the tangent at B in the
points E, F respectively: prove that the points C, D, E, F are concyclic.
51. CD is a perpendicular from any point C in a semicircle on the diameter AB; EF G is
a circle touching DB in E, CD in F , and the semicircle in G; prove—(1) that the points A,
F , G are collinear; (2) that AC = AE.
52. Being given an obtuse-angled triangle, draw from the obtuse angle to the opposite
side a line whose square shall be equal to the rectangle contained by the segments into which
it divides the opposite side.
53. O is a point outside a circle whose centre is E; two perpendicular lines passing through
O intercept chords AB, CD on the circle; then AB 2 + CD2 + 4OE 2 = 8R2 .
54. The sum of the squares on the sides of a triangle is equal to twice the sum of the
rectangles contained by each perpendicular and the portion of it comprised between the cor-
responding vertex and the orthocentre; also equal to 12R2 minus the sum of the squares of
the distances of the orthocentre from the vertices.
55. If two circles touch in C, and if D be any point outside the circles at which their radii
through C subtend equal angles, if DE, DF be tangent from D, DE . DF = DC 2 .

101
 BOOK IV.
INSCRIPTION AND CIRCUMSCRIPTION OF TRIANGLES
AND OF REGULAR POLYGONS IN AND ABOUT CIRCLES

DEFINITIONS.

i. If two rectilineal figures be so related that the angular points of one lie
on the sides of the other—1, the former is said to be inscribed in the latter; 2,
the latter is said to be described about the former.
ii. A rectilineal figure is said to be inscribed in a circle when its angular
points are on the circumference. Reciprocally, a rectilineal figure is said to be
circumscribed to a circle when each side touches the circle.
iii. A circle is said to be inscribed in a rectilineal figure when it touches
each side of the figure. Reciprocally, a circle is said to be circumscribed to a
rectilineal figure when it passes through each angular point of the figure.
iv. A rectilineal figure which is both equilateral and equiangular is said to
be regular.
Observation.—The following summary of the contents of the Fourth Book will assist the
student in remembering it:—
1. It contains sixteen Propositions, of which four relate to triangles, four to squares, four
to pentagons, and four miscellaneous Propositions.
2. Of the four Propositions occupied with triangles—
(α) One is to inscribe a triangle in a circle.
(β) Its reciprocal, to describe a triangle about a circle.
(γ) To inscribe a circle in a triangle.
(δ) Its reciprocal, to describe a circle about a triangle.
3. If we substitute in (α), (β), (γ), (δ) squares for triangles, and pentagons for triangles,
we have the problems for squares and pentagons respectively.
4. Every Proposition in the fourth Book is a problem.

PROP. I.—Problem.
In a given circle (ABC) to place a chord equal to a given line (D) not greater
than the diameter.

Sol.—Draw any diameter AC of

the circle; then, if AC be equal to
D, the thing required is done; if not,
from AC cut off the part AE equal
to D [I. iii.]; and with A as centre
and AE as radius, describe the cir-
cle EBF , cutting the circle ABC in
the points B, F . Join AB. Then
AB is the chord required.

102
 Dem.—Because A is the centre of the circle EBF , AB is equal to AE
[I. Def. xxxii.]; but AE is equal to D (const.); therefore AB is equal to D.

PROP. II.—Problem.
In a given circle (ABC) to inscribe a triangle equiangular to a given triangle
(DEF ).

Sol.—Take any point A in the cir-

cumference, and at it draw the tan-
gent GH; then make the angle HAC
equal to E, and GAB equal to F
[I. xxiii.] Join BC. ABC is a tri-
angle fulfilling the required conditions.
Dem.—The angle E is equal to
HAC (const.), and HAC is equal to
the angle ABC in the alternate seg-
ment [III. xxxii.]. Hence the angle E is equal to ABC. In like manner the
angle F is equal to ACB. Therefore [I. xxxii.] the remaining angle D is equal
to BAC. Hence the triangle ABC inscribed in the given circle is equiangular to
DEF .

PROP. III.—Problem.
About a given circle (ABC) to describe a triangle equiangular to a given
triangle (DEF ).

Sol.—Produce any side DE of the given triangle both ways to G and H,

and from the centre O of the circle draw any radius OA; make the angle AOB
equal to GEF [I. xxiii.], and the angle AOC equal to HDF . At the points A,
B, C draw the tangents LM , M N , N L to the given circle. LM N is a triangle
fulfilling the required conditions.

103
 Dem.—Because AM touches the circle at A, the angle OAM is right. In
like manner, the angle M BO is right; but the sum of the four angles of the
quadrilateral OAM B is equal to four right angles. Therefore the sum of the
two remaining angles AOB, AM B is two right angles; and [I. xiii.] the sum
of the two angles GEF , F ED is two right angles. Therefore the sum of AOB,
AM B is equal to the sum of GEF , F ED; but AOB is equal to GEF (const.).
Hence AM B is equal to F ED. In like manner, ALC is equal to EDF ; therefore
[I. xxxii.] the remaining angle BN C is equal to DF E. Hence the triangle LM N
is equiangular to DEF .

PROP. IV.—Problem.
To inscribe a circle in a given triangle (ABC).
Sol.—Bisect any two angles A, B of the given triangle by the lines AO, BO;
then O, their point of intersection, is the centre of the required circle.
Dem.—From O let fall the perpendiculars
OD, OE, OF on the sides of the triangle. Now,
in the triangles OAE, OAF the angle OAE is
equal to OAF (const.), and the angle AEO equal
to AF O, because each is right, and the side OA
common. Hence [I. xxvi.] the side OE is equal
to OF . In like manner OD is equal to OF ; there-
fore the three lines OD, OE, OF are all equal.
And the circle described with O as centre and
OD as radius will pass through the points E, F ;
and since the angles D, E, F are right, it will
[III. xvi.] touch the three sides of the triangle ABC; and therefore the circle
DEF is inscribed in the triangle ABC.
Exercises.
1. If the points O, C be joined, the angle C
is bisected. Hence “the bisectors of the angles
of a triangle are concurrent” (compare I. xxvi.,
Ex. 7).
2. If the sides BC, CA, AB of the triangle
ABC be denoted by a, b, c, and half their sum by
s, the distances of the vertices A, B, C of the tri-
angle from the points of contact of the inscribed
circle are respectively s − a, s − b, s − c.
3. If the external angles of the triangle ABC
be bisected as in the annexed diagram, the three
angular points O′ , O′′ , O′′′ , of the triangle
formed by the three bisectors will be the centres
of three circles, each touching one side externally,
and the other two produced. These three cir-
cles are called the escribed circles of the triangle
ABC.
4. The distances of the vertices A, B, C from
the points of contact of the escribed circle which
touches AB externally are s − b, s − a, s.

104
 5. The centre of the inscribed circle, the centre of each escribed circle, and two of the
angular points of the triangle, are concyclic. Also any two of the escribed centres are concyclic
with the corresponding two of the angular points of the triangle.
6. Of the four points O, O′ , O′′ , O′′′ , any one is the orthocentre of the triangle formed
by the remaining three.
7. The three triangles BCO′ , CAO′′ , ABO′′′ are equiangular.
8. The rectangle CO . CO′′′ = ab; AO . AO′ = bc; BO . BO′′ = ca.
9. Since the whole triangle ABC is made up of the three triangles AOB, BOC, COA, we
see that the rectangle contained by the sum of the three sides, and the radius of the inscribed
circle, is equal to twice the area of the triangle. Hence, if r denote the radius of the inscribed
circle, rs = area of the triangle.
10. If r′ denote the radius of the escribed circle which touches the side a externally, it
may be shown in like manner that r′ (s − a) = area of the triangle.
11. rr′ = s − b . s − c.
12. Square of area = s . s − a . s − b . s − c.
13. Square of area = r . r′ . r′′ . r′′′ .
14. If the triangle ABC be right-angled, having the angle C right,
r = s − c; r′ = s − b; r′′ = s − a; r′′′ = s.
15. Given the base of a triangle, the vertical angle, and the radius of the inscribed, or any
of the escribed circles: construct it.

PROP. V.—Problem.
To describe a circle about a given triangle (ABC).

Sol.—Bisect any two sides BC, AC in the points

D, E. Erect DO, EO at right angles to BC, CA;
then O, the point of intersection of the perpendicu-
lars, is the centre of the required circle.
Dem.—Join OA, OB, OC. The triangles BDO,
CDO have the side BD equal CD (const.), and DO
common, and the angle BDO equal to the angle
CDO, because each is right. Hence [I. iv.] BO is
equal to OC. In like manner AO is equal to OC.
Therefore the three lines AO, BO, CO are equal,
and the circle described with O as centre, and OA as radius, will pass through
the points A, B, C, and be described about the triangle ABC.
Cor. 1.—Since the perpendicular from O on AB bisects it [III. iii.], we
see that the perpendiculars at the middle points of the sides of a triangle are
concurrent.
Def.—The circle ABC is called the circumcircle, its radius the circumra-
dius, and its centre the circumcentre of the triangle.

Exercises.
1. The three perpendiculars of a triangle (ABC) are concurrent.

105
 Dem.—Describe a circle about the triangle. Let fall the
perpendicular CF . Produce CF to meet the circle in G. Make
F O = F G. Join AG, AO. Produce AO to meet BC in D.
Then the triangles GF A, OF A have the sides GF , F A in one
equal to the sides OF , F A in the other, and the contained
angles equal. Hence [I. iv.] the angle GAF equal OAF ; but
GAF = GCB [III. xxi.]; hence OAF = OCD, and F OA =
DOC; hence OF A = ODC; but OF A is right, hence ODC is
right. In like manner, if BO be joined to meet AC in E, BE
will be perpendicular to AC. Hence the three perpendiculars
pass through O, and are concurrent. This Proposition may be proved simply as follows:—
Draw parallels to the sides of the original tri-
angle ABC through its vertices, forming a new
triangle A′ B ′ C ′ described about ABC; then the
three perpendiculars at the middle points of the
sides of A′ B ′ C ′ are concurrent [v. Cor. 1], and
these are evidently the perpendiculars from the
vertices on the opposite sides of the triangle ABC
(compare Ex. 16, Book I.).
Def.—The point O is called the orthocentre of
the triangle ABC.
2. The three rectangles OA . OP , OB . OQ,
OC . OR are equal.
Def.—The circle round O as centre, the
square of whose radius is equal OA . OP = OB . OQ = OC . OR, is called the polar circle
of the triangle ABC.
Observation.—If the orthocentre of the triangle ABC be within the triangle, the rectangles
OA . OP , OB . OQ, OC . OR are negative, because the lines OA . OP , &c., are measured in
opposite directions, and have contrary signs; hence the polar circle is imaginary; but it is real
when the point O is without the triangle—that is, when the triangle has an obtuse angle.
3. If the perpendiculars of a triangle be produced to meet the circumscribed circle, the
intercepts between the orthocentre and the circle are bisected by the sides of the triangle.
4. The point of bisection (I) of the line (OP )
joining the orthocentre (O) to the circumference (P )
of any triangle is equally distant from the feet of the
perpendiculars, from the middle points of the sides,
and from the middle points of the distances of the
vertices from the orthocentre.
Dem.—Draw the perpendicular P H; then,
since OF , P H are perpendiculars on AB, and OP is
bisected in I, it is easy to see that IH = IF . Again,
since OP , OG are bisected in I, F ; IF = 21 P G—
that is, IF = 12 the radius. Hence the distance of I
from the foot of each perpendicular, and from the
middle point of each side, is = 12 the radius. In like
manner, if OC be bisected in K, then IK = 21 the
radius. Hence we have the following theorem:—The
nine points made up of the feet of the perpendicu-
lars, the middle points of the sides, and the middle points of the lines from the vertices to
the orthocentre, are concyclic.
Def.—The circle through these nine points is called the “nine points circle” of the trian-
gle.
5. The circumcircle of a triangle is the “nine points circle” of each of the four triangles
formed by joining the centres of the inscribed and escribed circles.
6. The distances between the vertices of a triangle and its orthocentre are respectively the
doubles of the perpendiculars from the circumcentre on the sides.
7. The radius of the “nine points circle” of a triangle is equal to half its circumradius.

106
 PROP. VI.—Problem.
In a given circle (ABCD) to inscribe a square.

Sol.—Draw any two diameters AC, BD at

right angles to each other. Join AB, BC, CD,
DA. ABCD is a square.
Dem.—Let O be the centre. Then the
four angles at O, being right angles, are equal.
Hence the arcs on which they stand are equal
[III. xxvi.], and hence the four chords are equal
[III. xxix.]. Therefore the figure ABCD is equi-
lateral.
Again, because AC is a diameter, the angle
ABC is right [III. xxxi.]. In like manner the remaining angles are right. Hence
ABCD is a square.

PROP. VII.—Problem.
About a given circle (ABCD) to describe a square.

Sol.—Through the centre O draw any two diameters at right angles to each
other, and draw at the points A, B, C, D the lines HE, EF , F G, GH touching
the circle. EF GH is a square.
Dem.—Because AE touches the circle at A,
the angle EAO is right [III. xviii.], and therefore
equal to BOC, which is right (const.). Hence AE
is parallel to OB. In like manner EB is parallel
to AO; and since AO is equal to OB, the figure
AOBE is a lozenge, and the angle AOB is right;
hence AOBE is a square. In like manner each of
the figures BC, CD, DA is a square. Hence the
whole figure is a square.
Cor.—The circumscribed square is double of
the inscribed square.

PROP. VIII.—Problem.
In a given square (ABCD) to inscribe a circle.

Sol.—Bisect (see last diagram) two adjacent sides EH, EF in the points A,
B, and through A, B draw the lines AC, BD, respectively parallel to EF , EH;
then O, the point of intersection of these parallels, is the centre of the required
circle.
Dem.—Because AOBE is a parallelogram, its opposite sides are equal;
therefore AO is equal to EB; but EB is half the side of the given square;

107
therefore AO is equal to half the side of the given square; and so in like manner
is each of the lines OB, OC, OD; therefore the four lines OA, OB, OC, OD
are all equal; and since they are perpendicular to the sides of the given square,
the circle described with O as centre, and OA as radius, will be inscribed in the
square.

PROP. IX.—Problem.
About a given square (ABCD) to describe a circle.

Sol.—Draw the diagonals AC, BD intersecting in O (see diagram to Propo-

sition vi.). O is the centre of the required circle.
Dem.—Since ABC is an isosceles triangle, and the angle B is right, each
of the other angles is half a right angle; therefore BAO is half a right angle.
In like manner ABO is half a right angle; hence the angle BAO equal ABO;
therefore [I. vi.] AO is equal to OB. In like manner OB is equal to OC, and
OC to OD. Hence the circle described, with O as centre and OA as radius, will
pass through the points B, C, D, and be described about the square.

PROP. X.—Problem.
To construct an isosceles triangle having each base angle double the vertical
angle.

Sol.—Take any line AB. Divide it in C,

so that the rectangle AB . BC shall be equal to
AC 2 [II. xi.]. With A as centre, and AB as
radius, describe the circle BDE, and in it place
the chord BD equal to AC [i.]. Join AD. ADB
is a triangle fulfilling the required conditions.
Dem.—Join CD. About the triangle ACD
describe the circle CDE [v.]. Then, because
the rectangle AB . BC is equal to AC 2 (const.),
and that AC is equal to BD (const.); therefore
the rectangle AB . BC is equal to BD2 . Hence
[III. xxxii.] BD touches the circle ACD. Hence the angle BDC is equal to the
angle A in the alternate segment [III. xxxii.]. To each add CDA, and we have
the angle BDA equal to the sum of the angles CDA and A; but the exterior
angle BCD of the triangle ACD is equal to the sum of the angles CDA and
A. Hence the angle BDA is equal to BCD; but since AB is equal to AD, the
angle BDA is equal to ABD; therefore the angle CBD is equal to BCD. Hence
[I. vi.] BD is equal to CD; but BD is equal to AC (const.); therefore AC is
equal to CD, and therefore [I. v.] the angle CDA is equal to A; but BDA has
been proved to be equal to the sum of CDA and A. Hence BDA is double of
A. Hence each of the base angles of the triangle ABD is double of the vertical
angle.

108
 Exercises.
1. Prove that ACD is an isosceles triangle whose vertical angle is equal to three times
each of the base angles.
2. Prove that BD is the side of a regular decagon inscribed in the circle BDE.
3. If DB, DE, EF be consecutive sides of a regular decagon inscribed in a circle, prove
BF − BD = radius of circle.
4. If E be the second point of intersection of the circle ACD with BDE, DE is equal to
DB; and if AE, BE, CE, DE be joined, each of the triangles ACE, ADE is congruent with
ABD.
5. AC is the side of a regular pentagon inscribed in the circle ACD, and EB the side of
a regular pentagon inscribed in the circle BDE.
6. Since ACE is an isosceles triangle, EB 2 − EA2 = AB . BC—that is = BD2 ; therefore
EB 2 − BD2 = EA2 —that is, the square of the side of a pentagon inscribed in a circle exceeds
the square of the side of the decagon inscribed in the same circle by the square of the radius.

PROP. XI.—Problem.
To inscribe a regular pentagon in a given circle (ABCDE).

Sol.—Construct an isosceles triangle [x.],

having each base angle double the vertical an-
gle, and inscribe in the given circle a triangle
ABD equiangular to it. Bisect the angles DAB,
ABD by the lines AC, BE. Join EA, ED, DC,
CB; then the figure ABCDE is a regular pen-
tagon.
Dem.—Because each of the base angles
BAD, ABD is double of the angle ADB, and
the lines AC, BE bisect them, the five angles
BAC, CAD, ADB, DBE, EBA are all equal;
therefore the arcs on which they stand are equal; and therefore the five chords,
AB, BC, CD, DE, EA are equal. Hence the figure ABCDE is equilateral.
Again, because the arcs AB, DE are equal, adding the arc BCD to both,
the arc ABCD is equal to the arc BCDE, and therefore [III. xxvii.] the angles
AED, BAE, which stand on them, are equal. In the same manner it can be
proved that all the angles are equal; therefore the figure ABCDE is equiangular.
Hence it is a regular pentagon.

Exercises.
1. The figure formed by the five diagonals of a regular pentagon is another regular pen-
tagon.
2. If the alternate sides of a regular pentagon be produced to meet, the five points of
meeting form another regular pentagon.
3. Every two consecutive diagonals of a regular pentagon divide each other in extreme
and mean ratio.
4. Being given a side of a regular pentagon, construct it.
5. Divide a right angle into five equal parts.

109
 PROP. XII.—Problem.
To describe a regular pentagon about a given circle (ABCDE).
Sol.—Let the five points A, B, C, D, E on the circle be the vertices of any
inscribed regular pentagon: at these points draw tangents F G, GH, HI, IJ,
JF : the figure F GHIJ is a circumscribed regular pentagon.
Dem.—Let O be the centre of the cir-
cle. Join OE, OA, OB. Now, because the
angles A, E of the quadrilateral AOEF are
right angles [III. xviii.], the sum of the two
remaining angles AOE, AF E is two right an-
gles. In like manner the sum of the angles
AOB, AGB is two right angles; therefore the
sum of AOE, AF E is equal to the sum of
AOB, AGB; but the angles AOE, AOB are
equal, because they stand on equal arcs AE,
AB [III. xxvii.]. Hence the angle AF E is
equal to AGB. In like manner the remaining
angles of the figure F GHIJ are equal. Therefore it is equiangular.
Again, join OF , OG. Now the triangles EOF , AOF have the sides AF , F E
equal [III. xvii., Ex. 1], and F O common, and the base AO equal to the base
EO. Hence the angle AF O is equal to EF O [I. viii.]. Therefore the angle AF O
is half the angle AF E. In like manner AGO is half the angle AGB; but AF E
has been proved equal to AGB; hence AF O is equal to AGO, and F AO is equal
to GAO, each being right, and AO common to the two triangles F AO, GAO;
hence [I. xxvi.] the side AF is equal to AG; therefore GF is double AF . In like
manner JF is double EF ; but AF is equal to EF ; hence GF is equal to JF .
In like manner the remaining sides are equal; therefore the figure F GHIJ is
equilateral, and it has been proved equiangular. Hence it is a regular pentagon.
This Proposition is a particular case of the following general theorem, of which the proof
is the same as the foregoing:—
“If tangents be drawn to a circle, at the angular points of an inscribed polygon of any
number of sides, they will form a regular polygon of the same number of sides circumscribed
to the circle.”

PROP. XIII.—Problem.
To inscribe a circle in a regular pentagon (ABCDE).
Sol.—Bisect two adjacent angles A, B by the lines AO, BO; then O, the
point of intersection of the bisectors, is the centre of the required circle.
Dem.—Join CO, and let fall perpendiculars from O on the five sides of the
pentagon. Now the triangles ABO, CBO have the side AB equal to BC (hyp.),
and BO common, and the angle ABO equal to CBO (const.). Hence the angle
BAO is equal to BCO [I. iv.]; but BAO is half BAE (const.). Therefore BCO
is half BCD, and therefore CO bisects the angle BCD. In like manner it may
be proved that DO bisects the angle D, and EO the angle E.

110
 Again, the triangles BOF , BOG have the
angle F equal to G, each being right; and
OBF equal to OBG, because OB bisects the
angle ABC (const.), and OB common; hence
[I. xxvi.] OF is equal to OG. In like manner
all the perpendiculars from O on the sides of
the pentagon are equal; hence the circle whose
centre is O, and radius OF , will touch all the
sides of the pentagon, and will therefore be in-
scribed in it.
In the same manner a circle may be in-
scribed in any regular polygon.

PROP. XIV.—Problem.
To describe a circle about a regular pentagon (ABCDE).
Sol.—Bisect two adjacent angles A, B by the lines AO, BO. Then O, the
point of intersection of the bisectors, is the centre of the required circle.
Dem.—Join OC, OD, OE. Then the triangles
ABO, CBO have the side AB equal to BC (hyp.),
BO common, and the angle ABO equal to CBO
(const.). Hence the angle BAO is equal to BCO
[I. iv.]; but the angle BAE is equal to BCD (hyp.);
and since BAO is half BAE (const.), BCO is half
BCD. Hence CO bisects the angle BCD. In like
manner it may be proved that DO bisects CDE,
and EO the angle DEA. Again, because the angle
EAB is equal to ABC, their halves are equal. Hence
OAB is equal to OBA; therefore [I. vi.] OA is equal to OB. In like manner the
lines OC, OD, OE are equal to one another and to OA. Therefore the circle
described with O as centre, and OA as radius, will pass through the points B,
C, D, E, and be described about the pentagon.
In the same manner a circle may be described about any regular polygon.
Propositions xiii., xiv. are particular cases of the following theorem:—
“A regular polygon of any number of sides has one circle inscribed in it, and another
described about it, and both circles are concentric.”

PROP. XV.—Problem.
In a given circle (ABCDEF ) to inscribe a regular hexagon.
Sol.—Take any point A in the circumference, and join it to O, the centre
of the given circle; then with A as centre, and AO as radius, describe the circle
OBF , intersecting the given circle in the points B, F . Join OB, OF , and
produce AO, BO, F O to meet the given circle again in the points D, E, C.
Join AB, BC, CD, DE, EF , F A; ABCDEF is the required hexagon.

111
 Dem.—Each of the triangles AOB,
AOF is equilateral (see Dem., I. i.).
Hence the angles AOB, AOF are each
one-third of two right angles; therefore
EOF is one-third of two right angles.
Again, the angles BOC, COD, DOE are
[I. xv.] respectively equal to the angles
EOF , F OA, AOB. Therefore the six an-
gles at the centre are equal, because each is one-third of two right angles. There-
fore the six chords are equal [III. xxix.]. Hence the hexagon is equilateral.
Again, since the arc AF is equal to ED, to each add the arc ABCD; then
the whole arc F ABCD is equal to ABCDE; therefore the angles DEF , EF A
which stand on these arcs are equal [III. xxvii.]. In the same manner it may be
shown that the other angles of the hexagon are equal. Hence it is equiangular,
and is therefore a regular hexagon inscribed in the circle.
Cor. 1.—The side of a regular hexagon inscribed in a circle is equal to the
radius.
Cor. 2.—If three alternate angles of a hexagon be joined, they form an
inscribed equilateral triangle.

Exercises.
1. The area of a regular hexagon inscribed in a circle is equal to twice the area of an
equilateral triangle inscribed in the circle; and the square of the side of the triangle is three
times the square of the side of the hexagon.
2. If the diameter of a circle be produced to C until the produced part is equal to the
radius, the two tangents from C and their chord of contact form an equilateral triangle.
3. The area of a regular hexagon inscribed in a circle is half the area of an equilateral
triangle, and three-fourths of the area of a regular hexagon circumscribed to the circle.

PROP. XVI.—Problem.
To inscribe a regular polygon of fifteen sides in a given circle.

Sol.—Inscribe a regular pentagon ABCDE in the circle [xi.], and also an

equilateral triangle AGH [ii.]. Join CG. CG is a side of the required polygon.
Dem.—Since ABCDE is a regular pentagon,
the arc ABC is 25 ths of the circumference; and since
AGH is an equilateral triangle, the arc ABG is 31 rd
of the circumference. Hence the arc GC, which is
the difference between these two arcs, is equal to
2 1 1
5 ths − 3 rd, or 15 th of the entire circumference; and
therefore, if chords equal to GC [i.] be placed round
the circle, we shall have a regular polygon of fifteen
sides, or quindecagon, inscribed in it.
Scholium.—Until the year 1801 no regular polygon could be described by constructions
employing the line and circle only, except those discussed in this Book, and those obtained
from them by the continued bisection of the arcs of which their sides are the chords; but in

112
that year the celebrated Gauss proved that if 2n + 1 be a prime number, regular polygons of
2n + 1 sides are inscriptable by elementary geometry. For the case n = 4, which is the only
figure of this class except the pentagon for which a construction has been given, see Note at
the end of this work.

Questions for Examination on Book IV.

1. What is the subject-matter of Book IV.?
2. When is one rectilineal figure said to be inscribed in another?
3. When circumscribed?
4. When is a circle said to be inscribed in a rectilineal figure?
5. When circumscribed about it?
6. What is meant by reciprocal propositions? Ans. In reciprocal propositions, to every
line in one there corresponds a point in the other; and, conversely, to every point in one there
corresponds a line in the other.
7. Give instances of reciprocal propositions in Book IV.
8. What is a regular polygon?
9. What figures can be inscribed in, and circumscribed about, a circle by means of
Book IV.?
10. What regular polygons has Gauss proved to be inscriptable by the line and circle?
11. What is meant by escribed circles?
12. How many circles can be described to touch three lines forming a triangle?
13. What is the centroid of a triangle?
14. What is the orthocentre?
15. What is the circumcentre?
16. What is the polar circle?
17. When is the polar circle imaginary?
18. What is the “nine-points circle”?
19. Why is it so called?
20. Name the special nine points through which it passes.
21. What three regular figures can be used in filling up the space round a point? Ans.
Equilateral triangles, squares, and hexagons.
22. If the sides of a triangle be 13, 14, 15, what are the values of the radii of its inscribed
and escribed circles?
23. What is the radius of the circumscribed circle?
24. What is the radius of its nine-points circle?
25. What is the distance between the centres of its inscribed and circumscribed circles?
26. If r be the radius of a circle, what is the area of its inscribed equilateral triangle?—of its
inscribed square?—its inscribed pentagon?—its inscribed hexagon?—its inscribed octagon?—
its inscribed decagon?
27. With the same hypothesis, find the sides of the same regular figures.

Exercises on Book IV.

1. If a circumscribed polygon be regular, the corresponding inscribed polygon is also
regular, and conversely.
2. If a circumscribed triangle be isosceles, the corresponding inscribed triangle is isosceles,
and conversely.
3. If the two isosceles triangles in Ex. 2 have equal vertical angles, they are both equilateral.
4. Divide an angle of an equilateral triangle into five equal parts.
5. Inscribe a circle in a sector of a given circle.
6. The line DE is parallel to the base BC of the triangle ABC: prove that the circles
described about the triangles ABC, ADE touch at A.
7. The diagonals of a cyclic quadrilateral intersect in E: prove that the tangent at E to
the circle about the triangle ABE is parallel to CD.
8. Inscribe a regular octagon in a given square.

113
 9. A line of given length slides between two given lines: find the locus of the intersection
of perpendiculars from its extremities to the given lines.
10. If the perpendicular to any side of a triangle at its middle point meet the internal and
external bisectors of the opposite angle in the points D and E; prove that D, E are points on
the circumscribed circle.
11. Through a given point P draw a chord of a circle so that the intercept EF may subtend
a given angle X.
12. In a given circle inscribe a triangle having two sides passing through two given points,
and the third parallel to a given line.
13. Given four points, no three of which are collinear; describe a circle which shall be
equidistant from them.
14. In a given circle inscribe a triangle whose three sides shall pass through three given
points.
15. Construct a triangle, being given—
1. The radius of the inscribed circle, the vertical angle, and the perpendicular from
the vertical angle on the base.
2. The base, the sum or difference of the other sides, and the radius of the inscribed
circle, or of one of the escribed circles.
3. The centres of the escribed circles.
16. If F be the middle point of the base of a triangle, DE the diameter of the circumscribed
circle which passes through F , and L the point where a parallel to the base through the vertex
meets DE: prove DL . F E is equal to the square of half the sum, and DF . LE equal to the
square of half the difference of the two remaining sides.
17. If from any point within a regular polygon of n sides perpendiculars be let fall on the
sides, their sum is equal to n times the radius of the inscribed circle.
18. The sum of the perpendiculars let fall from the angular points of a regular polygon of
n sides on any line is equal to n times the perpendicular from the centre of the polygon on
the same line.
19. If R denotes the radius of the circle circumscribed about a triangle ABC, r, r′ ,
r′′ , r′′′ the radii of its inscribed and escribed circles, δ, δ ′ , δ ′′ the perpendiculars from its
circumcentre on the sides; µ, µ′ , µ′′ the segments of these perpendiculars between the sides
and circumference of the circumscribed circle, we have the relations—
r′ + r′′ + r′′′ = 4R + r, (1)
µ + µ′ + µ′′ = 2R − r, (2)
δ + δ ′ + δ ′′ = R + r. (3)
The relation (3) supposes that the circumcentre is inside the triangle.
20. Through a point D, taken on the side BC of a triangle ABC, is drawn a transversal
EDF , and circles described about the triangles DBF , ECD. The locus of their second point
of intersection is a circle.
21. In every quadrilateral circumscribed about a circle, the middle points of its diagonals
and the centre of the circle are collinear.
22. Find on a given line a point P , the sum or difference of whose distances from two
given points may be given.
23. Find a point such that, if perpendiculars be let fall from it on four given lines, their
feet may be collinear.
24. The line joining the orthocentre of a triangle to any point P , in the circumference of
its circumscribed circle, is bisected by the line of collinearity of perpendiculars from P on the
sides of the triangle.
25. The orthocentres of the four triangles formed by any four lines are collinear.
26. If a semicircle and its diameter be touched by any circle, either internally or externally,
twice the rectangle contained by the radius of the semicircle, and the radius of the tangential
circle, is equal to the rectangle contained by the segments of any secant to the semicircle,
through the point of contact of the diameter and touching circle.

114
 27. If ρ, ρ′ be the radii of two circles, touching each other at the centre of the inscribed
circle of a triangle, and each touching the circumscribed circle, prove
1 1 2
+ ′ = ,
ρ ρ r
and state and prove corresponding theorems for the escribed circles.
28. If from any point in the circumference of the circle, circumscribed about a regular
polygon of n sides, lines be drawn to its angular points, the sum of their squares is equal to
2n times the square of the radius.
29. In the same case, if the lines be drawn from any point in the circumference of the
inscribed circle, prove that the sum of their squares is equal to n times the sum of the squares
of the radii of the inscribed and the circumscribed circles.
30. State the corresponding theorem for the sum of the squares of the lines drawn from
any point in the circumference of any concentric circle.
31. If from any point in the circumference of any concentric circle perpendiculars be let
fall on all the sides of any regular polygon, the sum of their squares is constant.
3n
32. For the inscribed circle, the constant is equal to times the square of the radius.
2
33. For the circumscribed circle, the constant is equal to n times the square of the radius
of the inscribed circle, together with 21 n times the square of the radius of the circumscribed
circle.
34. If the circumference of a circle whose radius is R be divided into seventeen equal parts,
and AO be the diameter drawn from one of the points of division (A), and if ρ1 , ρ2 . . . . . . ρ8
denote the chords from O to the points of division, A1 , A2 . . . . . . A8 on one side of AO, then
ρ1 ρ2 ρ4 ρ8 = R4 ; and ρ3 ρ5 ρ6 ρ7 = R4 .—Catalan.
Dem.—Let the supplemental chords corresponding to ρ1 , ρ2 , &c., be denoted by r1 , r2 ,
&c.; then [III. xxxv. Ex. 2], we have
ρ1 r1 = Rr2 ,
ρ2 r2 = Rr4 ,
ρ4 r4 = Rr8 ,
ρ8 r8 = Rr1 ,
Hence ρ1 ρ2 ρ4 ρ8 = R4 .
And it may be proved in the same manner that
ρ1 ρ2 ρ3 ρ4 ρ5 ρ6 ρ7 ρ8 = R8 .
Therefore ρ3 ρ5 ρ6 ρ7 = R4 .
35. If from the middle point of the line joining any two of four concyclic points a perpen-
dicular be let fall on the line joining the remaining two, the six perpendiculars thus obtained
are concurrent.
36. The greater the number of sides of a regular polygon circumscribed about a given
circle, the less will be its perimeter.
37. The area of any regular polygon of more than four sides circumscribed about a circle
is less than the square of the diameter.
38. Four concyclic points taken three by three determine four triangles, the centres of
whose nine-points circles are concyclic.
39. If two sides of a triangle be given in position, and if their included angle be equal to
an angle of an equilateral triangle, the locus of the centre of its nine-points circle is a right
line.
40. If, in the hypothesis and notation of Ex. 34, α, β denote any two suffixes whose sum
is less than 8, and of which α is the greater,
ρα ρβ = R(ρα−β + ρα+β ).
For instance, ρ1 ρ4 = R(ρ3 + ρ5 ) [III. xxxv., Ex. 7].

115
 In the same case, if the suffixes be greater than 8,
ρα . ρβ = R(ρα−β − ρ17−α−β ).
For instance, ρ8 ρ2 = R(ρ6 − ρ7 ) [III. xxxv., Ex. 6].
41. Two lines are given in position: draw a transversal through a given point, forming
with the given lines a triangle of given perimeter.
42. Given the vertical angle and perimeter of a triangle, construct it with either of the
following data: 1. The bisector of the vertical angle; 2. the perpendicular from the vertical
angle on the base; 3. the radius of the inscribed circle.
43. In a given circle inscribe a triangle so that two sides may pass through two given
points, and that the third side may be a maximum or a minimum.
44. If s be the semiperimeter of a triangle, r′ , r′′ , r′′′ , the radii of its escribed circles,
r′ r′′ + r′′ r′′′ + r′′′ r′ = s2 .
45. The feet of the perpendiculars from the extremities of the base on either bisector of
the vertical angle, the middle point of the base, and the foot of the perpendicular from the
vertical angle on the base, are concyclic.
46. Given the base of a triangle and the vertical angle; find the locus of the centre of the
circle passing through the centres of the escribed circles.
47. The perpendiculars from the centres of the escribed circles of a triangle on the corre-
sponding sides are concurrent.
48. If AB be the diameter of a circle, and P Q any chord cutting AB in O, and if the lines
AP , AQ intersect the perpendicular to AB at O, in D and E respectively, the points A, B,
D, E are concyclic.
49. If the sides of a triangle be in arithmetical progression, and if R, r be the radii of
the circumscribed and inscribed circles; then 6Rr is equal to the rectangle contained by the
greatest and least sides.
50. Inscribe in a given circle a triangle having its three sides parallel to three given lines.
51. If the sides AB, BC, &c., of a regular pentagon be bisected in the points A′ , B ′ , C ′ ,
D′ , E ′ , and if the two pairs of alternate sides, BC, AE; AB, DE, meet in the points A′′ , E ′′ ,
respectively, prove
△ A′′ AE ′′ − △ A′ AE ′ = pentagon A′ B ′ C ′ D′ E ′ .
52. In a circle, prove that an equilateral inscribed polygon is regular, and also an equilateral
circumscribed polygon, if the number of sides be odd.
53. Prove also that an equiangular circumscribed polygon is regular, and an equiangular
inscribed polygon, if the number of sides be odd.
54. The sum of the perpendiculars drawn to the sides of an equiangular polygon from any
point inside the figure is constant.
55. Express the sides of a triangle in terms of the radii of its escribed circles.

116
 BOOK V.
THEORY OF PROPORTION

DEFINITIONS.

Introduction.—Every proposition in the theories of ratio and proportion is

true for all descriptions of magnitude. Hence it follows that the proper treatment
is the Algebraic. It is, at all events, the easiest and the most satisfactory.
Euclid’s proofs of the propositions, in the Theory of Proportion, possess at
present none but a historical interest, as no student reads them now. But
although his demonstrations are abandoned, his propositions are quoted by
every writer, and his nomenclature is universally adopted. For these reasons
it appears to us that the best method is to state Euclid’s definitions, explain
them, or prove them when necessary, for some are theorems under the guise of
definitions, and then supply simple algebraic proofs of his propositions.
i. A less magnitude is said to be a part or submultiple of a greater magnitude,
when the less measures the greater—that is, when the less is contained a certain
number of times exactly in the greater.
ii. A greater magnitude is said to be a multiple of a less when the greater
is measured by the less—that is, when the greater contains the less a certain
number of times exactly.
iii. Ratio is the mutual relation of two magnitudes of the same kind with
respect to quantity.
iv. Magnitudes are said to have a ratio to one another when the less can be
multiplied so as to exceed the greater.
These definitions require explanation, especially Def. iii., which has the fault
of conveying no precise meaning—being, in fact, unintelligible.
The following annotations will make them explicit:—
1. If an integer be divided into any number
of equal parts, one, or the sum of any number of
these parts, is called a fraction. Thus, if the line AB represent the integer, and if it be divided
into four equal parts in the points C, D, E, then AC is 41 ; AD, 42 ; AE, 34 . Thus, a fraction
is denoted by two numbers parted by a horizontal line; the lower, called the denominator,
denotes the number of equal parts into which the integer is divided; and the upper, called
the numerator, denotes the number of these equal parts which are taken. Hence it follows,
that if the numerator be less than the denominator, the fraction is less than unity. If the
numerator be equal to the denominator, the fraction is equal to unity; and if greater than the
denominator, it is greater than unity. It is evident that a fraction is an abstract quantity—that
is, that its value is independent of the nature of the integer which is divided.
2. If we divide each of the equal parts AC, CD, DE, EB into two equal parts, the whole,
AB, will be divided into eight equal parts; and we see that AC = 28 ; AD = 48 ; AE = 68 ;
AB = 88 ; Now, we saw in 1, that AE = 43 of the integer, and we have just shown that it is
equal to 68 . Hence 43 = 68 ; but 86 would be got from 34 by multiplying its terms (numerator
and denominator) by 2. Hence we infer generally that multiplying the terms of any fraction
by 2 does not alter its value. In like manner it may be shown that multiplying the terms of

117
a fraction by any whole number does not alter its value. Hence it follows conversely, that
dividing the terms of a fraction by a whole number does not alter the value. Hence we have
the following important and fundamental theorem:—Two transformations can be made on
any fraction without changing its value; namely, its terms can be either multiplied or divided
by any whole number, and in either case the value of the new fraction is equal to the value
of the original one.
3. If we take any number, such as 3, and multiply it by any whole number, the product is
called a multiple of 3. Thus 6, 9, 12, 15, &c., are multiples of 3; but 10, 13, 17, &c., are not,
because the multiplication of 3 by any whole number will not produce them. Conversely, 3 is
a submultiple, or measure, or part of 6, 9, 12, 15, &c., because it is contained in each of these
without a remainder; but not of 10, 13, 17, &c., because in each case it leaves a remainder.
4. If we consider two magnitudes of the same
kind, such as two lines AB, CD, and if we sup-
pose that AB is equal to 34 of CD, it is evident, if
AB be divided into 3 equal parts, and CD into 4
equal parts, that one of the parts into which AB
is divided is equal to one of the parts into which
CD is divided. And as there are 3 parts in AB, and 4 in CD, we express this relation by
saying that AB has to CD the ratio of 3 to 4; and we denote it thus, 3 : 4. Hence the ratio
3 : 4 expresses the same idea as the fraction 43 . In fact, both are different ways of expressing
and writing the same thing. When written 3 : 4 it is called a ratio, and when 34 a fraction.
In the same manner it can be shown that every ratio whose terms are commensurable can be
converted into a fraction; and, conversely, every fraction can be turned into a ratio.
From this explanation we see that the ratio of any two commensurable magnitudes is
the same as the ratio of the numerical quantities which denote these magnitudes. Thus, the
ratio of two commensurable lines is the ratio of the numbers which express their lengths,
measured with the same unit. And this may be extended to the case where the lines are
incommensurable. Thus, if a be the side and b the diagonal of a square, the ratio of a : b is
a 1
, or √ .
b 2
When two quantities are incommensurable, such as the diagonal and the side of a square,
although their ratio is not equal to that of any two commensurable numbers, yet a series
of pairs of fractions can be found whose difference is continually diminishing, and which
ultimately becomes indefinitely small; such that the ratio of the incommensurable quantities
is greater than one, and less than the other fraction of each pair. These fractions are called
convergents. By their means we can approximate as nearly as we please to the exact value of
the ratio. In the case of the diagonal and the side of a square, the following are the pairs of
convergents:—
14 15 141 142 1414 1415
, ; , ; , ; &c.,
10 10 100 100 1000 1000
and the ratio is intermediate to each pair. It is evident we may continue the series as far as we
m
please. Now if we denote the first of any of the foregoing pairs of fractions by , the second
n
m+1 m
will be ; and in general, in the case of two incommensurable quantities, two fractions
n n
m+1
and can always be found, where n can be made as large as we please, one of which is less
n
and the other greater than the true value of the ratio. For let a and b be the incommensurable
quantities; then, evidently, we cannot find two multiples na, mb, such that na = mb. In
this case, take any multiple of a, such as na, then this quantity must lie between some two
na
consecutive multiples of b, such as mb, and (m + 1)b; therefore is greater than unity, and
mb
na a m m+1
less than unity. Hence lies between and . Now, since the difference
(m + 1)b b n n
m m+1 1
between and namely, becomes small as n increases, we see that the difference
n n n
between the ratio of two incommensurable quantities and that of two commensurable numbers

118
m and n can be made as small as we please. Hence, ultimately, the ratio of incommensurable
quantities may be regarded as the limit of the ratio of commensurable quantities.
5. The two terms of a ratio are called the antecedent and the consequent. These correspond
to the numerator and the denominator of a fraction. Hence we have the following definition:—
“A ratio is the fraction got by making the antecedent the numerator and the consequent the
denominator.”
6. The reciprocal of a ratio is the ratio obtained by interchanging the antecedent and the
consequent. Thus, 4 : 3 is the reciprocal of the ratio 3 : 4. Hence we have the following
theorem:—“The product of a ratio and its reciprocal is unity.”
7. If we multiply any two numbers, as 5 and 7, by any number such as 4, the products 20,
28 are called equimultiples of 5 and 7. In like manner, 10 and 15 are equimultiples of 2 and
3, and 18 and 30 of 3 and 5, &c.
v. The first of four magnitudes has to the second the same ratio which
the third has to the fourth, when any equimultiples whatsoever of the first and
third being taken, and any equimultiples whatsoever of the second and fourth,
if, according as the multiple of the first is greater than, equal to, or less than
the multiple of the second, the multiple of the third is greater than, equal to,
or less than the multiple of the fourth.
vi. Magnitudes which have the same ratio are called proportionals. When
four magnitudes are proportionals, it is usually expressed by saying, “The first
is to the second as the third is to the fourth.”
viii. Analogy or proportion is the similitude of ratios.
We have given the foregoing definitions in the order of Euclid, as given by Simson, Lardner,
and others;2 but it is evidently an inverted order; for vi. viii. are definitions of proportion,
and v. is only a test of proportion, and is not a definition but a theorem, and one which,
instead of being taken for granted, requires proof. The following explanations will give the
student clear conceptions of their meaning:—
1. If we take two ratios, such as 6 : 9 and 10 : 15, which are each equal to the same thing
(in this example each is equal to 32 ), they are equal to one another (I. Axiom i.). Then we
may write it thus—
6 : 9 = 10 : 15.
This would be the most intelligible way, but it is not the usual one, which is as follows:—
6 : 9 :: 10 : 15. In this form it is called a proportion. Hence a proportion consists of two
ratios which are asserted by it to be equal. Its four terms consist of two antecedents and two
consequents. The 1st and 3rd terms are the antecedents, and the 2nd and 4th the consequents.
Also the first and last terms are called the extremes, and the two middle terms the means.
2. Since a proportion consists of two equal ratios, and each ratio can be written as a
fraction, whenever we have a proportion such as
a : b :: c : d,
we can write it in the form of two equal fractions. Thus:
a c
= .
b d
Conversely, an equation between two fractions can be put into a proportion. By means of
these simple principles all the various properties of proportion can be proved in the most
direct and easy manner.
3. If we take the proportion a : b :: c : d, and multiply the first and third terms, each by
m, and second and fourth, each by n, we get the four multiples, ma, nb, mc, nd; and we want
to prove that if ma is greater than nb, mc is greater than nd; if equal, equal; and if less, less.
Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d,
a c
we have = .
b d
2 Except that viii. is put before vii., because it relates, as v. and vi., to the equality of

ratios, whereas vii. is a test of their inequality.

119
 m
Hence, multiplying each by we get
n
ma mc
= .
nb nd
ma mc ma
Now, it is evident that if is greater than unity, is greater than unity; but if is
nb nd nb
mc
greater than unity, ma is greater than nb; and if is greater than unity, mc is greater than
nd
nd. In like manner, if ma be equal to nb, mc is equal to nd; and if less, less.
The foregoing is an easy proof of the converse of the theorem which is contained in Euclid’s
celebrated Fifth Definition.
Next, to prove Euclid’s theorem—that if, according as the multiple of the first of four
magnitudes is greater than, equal to, or less than the multiple of the second, the multiple of
the third is greater than, equal to, or less than the multiple of the fourth; the ratio of the first
to the second is equal to the ratio of the third to the fourth.
Dem.—Let, a, b, c, d be the four magnitudes. First suppose that a and b are commen-
surable, then it is evident that we can take multiples na, mb, such that na = mb. Hence, by
hypothesis, nc = md. Thus,
na nc
= 1, = 1;
mb md
a c
therefore = .
b d
Next, suppose a and b are incommensurable. Then, as in a recent note, we can find two
na na
numbers m and n, such that is greater than unity, but less than unity. Hence
mb (m + 1)b
a m m+1 na
lies between and . Now, since by hypothesis, when is greater than unity,
b n n mb
nc na nc
is greater than unity; and when is less than unity, is less than unity.
md (m + 1)b (m + 1)d
a m m+1 c
Hence, since lies between and , lies between the same quantities. Therefore
b n n d
a c 1
the difference between and is less than ; and since n may be as large as we please, the
b d n
difference is nothing; therefore
a c
= .
b d
vii. When of the multiples of four magnitudes (taken as in Def. v.) the
multiple of the first is greater than that of the second, but the multiple of the
third not greater than that of the fourth, the first has to the second a greater
ratio than the third has to the fourth.
This, instead of being a definition, is a theorem. We have altered the last clause from
that given in Simson’s Euclid, which runs thus:—“The first is said to have to the second a
greater ratio than the third has to the fourth.” This is misleading, as it implies that it is,
by convention, that the first ratio is greater than the second, whereas, in fact, such is not
the case; for it follows from the hypothesis that the first ratio is greater than the second; and
if it did not, it could not be made so by definition. We have made a similar change in the
enunciation of the Fifth Definition.
Let a, b, c, d be the four magnitudes, and m and n the multiples taken, it is required
to prove, that if ma be greater than nb, but mc not greater than nd, that the ratio a : b is
greater than the ratio c : d.
Dem.—Since ma is greater than nb, but mc not greater than nd, it is evident that
ma mc
is greater than ;
nb nd
a c
therefore is greater than ;
b d
that is, the ratio a : b is greater than the ratio c : d.

120
 ix. Proportion consists of three terms at least.
This has the same fault as some of the others—it is not a definition, but an inference. It
occurs when the means in a proportion are equal, so that, in fact, there are four terms. As
an illustration, let us take the numbers 4, 6, 9. Here the ratio of 4 : 6 is 23 , and the ratio of
6 : 9 is 32 , so that 4, 6, 9 are continued proportionals; but, in reality, there are four terms, for
the full proportion is 4 : 6 :: 6 : 9.
x. When three magnitudes are continual proportionals, the first is said to
have to the third the duplicate ratio of that which it has to the second.
xi. When four magnitudes are continual proportionals, the first is said to
have to the fourth the triplicate ratio of that which it has to the second.
xii. When there is any number of magnitudes of the same kind greater than
two, the first is said to have to the last the ratio compounded of the ratios of
the first to the second, of the second to the third, of the third to the fourth, &c.
We have placed these definitions in a group; but their order is inverted, and, as we shall
see, Def. xii. is a theorem, and x. and xi. are only inferences from it.
1. If we have two ratios, such as 5 : 7 and 3 : 4, and if we convert each ratio into a fraction,
and multiply these fractions together, we get a result which is called the ratio compounded of
the two ratios; viz. in this example it is 1528
, or 15 : 28. It is evident we get the same result if
we multiply the two antecedents together for a new antecedent, and the two consequents for
a new consequent. Hence we have the following definition:—“The ratio compounded of any
number of ratios it the ratio of the product of all the antecedents to the product of all the
consequents.”
2. To prove the theorem contained in Def. xii.
Let the magnitudes be a, b, c, d. Then the ratio of
a
1st : 2nd = ,
b
b
2nd : 3rd = ,
c
c
3rd : 4th = .
d
Hence the ratio compounded of the ratio of 1st : 2nd, of 2nd : 3rd, of 3rd : 4th
abc a
= = = ratio of 1st : 4th.
bcd d
3. If three magnitudes be proportional, the ratio of the 1st : 3rd is equal to the square of
the ratio of the 1st : 2nd. For the ratio of the 1st : 3rd is compounded of the ratio of the 1st :
2nd, and of the ratio of the 2nd : 3rd; and since these ratios are equal, the ratio compounded
of them will be equal to the square of one of them.
Or thus: Let the proportionals be a, b, c, that is, let a : b :: b : c; hence we have
b a
= .
c b
a
And multiplying each by , we get
b
a a2
= 2;
c b
or a : c :: a2 : b2 —that is, 1st : 3rd :: square of 1st : square of 2nd. Now, the ratio of 1st : 3rd
is, by Def. x., the duplicate ratio of 1st : 2nd. Hence the duplicate ratio of two magnitudes
means the square of their ratio, or, what is the same thing, the ratio of their squares (see
Book VI. xx.).
4. If four magnitudes be continual proportionals, the ratio of 1st : 4th is equal to the cube
of the ratio of 1st : 2nd. This may be proved exactly like 3. Hence we see that what Euclid
calls triplicate ratio of two magnitudes is the ratio of their cubes, or the cube of their ratio.

121
 We also see that there is no necessity to introduce extraneous magnitudes for the purpose
of defining duplicate and triplicate ratios, as Euclid does. In fact, the definitions by squares
and cubes are more explicit.
xiii. In proportionals, the antecedent terms are called homologous to one
another; as also the consequents to one another.
If one proportion be given, from it an indefinite number of other proportions can be
inferred, and a great part of the theory of proportion consists in proving the truth of these
derived proportions. Geometers make use of certain technical terms to denote the most
important of these processes. We shall indicate these terms by including them in parentheses
in connexion with the Propositions to which they refer. They are useful as indicating, by one
word, the whole enunciation of a theorem.
Every Proposition in the Fifth Book is a Theorem.

PROP. I.—Theorem.
If any number of magnitudes of the same kind (a, b, c, &c.), be equimultiples
of as many others (a′ , b′ , c′ , &c.), then the sum of the first magnitudes (a + b +
c, &c.) shall be the same multiple of the sum of the second which any magnitude
of the first system is of the corresponding magnitude of the second system.
Dem.—Let m denote the multiple which the magnitudes of the first system
are of those of the second system.
Then we have a = ma′ (hyp.),
b = mb′ ,
c = mc′ .
&c., &c.
Hence, by addition,
(a + b + c + &c.) = m(a′ + b′ + c′ , &c.).

PROP. II.—Theorem.
If two magnitudes of the same kind (a, b) be the same multiples of another
(c) which two corresponding magnitudes (a′ , b′ ) are of another (c′ ), then the
sum of the two first is the same multiple of their submultiple which the sum of
their corresponding magnitudes is of their submultiple.
Dem.—Let m and n be the multiples which a and b are of c.
Then we have
a = mc and a′ = mc′ ,
b = nc and b′ = nc′ .
Therefore
(a + b) = (m + n)c, and (a′ + b′ ) = (m + n)c′ .
Hence a + b is the same multiple of c that a′ + b′ is of c′ .
This Proposition is evidently true for any number of multiples.

122
 PROP. III.—Theorem.
If two magnitudes (a, b) be equimultiples of two others (a′ , b′ ); then any
equimultiples of the first magnitudes (a, b) will be also equimultiples of the second
magnitudes (a′ , b′ ).
Dem.—Let m denote the multiples which a, b are of a′ , b′ ; then we have
a = ma′ , b = mb′ .
Hence, multiplying each equation by n, we get
na = mna′ , nb = mnb′ .
Hence, na, nb are equimultiples of a′ , b′ .

PROP. IV.—Theorem.
If four magnitudes be proportional, and if any equimultiples of the first and
third be taken, and any other equimultiples of the second and fourth; then the
multiple of the first : the multiple of the second :: the multiple of the third : the
multiple of the fourth.
Let a : b :: c : d; then ma : nb :: mc : nd.
Dem.—We have a : b :: c : d (hyp.);
a c
therefore = .
b d
m
Hence, multiplying each fraction by , we get
n
ma mc
= ;
nb nd
therefore ma : nb :: mc : nd.

PROP. V.—Theorem.
If two magnitudes of the same kind (a, b) be the same multiples of another
(c) which two corresponding magnitudes (a′ , b′ ) are of another (c′ ), then the
difference of the two first is the same multiple of their submultiple (c), which the
difference of their corresponding magnitudes is of their submultiple (c′ ) (compare
Proposition ii.).
Dem.—Let m and n be the multiples which a and b are of c.
Then we have a = mc, and a′ = mc′ ,
b = nc, and b′ = nc′ .
Therefore (a − b) = (m − n)c, and (a′ − b′ ) = (m − n)c′ . Hence a − b is the
same multiple of c that a′ − b′ is of c′ .
Cor.—If a − b = c, a′ − b′ = c′ ; for if a − b = c, m − n = 1.

123
 PROP. VI.—Theorem.

If a magnitude (a) be the same multiple of another (b), which a magnitude

(a′ ) taken from the first is of a magnitude (b′ ) taken from the second, the re-
mainder is the same multiple of the remainder that the whole is of the whole
(compare Proposition i.).
Dem.—Let m denote the multiples which the magnitudes a, a′ are of b, b′ ;
then we have

a = mb,
a′ = mb′ .
Hence (a − a′ ) = m(b − b′ ).

Prop. A.—Theorem (Simson).

If two ratios be equal, then according as the antecedent of the first ratio is
greater than, equal to, or less than its consequent, the antecedent of the second
ratio is greater than, equal to, or less than its consequent.
Dem.—Let a : b :: c : d;
a c
then = ;
b d
a c
and if a be greater than b, is greater than unity; therefore is greater than
b d
unity, and c is greater than d.
In like manner, if a be equal to b, c is equal to d, and if less, less.

Prop. B.—Theorem (Simson).

If two ratios are equal their reciprocals are equal (invertendo).

Let a : b :: c : d, then b : a :: d : c.

Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d;
a c
then = ;
b d
a c
therefore 1÷ =1÷ ,
b d
b d
or =
a c
Hence b : a :: d : c.

124
 Prop. C.—Theorem (Simson).
If the first of four magnitudes be the same multiple of the second which the
third is of the fourth, the first is to the second as the third is to the fourth.

Let a = mb, c = md; then a : b :: c : d.

a
Dem.—Since a = mb, we have = m.
b
c a c
In like manner, = m; therefore = .
d b d
Hence a : b :: c : d.

Prop. D.—Theorem (Simson).

If the first be to the second as to the third is to the fourth, and if the first
be a multiple or submultiple of the second, the third is the same multiple or
submultiple of the fourth.
1. Let a : b :: c : d, and let a be a multiple of b, then c is the same multiple
of d.
a
Dem.—Let a = mb, then = m;
b
a c c
but = ; therefore = m, and c = md.
b d d
b a 1
2. Let a = , then = ;
n b n
c 1
therefore = ,
d n
d
Hence c= .
n

PROP. VII.—Theorem.
1. Equal magnitudes have equal ratios to the same magnitude.
2. The same magnitude has equal ratios to equal magnitudes.

Let a and b be equal magnitudes, and c any other magnitude.

Then 1. a : c :: b : c,
2. c : a :: c : b.

Dem.—Since a = b, dividing each by c, we have

a b
= ;
c c
therefore a : c :: b : c.

125
 Again, since a = b, dividing c by each, we have
c c
= ;
a b
therefore c : a :: c : b.
Observation.—2 follows at once from 1 by Proposition B.

PROP. VIII.—Theorem.
1. Of two unequal magnitudes, the greater has a greater ratio to any third
magnitude than the less has; 2. any third magnitude has a greater ratio to the
less of two unequal magnitudes than it has to the greater.
1. Let a be greater than b, and let c be any other magnitude of the same
kind, then the ratio a : c is greater than the ratio b : c.
Dem.—Since a is greater than b, dividing each by c,
a b
is greater than ;
c c
therefore the ratio a : c is greater than the ratio b : c.
2. To prove that the ratio c : b is greater than the ratio c : a.
Dem.—Since b is less than a, the quotient which is the result of dividing
any magnitude by b is greater than the quotient which is got by dividing the
same magnitude by a;
c c
therefore is greater than .
b a
Hence the ratio c : b is greater than the ratio c : a.

PROP. IX.—Theorem.
Magnitudes which have equal ratios to the same magnitude are equal to one
another; 2. magnitudes to which the same magnitude has equal ratios are equal
to one another.

1. If a : c :: b : c, to prove a = b.
Dem.—Since a : c :: b : c,
a b
= .
c c
Hence, multiplying each by c, we get a = b.
2. If c : a :: c : b, to prove a = b.
Dem.—Since c : a :: c : b,
by inversion, a : c :: b : c;
therefore a = b. [1].

126
 PROP. X.—Theorem.

Of two unequal magnitudes, that which has the greater ratio to any third is
the greater of the two; and that to which any third has the greater ratio is the
less of the two.

1. If the ratio a : c be greater than the ratio b : c, to prove a greater than b.

Dem.—Since the ratio a : c is greater than the ratio b : c,
a b
is greater than .
c c
Hence, multiplying each by c, we get a greater than b.
2. If the ratio c : b is greater than the ratio c : a, to prove b is less than a.
Dem.—Since the ratio c : b is greater than the ratio c : a,
c c
is greater than .
b a

c c
Hence 1÷ is less than 1 ÷ ,
b a
b a
that is, is less than .
c c
Hence, multiplying each by c, we get

b less than a.

PROP. XI.—Theorem.
Ratios that are equal to the same ratio are equal to one another.

Let a : b :: e : f , and c : d :: e : f , to prove a : b :: c : d.

Dem.—Since a : b :: e : f ,
a e
= .
b f
c e
In like manner, = .
d f
a c
Hence = [I., Axiom i.],
b d
and a : b :: c : d.

127
 PROP. XII.—Theorem.
If any number of ratios be equal to one another, any one of these equal
ratios is equal to the ratio of the sum of all the antecedents to the sum of all the
consequents.
Let the ratios a : b, c : d, e : f , be all equal to one another; it is required to
prove that any of these ratios is equal to the ratio a + c + e : b + d + f .
Dem.—By hypotheses,
a c e
= = .
b d f
Since these fractions are all equal, let their common value be r; then we have
a c e
= r, = r, = r;
b d f
therefore a = br,
c = dr,
e = fr ;
therefore a + c + e = (b + d + f )r.

a+c+e
Hence = r;
b+d+f
a a+c+e
therefore = ,
b b+d+f
and a : b :: a + c + e : b + d + f.
Cor.—With the same hypotheses, if l, m, n be any three multipliers, a : b ::
la + mc + ne : lb + md + nf .

PROP. XIII.—Theorem.
If two ratios are equal, and if one of them be greater than any third ratio, then
the other is also greater than that third ratio.
If a : b :: c : d, but the ratio of c : d greater than the ratio of e : f ; then the
ratio of a : b is greater than the ratio of e : f .
Dem.—Since the ratio of c : d is greater than the ratio of e : f ,
c e
is greater than .
d f

Again, since a : b :: c : d,
a c
= ;
b d
a e
therefore is greater than .
b f
or the ratio of a : b is greater than the ratio of e : f .

128
 PROP. XIV.—Theorem.

If two ratios be equal, then, according as the antecedent of the first ratio is
greater than, equal to, or less than the antecedent of the second, the consequent
of the first is greater than, equal to, or less than the consequent of the second.
Let a : b :: c : d; then if a be greater than c, b is greater than d; if equal,
equal; if less, less.

Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d.
a c
we have = ,
b d
b
and multiplying each by we get
c
a b c b
× = × ,
b c d c
a b
or = ;
c d
therefore a : c :: b : d.

Hence, Proposition [A], if a be greater than c, b is greater than d; if equal, equal;

and if less, less.

PROP. XV.—Theorem.
Magnitudes have the same ratio which all equimultiples of them have.

Let a, b be two magnitudes, then the ratio a : b is equal to the ratio ma : mb.
a ma
Dem.—The ratio a : b = , and the ratio of ma : mb = ; but since the
b mb
value of a fraction is not altered by multiplying its numerator and denominator
by the same number,
a ma
= ;
b mb
therefore a : b :: ma : mb.

PROP. XVI—Theorem.
If four magnitudes of the same kind be proportionals they are also
proportionals by alternation (alternando).

Let a : b :: c : d, then a : c :: b : d.
Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d,
a c
= ,
b d

129
 b
and multiplying each by , we get
c
a b c b
. = . ,
b c d c
a b
or = ;
c d
therefore a : c :: b : d.

PROP. XVII.—Theorem.

If four magnitudes be proportional, the difference between the first and second
: the second :: the difference between the third and fourth : the fourth (dividendo).
Let a : b :: c : d : then a − b : b :: c − d : d;

Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d,
a c
= ;
b d
a c
therefore − 1 = − 1,
b d
a−b c−d
or = ;
b d
therefore a − b : b :: c − d : d.

PROP. XVIII.—Theorem.
If four magnitudes be proportionals, the sum of the first and second : the
second :: the sum of the third and fourth : the fourth (componendo).

Let a : b :: c : d; then a + b : b :: c + d : d.

Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d,
a c
= ;
b d
a c
therefore + 1 = + 1,
b d
a+b c+d
or = ;
b d
therefore a + b : b :: c + d : d.

130
 PROP. XIX.—Theorem.

If a whole magnitude be to another whole at a magnitude taken from the

first it to a magnitude taken from the second, the first remainder : the second
remainder :: the first whole : the second whole.
Let a : b :: c : d, c and d being less than a and b;
then a − c : b − d :: a : b.

Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d,
then a : c :: b : d [alternando],
and c : a :: d : b [invertendo];
c d
therefore = ,
a b
c d
and 1− =1− ,
a b
a−c b−d
or = .
a b
Hence a − c : b − d :: a : b.

Prop. E.—Theorem (Simson).

If four magnitudes be proportional, the first : its excess above the second :: the
third : its excess above the fourth (convertendo).

Let a : b :: c : d; then a : a − b :: c : c − d.

Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d,
a c
= ;
b d
a−b c−d
therefore = [Dem. of xvii.],
b d
a a−b c c−d
therefore ÷ = ÷ ,
b b d d
a c
or = ,
a−b c−d
therefore a : a − b :: c : c − d.

PROP. XX.—Theorem.

If there be two sets of three magnitudes, which taken two by two in direct
order have equal ratios, then if the first of either set be greater than the third,
the first of the other set is greater than the third; if equal, equal; and if less, less.

131
 Let a, b, c; a′ , b′ , c′ be the two sets of magnitudes, and let the ratio a : b =
a : b′ , and b : c = b′ : c′ ; then, if a be greater than, equal to, or less than c, a′
′

will be greater than, equal to, or less than c′ .

Dem.—Since a : b :: a′ : b′ ,
a a′
we have = ,
b b′
b b′
In like manner, = ′,
c c
a b a′ b′
Hence × = ′ × ′,
b c b c
a a′
or = ′.
c c
Therefore if a be greater than c, a′ is greater than c′ ; if equal, equal; and if
less, less.

PROP. XXI.—Theorem.

If there be two sets of three magnitudes, which taken two by two in transverse
order have equal ratios; then, if the first of either set be greater than the third,
the first of the other set is greater than the third; if equal, equal; and if less, less.
Let a, b, c; a′ , b′ , c′ be the two sets of magnitudes, and let the ratio a : b =
b : c′ , and b : c = a′ : b′ . Then, if a be greater than, equal to, or less than c, a′
′

will be greater than, equal to, or less than c′ .

Dem.—Since a : b :: b′ : c′ ,
a b′
we have = ′.
b c
b a′
In like manner, = ′.
c b
a a′
Hence, multiplying = ′.
c c
Therefore, if a be greater than c, a′ is greater than c′ ; if equal, equal; if less,
less.

PROP. XXII.—Theorem.

If there be two sets of magnitudes, which, taken two by two in direct order,
have equal ratios, then the first : the last of the first set :: the first : the last of
the second set (“ex aequali,” or “ex aequo”).

132
 Let a, b, c; a′ , b′ , c′ be the two sets of magnitudes, and if a : b :: a′ : b′ , and
b : c :: b′ : c′ , then a : c :: a′ : c′ .
Dem.—Since a : b :: a′ : b′ ,
a a′
we have = ′
b b
b b′
In like manner, = ′.
c c
a a′
Hence, multiplying, = ′.
c c
Therefore a : c :: a′ : c′ ,
and similarly for any number of magnitudes in each set.
Cor. 1.—If the ratio b : c be equal to the ratio a : b, then a, b, c will be in
continued proportion, and so will a′ , b′ , c′ . Hence [Def. xii. Annotation 3],
a a2 a′ a′2
= 2 and ′ = ′2 ;
c b c b

a a′
but = ′. [xxii.]
c c
a2 a′2
Therefore = ′2 .
b2 b

Hence, if a : b :: a′ : b′ ,
a2 : b2 :: a′2 : b′2
Or if four magnitudes be proportional, their squares are proportional.
Cor. 2.—If four magnitudes be proportional, their cubes are proportional.

PROP. XXIII.—Theorem.
If there be two sets of magnitudes, which, taken two by two in transverse
order, have equal ratios; then the first : the last of the first set :: the first : the
last of the second set (“ex aequo perturbato”).
Let a, b, c; a′ , b′ , c′ be the two sets of magnitudes, and let the ratio a : b =
b : c′ , and b : c = a′ : b′ ; then a : c :: a′ : c′ .
′

Dem.—Since a : b :: b′ : c′ ,
a b′
we have = ′.
b c
b a′
In like manner, = ′.
c b
a a′
Hence, multiplying, = ′;
c c
therefore a : c :: a′ : c′ ,

133
and similarly for any number of magnitudes in each set.
This Proposition and the preceding one may be included in one enunciation,
thus: “Ratios compounded of equal ratios are equal.”

PROP. XXIV.—Theorem.

If two magnitudes of the same kind (a, b) have to a third magnitude (c)
ratios equal to those which two other magnitudes (a′ , b′ ) have to a third (c′ ),
then the sum (a + b) of the first two has the same ratio to their third (c) which
the sum (a′ + b′ ) of the other two magnitudes has to their third (c′ ).
Dem.—Since a : c :: a′ : c′ ,
a a′
we have = ′.
c c
b b′
In like manner, = ′;
c c
a+b a′ + b′
therefore, adding, = .
c c′
Hence a + b : c :: a′ + b′ : c′ .

PROP. XXV.—Theorem.
If four magnitudes of the same kind be proportionals, the sum of the greatest
and least is greater than the sum of the other two.

Let a : b :: c : d; then, if a be the greatest, d will be the least [xiv. and a].
It is required to prove that a + d is greater than b + c.

Dem.—Since a : b :: c : d,
a : c :: b : d [alternando];
therefore a : a − c :: b : b − d [E].;
but a is greater than b (hyp.),
therefore a − c is greater than b − d [xiv.].
Hence a + d is greater than b + c.

Questions for Examination on Book V.

1. What is the subject-matter of this book?
2. When is one magnitude said to be a multiple of another?
3. What is a submultiple or measure?
4. What are equimultiples?
5. What is the ratio of two commensurable magnitudes?
6. What is meant by the ratio of incommensurable magnitudes?
7. Give an Illustration of the ratio of incommensurables.
8. What are the terms of a ratio called?

134
 9. What is a ratio of greater inequality?
10. What is a ratio of lesser inequality?
11. What is the product of two ratios called? Ans. The ratio compounded of these ratios.
12. What is duplicate ratio?
13. What is Euclid’s definition of duplicate ratio?
14. Give another definition.
15. Define triplicate ratio.
16. What is proportion? Ans. equality of ratios.
17. Give Euclid’s definition of proportion.
18. How many ratios in a proportion?
19. What are the Latin terms in use to denote some of the Propositions of Book V.?
20. When is a line divided harmonically?
21. When a line is divided harmonically, what are corresponding pairs of points called?
Ans. Harmonic conjugates.
22. What are reciprocal ratios?
23. Give one enunciation that will include Propositions xxii., xxiii. of Book V.

Exercises on Book V.
Def. I.—A ratio whose antecedent is greater than its consequent is called a ratio of greater
inequality; and a ratio whose antecedent is less than its consequent, a ratio of lesser inequality.
Def. II.—A right line is said to be cut harmonically when it is divided internally and
externally in any ratios that are equal in magnitude.
1. A ratio of greater inequality is increased by diminishing its terms by the same quantity,
and diminished by increasing its terms by the same quantity.
2. A ratio of lesser inequality is diminished by diminishing its terms by the same quantity,
and increased by increasing its terms by the same quantity.
3. If four magnitudes be proportionals, the sum of the first and second is to their difference
as the sum of the third and fourth is to their difference (componendo et dividendo).
4. If two sets of four magnitudes be proportionals, and if we multiply corresponding terms
together, the products are proportionals.
5. If two sets of four magnitudes be proportionals, and if we divide corresponding terms,
the quotients are proportionals.
6. If four magnitudes be proportionals, their squares, cubes, &c., are proportionals.
7. It two proportions have three terms of one respectively equal to three corresponding
terms of the other, the remaining term of the first is equal to the remaining term of the second.
8. If three magnitudes be continual proportionals, the first is to the third as the square
of the difference between the first and second is to the square of the difference between the
second and third.
9. If a line AB, cut harmonically in C and D, be bisected in O; prove OC, OB, OD are
continual proportionals.
10. In the same case, if O′ be the middle point of CD; prove OO′2 = OB 2 + O′ D2 .
1 1 2
11. And AB(AC + AD) = 2AC . AD, or + = .
AC AD AB
1 1 2
12. And CD(AD + BD) = 2AD . BD, or + = .
BD AD CD
13. And AB . CD = 2AD . CB.

135
 BOOK VI.
APPLICATION OF THE THEORY OF PROPORTION

DEFINITIONS.

i. Similar Rectilineal Figures are those whose several angles are equal, each
to each, and whose sides about the equal angles are proportional.
Similar figures agree in shape; if they agree also in size, they are congruent.
1. When the shape of a figure is given, it is said to be given in species. Thus a triangle
whose angles are given is given in species. Hence similar figures are of the same species.
2. When the size of a figure is given, it is said to be given in magnitude; for instance, a
square whose side is of given length.
3. When the place which a figure occupies is known, it is said to be given in position.
ii. A right line is said to be cut at a point in extreme and mean ratio when
the whole line is to the greater segment as the greater segment is to the less.
iii. If three quantities of the same kind be in continued proportion, the
middle term is called a mean proportional between the other two.
Magnitudes in continued proportion are also said to be in geometrical pro-
gression.
iv. If four quantities of the same kind be in continued proportion, the two
middle terms are called two mean proportionals between the other two.
v. The altitude of any figure is the length of the perpendicular from its
highest point to its base.
vi. Two corresponding angles of two figures have the sides about them
reciprocally proportional, when a side of the first is to a side of the second as
the remaining side of the second is to the remaining side of the first.
This is evidently equivalent to saying that a side of the first is to a side of the second in
the reciprocal ratio of the remaining side of the first to the remaining side of the second.

PROP. I.—Theorem.
Triangles (ABC, ACD) and parallelograms (EC, CF ) which have the same
altitude are to one another as their bases (BC, CD).

Dem.—Produce BD both
ways, and cut off any number of
parts BG, GH, &c., each equal to
CB, and any number DK, KL,
each equal to CD. Join AG, AH,
AK, AL.
Now, since the several bases CB, BG, GH are all equal, the triangles ACB,
ABG, AGH are also all equal [I. xxxviii.]. Therefore the triangle ACH is the
same multiple of ACB that the base CH is of the base CB. In like manner,

136
the triangle ACL is the same multiple of ACD that the base CL is of the base
CD; and it is evident that [I. xxxviii.] if the base HC be greater than CL,
the triangle HAC is greater than CAL; if equal, equal; and if less, less. Now
we have four magnitudes: the base BC is the first, the base CD the second,
the triangle ABC the third, and the triangle ACD the fourth. We have taken
equimultiples of the first and third, namely, the base CH, and the triangle
ACH; also equimultiples of the second and fourth, namely, the base CL, and
the triangle ACL; and we have proved that according as the multiple of the first
is greater than, equal to, or less than the multiple of the second, the multiple
of the third is greater than, equal to, or less than the multiple of the fourth.
Hence [V. Def. v.] the base BC : CD :: the triangle ABC : ACD.
2. The parallelogram EC is double of the triangle ABC [I. xxxiv.], and the
parallelogram CF is double of the triangle ACD. Hence [V. xv.] EC : CF ::
the triangle ABC : ACD; but ABC : ACD :: BC : CD (Part I.). Therefore
[V. xi.] EC : CF :: the base BC : CD.
Or thus: Let A, A′ denote the areas of the triangles ABC, ACD, respectively, and P
their common altitude; then [II. i., Cor. 1],
A= 1
2
P . BC, A′ = 1
2
P . CD.
A BC
Hence = , or A : A′ :: BC : CD.
A′ CD
1
In extending this proof to parallelograms we have only to use P instead of 2
P.

PROP. II.—Theorem.
If a line (DE) be parallel to a side (BC) of a triangle (ABC), it divides
the remaining sides, measured from the opposite angle (A), proportionally; and,
conversely, If two sides of a triangle, measured from an angle, be cut propor-
tionally, the line joining the points of section is parallel to the third side.
1. It is required to prove that AD : DB :: AE : EC.
Dem.—Join BE, CD. The triangles BDE, CED
are on the same base DE, and between the same par-
allels BC, DE. Hence [I. xxxvii.] they are equal, and
therefore [V. vii.] the triangle ADE : BDE :: ADE :
CDE;
but ADE : BDE :: AD : DB [i.],
and ADE : CDE :: AE : EC [i.].
Hence AD : DB :: AE : EC.
2. If AD : DB :: AE : EC, it is required to prove that DE is parallel to BC.
Dem.—Let the same construction be made;
then AD : DB :: the triangle ADE : BDE [i.].
and AE : EC :: the triangle ADE : CDE [i.];
but AD : DB :: AE : EC (hyp.).
Hence ADE : BDE :: ADE : CDE.

137
Therefore [V. ix.] the triangle BDE is equal to CDE, and they are on the same
base DE, and on the same side of it; hence they are between the same parallels
[I. xxxix.]. Therefore DE is parallel to BC.
Observation.—The line DE may cut the sides AB, AC produced through B, C, or through
the angle A; but evidently a separate figure for each of these cases is unnecessary.

Exercise.
If two lines be cut by three or more parallels, the intercepts on one are proportional to
the corresponding intercepts on the other.

PROP. III.—Theorem.

If a line (AD) bisect any angle (A) of a triangle (ABC), it divides the
opposite side (BC) into segments proportional to the adjacent sides. Conversely,
If the segments (BD, DC) into which a line (AD) drawn from any angle (A)
of a triangle divides the opposite side be proportional to the adjacent sides, that
line bisects the angle (A).
Dem.—1. Through C draw CE parallel to AD,
to meet BA produced in E. Because BA meets the
parallels AD, EC, the angle BAD [I. xxix.] is equal
to AEC; and because AC meets the parallels AD,
EC, the angle DAC is equal to ACE; but the angle
BAD is equal to DAC (hyp.); therefore the angle
ACE is equal to AEC; therefore AE is equal to AC
[I. vi.]. Again, because AD is parallel to EC, one of
the sides of the triangle BEC, BD : DC :: BA : AE [ii.]; but AE has been
proved equal to AC. Therefore BD : DC :: BA : AC.
2. If BD : DC :: BA : AC, the angle BAC is bisected.
Dem.—Let the same construction be made.
Because AD is parallel to EC, BA : AE :: BD : DC [ii.]; but BD : DC ::
BA : AC (hyp.). Therefore [V. xi.] BA : AE :: BA : AC, and hence [V. ix.]
AE is equal to AC; therefore the angle AEC is equal to ACE; but AEC is
equal to BAD [I. xxix.], and ACE to DAC; hence BAD is equal to DAC, and
the line AD bisects the angle BAC.

Exercises.
1. If the line AD bisect the external vertical angle
CAE, BA : AC :: BD : DC, and conversely.
Dem.—Cut off AE = AC. Join ED. Then
the triangles ACD, AED are evidently congruent;
therefore the angle EDB is bisected; hence [iii.] BA :
AE :: BD : DE; or BA : AC :: BD : DC.
2. Exercise 1 has been proved by quoting Propo-
sition iii. Prove it independently, and prove iii. as
an inference from it.
3. The internal and the external bisectors of the vertical angle of a triangle divide the
base harmonically (see Definition, p. 191).

138
 4. Any line intersecting the legs of any angle is cut harmonically by the internal and
external bisectors of the angle.
5. Any line intersecting the legs of a right angle is cut harmonically by any two lines
through its vertex which make equal angles with either of its sides.
6. If the base of a triangle be given in magnitude and position, and the ratio of the sides,
the locus of the vertex is a circle which divides the base harmonically in the ratio of the sides.
7. If a, b, c denote the sides of a triangle ABC, and D, D′ the points where the internal
and external bisectors of A meet BC; prove
2abc
DD′ = .
b2 − c2
8. In the same case, if E, E ′ , F , F ′ be points similarly determined on the sides CA, AB,
respectively; prove

1 1 1
+ + = 0,
DD′ EE ′ FF′
a2 b 2 c2
and + + = 0.
DD′ EE ′ FF′

PROP. IV.—Theorem.

The sides about the equal angles of equiangular triangles (BAC, CDE) are
proportional, and those which are opposite to the equal angles are homologous.
Dem.—Let the sides BC, CE, which are op-
posite to the equal angles A and D, be conceived
to be placed so as to form one continuous line,
the triangles being on the same side, and so that
the equal angles BCA, CED may not have a
common vertex.
Now, the sum of the angles ABC, BCA is
less than two right angles; but BCA is equal to
BED (hyp.). Therefore the sum of the angles ABE, BED is less than two
right angles; hence [I., Axiom xii.] the lines AB, ED will meet if produced.
Let them meet in F . Again, because the angle BCA is equal to BEF , the
line CA [I. xxviii.] is parallel to EF . In like manner, BF is parallel to CD;
therefore the figure ACDF is a parallelogram; hence AC is equal to DF , and
CD is equal to AF . Now, because AC is parallel to F E, BA : AF :: BC : CE
[ii.]; but AF is equal to CD, therefore BA : CD :: BC : CE; hence [V. xvi.];
AB : BC :: DC : CE. Again, because CD is parallel to BF , BC : CE :: F D :
DE; but F D is equal to AC, therefore BC : CE :: AC : DE; hence [V. xvi.]
BC : AC :: CE : DE. Therefore we have proved that AB : BC :: DC : CE,
and that BC : CA :: CE : ED. Hence (ex aequali ) AB : AC :: DC : DE.
Therefore the sides about the equal angles are proportional.
This Proposition may also be proved very simply by superposition. Thus (see fig.,
Prop. ii.): let the two triangles be ABC, ADE; let the second triangle ADE be conceived to
be placed on ABC, so that its two sides AD, AE may fall on the sides AB, AC; then, since the
angle ADE is equal to ABC, the side DE is parallel to BC. Hence [ii.] AD : DB :: AE : EC;
hence AD : AB :: AE : AC, and [V. xvi.] AD : AE :: AB : AC. Therefore the sides about
the equal angles BAC, DAE are proportional, and similarly for the others.

139
 It can be proved by this Proposition that two lines which meet at infinity are parallel.
For, let I denote the point at infinity through which the two given lines pass, and draw any
two parallels intersecting them in the points A, B; A′ , B ′ ; then the triangles AIB, A′ IB ′ are
equiangular; therefore AI : AB :: A′ I : A′ B ′ ; but the first term of the proportion is equal
to the third; therefore [V. xiv.] the second term AB is equal to the fourth A′ B ′ , and, being
parallel to it, the lines AA′ , BB ′ [I. xxxiii.] are parallel.

Exercises.
1. If two circles intercept equal chords AB, A′ B ′ on any secant, the tangents AT , A′ T to
the circles at the points of intersection are to one another as the radii of the circles.
2. If two circles intercept on any secant chords that have a given ratio, the tangents to
the circles at the points of intersection have a given ratio, namely, the ratio compounded of
the direct ratio of the radii and the inverse ratio of the chords.
3. Being given a circle and a line, prove that a point may be found, such that the rectangle
of the perpendiculars let fall on the line from the points of intersection of the circle with any
chord through the point shall be given.
4. AB is the diameter of a semicircle ADB; CD a perpendicular to AB; draw through A
a chord AF of the semicircle meeting CD in E, so that the ratio CE : EF may be given.

PROP. V.–Theorem.

If two triangles (ABC, DEF ) have their sides proportional (BA : AC ::

ED : DF ; AC : CB :: DF : F E) they are equiangular, and those angles are
equal which are subtended by the homologous sides.
Dem.—At the points D, E make the
angles EDG, DEG equal to the angles A,
B of the triangle ABC. Then [I. xxxii.]
the triangles ABC, DEG are equiangular.

Therefore BA : AC :: ED : DG [iv.];
but BA : AC :: ED : DF (hyp.).

Therefore DG is equal to DF . In like man-

ner it may be proved that EG is equal to
EF . Hence the triangles EDF , EDG have
the sides ED, DF in one equal to the sides
ED, DG in the other, and the base EF
equal to the base EG. Hence [I. viii.] they are equiangular; but the triangle
DEG is equiangular to ABC. Therefore the triangle DEF is equiangular to
ABC.
Observation.—In VI. Def. i. two conditions are laid down as necessary for the similitude
of rectilineal figures. 1. The equality of angles; 2. The proportionality of sides. Now, from
Propositions iv. and v., we see that if two triangles possess either condition, they also possess
the other. Triangles are unique in this respect. In all other rectilineal figures one of the condi-
tions may exist without the other. Thus, two quadrilaterals may have their sides proportional
without having equal angles, or vice versâ.

140
 PROP. VI.—Theorem.

If two triangles (ABC, DEF ) have one angle (A) in one equal to one angle
(D) in the other, and the sides about these angles proportional (BA : AC ::
ED : DF ), the triangles are equiangular, and have those angles equal which are
opposite to the homologous sides.
Dem.—Make the same construction as in the last Proposition; then the
triangles ABC, DEG are equiangular.

Therefore BA : AC :: ED : DG [iv.];
but BA : AC :: ED : DF (hyp.).

Therefore DG is equal to DF . Again, because the angle EDG is equal to BAC

(const.), and BAC equal to EDF (hyp.), the angle EDG is equal to EDF ; and
it has been proved that DG is equal to DF , and DE is common; hence the
triangles EDG and EDF are equiangular; but EDG is equiangular to BAC.
Therefore EDF is equiangular to BAC.
[It is easy to see, as in the case of Proposition iv., that an immediate proof of this
Proposition can also be got from Proposition ii.].
Cor. 1.—If the ratio of two sides of a triangle be given, and the angle between
them, the triangle is given in species.

PROP. VII.—Theorem.

If two triangles (ABC, DEF ) have one angle (A) one equal to one angle
(D) in the other, the sides about two other angles (B, E) proportional (AB :
BC :: DE : EF ), and the remaining angles (C, F ) of the same species (i. e.
either both acute or both not acute), the triangles are similar.
Dem.—If the angles B and E are not
equal, one must be greater than the other.
Suppose ABC to be the greater, and that
the part ABG is equal to DEF , then the
triangles ABG, DEF have two angles in
one equal to two angles in the other, and
are [I. xxxii.] equiangular.

Therefore AB : BG :: DE : EF [iv.];
but AB : BC :: DE : EF (hyp.).

Therefore BG is equal to BC. Hence the angles BCG, BGC must be each acute
[I. xvii.]; therefore AGB must be obtuse; hence DF E, which is equal to it, is
obtuse; and it has been proved that ACB is acute; therefore the angles ACB,
DF E are of different species; but (hyp.) they are of the same species, which
is absurd. Hence the angles B and E are not unequal, that is, they are equal.
Therefore the triangles are equiangular.

141
 Cor. 1.—If two triangles ABC, DEF have two sides in one proportional to
two sides in the other, AB : BC :: DE : EF , and the angles A, D opposite one
pair of homologous sides equal, the angles C, F opposite the other are either
equal or supplemental. This Proposition is nearly identical with vii.
Cor. 2.—If either of the angles C, F be right, the other must be right.

PROP. VIII.—Theorem.
The triangles (ACD, BCD) into which a right-angled triangle (ACB) is
divided, by the perpendicular (CD) from the right angle (C) on the hypotenuse,
are similar to the whole and to one another.
Dem.—Since the two triangles ADC, ACB have the angle A common, and
the angles ADC, ACB equal, each being right, they are [I. xxxii.] equiangular;
hence [iv.] they are similar. In like manner it may be proved that BDC is
similar to ABC. Hence ADC, CDB are each similar to ACD, and therefore
they are similar to one another.
Cor. 1.—The perpendicular CD is a mean pro-
portional between the segments AD, DB of the hy-
potenuse.
For, since the triangles ADC, CDB are equian-
gular, we have AD : DC :: DC : DB; hence DC is
a mean proportional between AD, DB (Def. iii.).
Cor. 2.—BC is a mean proportional between AB, BD; and AC between
AB, AD.
Cor. 3.—The segments AD, DB are in the duplicate of AC : CB, or in other
words, AD : DB :: AC 2 : CB 2 ,
Cor. 4.—BA : AD in the duplicate ratios of BA : AC; and AB : BD in the
duplicate ratio of AB : BC.

PROP. IX.—Problem.
From a given right line (AB) to cut off any part required (i.e. to cut off any
required submultiple)
.
Sol.—Let it be required, for instance, to cut off the fourth part. Draw AF ,
making any angle with AB, and in AF take any point C, and cut off (I. iii.)
the parts CD, DE, EF each equal to AC. Join BF , and draw CG parallel to
BF . AG is the fourth part of AB.
Dem.—Since CG is parallel to the side BF of
the triangle ABF , AC : AF :: AG : AB [ii.]; but
AC is the fourth part of AF (const.). Hence AG is
the fourth part of AB [V., d.]. In the same manner,
any other required submultiple may be cut off.
Proposition x., Book I., is a particular case of
this Proposition.

142
 PROP. X.—Problem.
To divide a given undivided line (AB) similarly to a given divided line (CD).

Sol.—Draw AG, making any angle with

AB, and cut off the parts AH, HI, IG re-
spectively equal to the parts CE, EF , F D
of the given divided line CD. Join BG, and
draw HK, IL, each parallel to BG. AB will
be divided similarly to CD.
Dem.—Through H draw HN parallel to
AB, cutting IL in M . Now in the triangle
ALI, HK is parallel to IL. Hence [ii.] AK : KL :: AH : HI, that is :: CE :
EF (const.). Again, in the triangle HN G, M I is parallel to N G. Therefore
[ii.] HM : M N :: HI : IG; but [I. xxxiv.] HM is equal to KL, M N is
equal to LB, HI is equal to EF , and IG is equal to F D (const.). Therefore
KL : LB :: EF : F D. Hence the line AB is divided similarly to the line CD.

Exercises.
1. To divide a given line AB internally or externally in the ratio of two given lines, m, n.

Sol.—Through A and B draw any two parallels AC and BD in opposite directions. Cut
off AC = m, and BD = n, and join CD; the joining line will divide AB internally at E in the
ratio of m : n.
2. If BD′ be drawn in the same direction with AC, as denoted by the dotted line, then
CD′ will cut AB externally at E ′ in the ratio of m : n.
Cor.—The two points E, E ′ divide AB harmonically.
This problem is manifestly equivalent to the following:—Given the sum or difference of
two lines and their ratio, to find the lines.
3. Any line AE ′ , through the middle point B of the base DD′ of a triangle DCD′ , is cut
harmonically by the sides of the triangle and a parallel to the base through the vertex.
4. Given the sum of the squares on two lines and their ratio; find the lines.
5. Given the difference of the squares on two lines and their ratio; find the lines.
6. Given the base and ratio of the sides of a triangle; construct it when any of the following
data is given:—1, the area; 2, the difference on the squares of the sides; 3, the sum of the
squares on the sides; 4, the vertical angle; 5, the difference of the base angles.

143
 PROP. XI.—Problem.
To find a third proportional to two given lines (X, Y ).
Sol.—Draw any two lines AC, AE making an angle. Cut off AB equal X,
BC equal Y , and AD equal Y . Join BD, and draw CE parallel to BD, then
DE is the third proportional required.
Dem.—In the triangle CAE,
BD is parallel to CE; therefore AB :
BC :: AD : DE [ii.]; but AB is equal
to X, and BC, AD each equal to Y .
Therefore X : Y :: Y : DE. Hence
DE is a third proportional to X and
Y.
Another solution can be inferred from Proposition viii. For if AD, DC in that Proposition
be respectively equal to X and Y , then DB will be the third proportional. Or again, if in the
diagram, Proposition viii., AD = X, and AC = Y , AB will be the third proportional. Hence
may be inferred a method of continuing the proportion to any number of terms.

Exercises.
1. If AOΩ be a triangle, having the
side AΩ greater than AO; then if we cut off
AB = AO, draw BB ′ parallel to AO, cut
off BC = BB ′ , &c., the series of lines AB,
BC, CD, &c., are in continual proportion.
2. AB − BC : AB :: AB : AΩ. This is
evident by drawing through B ′ a parallel
to AΩ.

PROP. XII.—Problem.
To find a fourth proportional to three given lines (X, Y, Z).
Sol.—Draw any two lines AC,
AE, making an angle; then cut off
AB equal X, BC equal Y , AD
equal Z. Join BD, and draw CE
parallel to BD. DE will be the
fourth proportional required.
Dem.—Since BD is parallel to
CE, we have [ii.] AB : BC :: AD :
DE; therefore X : Y :: Z : DE. Hence DE is a fourth proportional to X, Y ,
Z.
Or thus: Take two lines AD, BC intersecting
in O. Make OA = X, OB = Y , OC = Z, and
describe a circle through the points A, B, C [IV. v.]
cutting AD in D. OD will be the fourth proportional
required.
The demonstration is evident from the similarity
of the triangles AOB and COD.

144
 PROP. XIII.—Problem.
To find a mean proportional between two given lines. (X, Y ).

Sol.—Take on any line

AC parts AB, BC respec-
tively equal to X, Y . On AC
describe a semicircle ADC.
Erect BD at right angles to
AC, meeting the semicircle
in D. BD will be the mean
proportional required.
Dem.—Join AD, DC. Since ADC is a semicircle, the angle ADC is right
[III. xxxi.]. Hence, since ADC is a right-angled triangle, and BD a perpen-
dicular from the right angle on the hypotenuse, BD is a mean proportional
[viii. Cor. 1] between AB, BC; that is, BD is a mean proportional between X
and Y .

Exercises.
1. Another solution may be inferred from Proposition viii., Cor. 2.
2. If through any point within a circle the chord be drawn, which is bisected in that point,
its half is a mean proportional between the segments of any other chord passing through the
same point.
3. The tangent to a circle from any external point is a mean proportional between the
segments of any secant passing through the same point.
4. If through the middle point C of any arc of a circle any secant be drawn cutting the
chord of the arc in D, and the circle again in E, the chord of half the arc is a mean proportional
between CD and CE.
5. If a circle be described touching another circle internally and two parallel chords, the
perpendicular from the centre of the former on the diameter of the latter, which bisects the
chords, is a mean proportional between the two extremes of the three segments into which
the diameter is divided by the chords.
6. If a circle be described touching a semicircle and its diameter, the diameter of the circle
is a harmonic mean between the segments into which the diameter of the semicircle is divided
at the point of contact.
7. State and prove the Proposition corresponding to Ex. 5, for external contact of the
circles.

PROP. XIV.—Theorem.

1. Equiangular parallelograms (AB, CD)

which are equal in area have the sides about
the equal angles reciprocally proportional—
AC : CE :: GC : CB.
2. Equiangular parallelograms which have
the sides about the equal angles reciprocally
proportional are equal in area.
Dem.—Let AC, CE be so placed as to
form one right line, and that the equal angles

145
ACB, ECG may be vertically opposite. Now, since the angle ACB is equal to
ECG, to each add BCE, and we have the sum of the angles ACB, BCE equal
to the sum of the angles ECG, BCE; but the sum of ACB, BCE is [I. xiii.]
two right angles. Therefore the sum of ECG, BCE is two right angles. Hence
[I. xiv.] BC, CG form one right line. Complete the parallelogram BE.
Again, since the parallelograms AB, CD are equal (hyp.),

AB : CF :: CD : CF [V. vii.];
but AB : CF :: AC : CE [i.];
and CD : CF :: GC : CB [i.];
therefore AC : CE :: GC : CB;

that is, the sides about the equal angles are reciprocally proportional.
2. Let AC : CE :: GC : CB, to prove the parallelograms AB, CD are equal.
Dem.—Let the same construction be made, we have

AB : CF :: AC : CE [i.];
and CD : CF :: GC : CB [i.];
but AC : CE :: GC : CB (hyp.).
Therefore AB : CF :: CD : CF.
Hence AB = CD [V. ix.];

that is, the parallelograms are equal.

Or thus: Join HE, BE, HD, BD. The HC = twice the △ HBE, and the CD =
twice the △ BDE. Therefore the △ HBE = BDE, and [I. xxxix.] HD is parallel to BE.
Hence
HB : BF :: DE : EF ; that is, AC : CE :: GC : CB.
2. May be proved by reversing this demonstration.
Another demonstration of this Proposition may be got by producing the lines HA and
DG to meet in I. Then [I. xliii.] the points I, C, F are collinear, and the Proposition is
evident.

PROP. XV.—Theorem.

1. Two triangles equal in area (ACB, DCE),

which have one angle (C) in one equal to one angle
(C) in the other, have the sides about these angles re-
ciprocally proportional.
2. Two triangles, which have one angle in one equal
to one angle in the other, and the sides about these an-
gles reciprocally proportional, are equal in area.
Dem.—1. Let the equal angles be so placed as to
be vertically opposite, and that AC, CD may form one right line; then it may
be demonstrated, as in the last Proposition, that BC, CE form one right line.
Join BD.

146
 Now since the triangles ACB, DCE are equal,

ACB : BCD :: DCE : BCD [V. vii.];

but ACB : BCD :: AC : CD [i.],
and DCE : BCD :: EC : CB [i.].
Therefore AC : CD :: EC : CB;

that is, the sides about the equal angles are reciprocally proportional.
2. If AC : CD :: EC : CB, to prove the triangle ACB equal to DCE.
Dem.—Let the same construction be made, then we have

AC : CD :: triangle ACB : BCD [i.],

and EC : CB :: triangle DCE : BCD [i.];
but AC : CD :: EC : CB (hyp.).

Therefore the triangle

ACB : BCD :: DCE : BCD.

Hence the triangle ACB = DCE [V. ix.]—that is, the triangles are equal.
This Proposition might have been appended as a Cor. to the preceding, since the triangles
are the halves of equiangular parallelograms, or it may be proved by joining AE, and showing
that it is parallel to BD.

PROP. XVI.—Theorem.

1. If four right lines (AB, CD, E, F ) be proportional, the rectangle (AB . F )

contained by the extremes is equal to the rectangle (CD . E) contained by the
means.
2. If the rectangle contained by the extremes of four right lines be equal to
the rectangle contained by the means, the four lines are proportional.
Dem.—1. Erect AH, CI at right
angles to AB and CD, and equal
to F and E respectively, and com-
plete the rectangles. Then because
AB : CD :: E : F (hyp.), and that E
is equal to CI, and F to AH (const.),
we have AB : CD :: CI : AH.
Hence the parallelograms AG, CK
are equiangular, and have the sides
about their equal angles reciprocally proportional. Therefore they are [xiv.]
equal; but since AH is equal to F , AG is equal to the rectangle AB . F . In like
manner, CK is equal to the rectangle CD . E. Hence AB . F = CD . E; that
is, the rectangle contained by the extremes is equal to the rectangle contained by
the means.

147
 2. If AB . F = CD . E, to prove AB : CD :: E : F .
The same construction being made, because AB . F = CD . E, and that
F is equal to AH, and E to CI, we have the parallelogram AG = CK; and
since these parallelograms are equiangular, the sides about their equal angles
are reciprocally proportional. Therefore

AB : CD :: CI : AH; that is, AB : CD :: E : F.

Or thus: Place the four lines in a concurrent position so
that the extremes may form one continuous line, and the means
another. Let the four lines so placed be AO, BO, OD, OC.
Join AB, CD. Then because AO : OB :: OD : OC, and the
angle AOB = DOC, the triangles AOB, COD are equiangular.
Hence the four points A, B, C, D are concyclic. Therefore
[III. xxxv.] AO . OC = BO . OD.

PROP. XVII.—Theorem

1. If three right lines (A, B, C) be proportional, the rectangle (A . C) con-

tained by the extremes is equal to the square (B 2 ) of the mean.
2. If the rectangle contained by the extremes of three right lines be equal to
the square of the mean, the three lines are proportional.
Dem.—1. Assume a line D = B; then because
A : B :: B : C, we have A : B :: D : C. Therefore
[xvi.] AC = BD; but BD = B 2 . Therefore AC =
B 2 ; that is, the rectangle contained by the extremes
is equal to the square of the mean.
2. The same construction being made, since
AC = B 2 , we have A . C = B . D; therefore A : B :: D : C; but D = B. Hence
A : B :: B : C; that is, the three lines are proportionals.
This Proposition may be inferred as a Cor. to the last, which is one of the fundamental
Propositions in Mathematics.

Exercises.
1. If a line CD bisect the vertical angle C of any triangle
ACB, its square added to the rectangle AD . DB contained by
the segments of the base is equal to the rectangle contained by
the sides.
Dem.—Describe a circle about the triangle, and produce
CD to meet it in E; then it is easy to see that the triangles
ACD, ECB are equiangular. Hence [iv.] AC : CD :: CE : CB;
therefore AC . CB = CE . CD = CD2 + CD . DE = CD2 +
AD . DB [III. xxxv.].
2. If the line CD′ bisect the external vertical angle of any tri-
angle ACB, its square subtracted from the rectangle AD′ . D′ B
is equal to AC . CB.
3. The rectangle contained by the diameter of the circumscribed circle, and the radius of
the inscribed circle of any triangle, is equal to the rectangle contained by the segments of any
chord of the circumscribed circle passing through the centre of the inscribed.

148
 Dem.—Let O be the centre of the inscribed circle. Join OB (see foregoing fig.); let fall
the perpendicular OG, draw the diameter EF of the circumscribed circle. Now the angle
ABE = ECB [III. xxvii.], and ABO = OBC; therefore EBO = sum of OCB, OBC = EOB.
Hence EB = EO. Again, the triangles EBF , OGC are equiangular, because EF B, ECB
are equal, and EBF , OGC are each right. Therefore, EF : EB :: OC : OG; therefore
EF . OG = EB . OC = EO . OC.
4. Ex. 3 may be extended to each of the escribed circles of the triangle ACB.

5. The rectangle contained by two sides of a triangle is equal to the rectangle contained by
the perpendicular and the diameter of the circumscribed circle. For, let CE be the diameter.
Join AE. Then the triangles ACE, DCB are equiangular; hence AC : CE :: CD : CB;
therefore AC . CB = CD . CE.
6. If a circle passing through one of the angles A of a
parallelogram ABCD intersect the two sides AB, AD again
in the points E, G and the diagonal AC again in F ; then
AB . AE + AD . AG = AC . AF .
Dem.—Join EF , F G, and make the angle ABH =
AF E. Then the triangles ABH, AF E are equiangular.
Therefore AB : AH :: AF : AE. Hence AB . AE =
AF . AH. Again, it is easy to see that the triangles BCH,
F AG are equiangular; therefore BC : CH :: AF : AG; hence
BC . AG = AF . CH, or AD . AG = AF . CH; but we have
proved AB . AE = AF . AH. Hence AD . AG + AB . AE =
AF . AC.
7. If DE, DF be parallels to the sides of a triangle ABC
from any point D in the base, then AB . AE + AC . AF = AD2 + BD . DC. This is an easy
deduction from 6.
8. If through a point O within a triangle ABC
parallels EF , GH, IK to the sides be drawn, the
sum of the rectangles of their segments is equal
to the rectangle contained by the segments of any
chord of the circumscribing circle passing through
O.
Dem.—AO . AL = AB . AK + AC . AE. (6)
2
But AO = AG . AK + AH . AE − GO . OH. (7)
Hence AO . OL = BG . AK + CH . AE + GO . OH,
or AO . OL = EO . OF + IO . OK + GO . OH.
9. The rectangle contained by the side of an inscribed
square standing on the base of a triangle, and the sum of
the base and altitude, is equal to twice the area of the triangle.
10. The rectangle contained by the side of an escribed square standing on the base of a
triangle, and the difference between the base and altitude, is equal to twice the area of the
triangle.

149
 11. If from any point P in the circumference of a circle a perpendicular be drawn to any
chord, its square is equal to the rectangle contained by the perpendiculars from the extremities
of the chord on the tangent at P .
12. If O be the point of intersection of the diagonals of a cyclic quadrilateral ABCD, the
four rectangles AB . BC, BD . CD, CD . DA, DA . AB, are proportional to the four lines BO,
CO, DO, AO.
13. The sum of the rectangles of the opposite sides of a
cyclic quadrilateral ABCD is equal to the rectangle contained
by its diagonals.
Dem.—Make the angle DAO = CAB; then the triangles
DAO, CAB are equiangular; therefore AD : DO :: AC : CB;
therefore AD . BC = AC . DO. Again, the triangles DAC,
OAB are equiangular, and CD : AC :: BO : AB; therefore
AC . CD = AC . BO. Hence AD . BC +AB . CD = AC . BD.3
14. If the quadrilateral ABCD is not cyclic, prove that the
three rectangles AB . CD, BC . AD, AC . BD are proportional
to the three sides of a triangle which has an angle equal to
the sum of a pair of opposite angles of the quadrilateral.
15. Prove by using Theorem 11 that if perpendiculars be let fall on the sides and diagonals
of a cyclic quadrilateral, from any point in the circumference of the circumscribed circle, the
rectangle contained by the perpendiculars on the diagonals is equal to the rectangle contained
by the perpendiculars on either pair of opposite sides.
16. If AB be the diameter of a semicircle, and P A, P B chords from any point P in the
circumference, and if a perpendicular to AB from any point C meet P A, P B in D and E,
and the semicircle in F , CF is a mean proportional between CD and CE.

PROP. XVIII.—Problem.

On a given right line (AB) to construct a rectilineal figure similar to a given

one (CDEF G), and similarly placed as regards any side (CD) of the latter.
Def.—Similar figures are said to be similarly described upon given right
lines, when these lines are homologous sides of the figures.

Sol.—Join CE, CF , and construct a triangle ABH on AB equiangular to

CDE, and similarly placed as regards CD; that is, make, the angle ABH equal
to CDE, and BAH equal to DCE. In like manner construct the triangle HAI
3 This Proposition is known as Ptolemy’s theorem.

150
equiangular to ECF , and similarly placed, and lastly, the triangle IAJ equian-
gular and similarly placed with F CG. Then ABHIJ is the figure required.
Dem.—From the construction it is evident that the figures are equiangu-
lar, and it is only required to prove that the sides about the equal angles
are proportional. Now because the triangle ABH is equiangular to CDE,
AB : BH :: CD : DE [iv.]; hence the sides about the equal angles B and D are
proportional. Again, from the same triangles we have BH : HA :: DE : EC,
and from the triangles IHA, F EC; HA : HI :: EC : EF ; therefore (ex æquali )
BH : HI :: DE : EF ; that is, the sides about the equal angles BHI, DEF are
proportional, and so in like manner are the sides about the other equal angles.
Hence (Def. i.) the figures are similar.
Observation.—In the foregoing construction, the line AB is homologous to CD, and it is
evident that we may take AB to be homologous to any other side of the given figure CDEF G.
Again, in each case, it the figure ABHIJ be turned round the line AB until it falls on the
other side, it will still be similar to the figure CDEF G. Hence on a given line AB there can
be constructed two figures each similar to a given figure CDEF G, and having the given line
AB homologous to any given side CD of the given figure.
The first of the figures thus constructed is said to be directly similar, and the second
inversely similar to the given figure. These technical terms are due to Hamilton: see “Elements
of Quaternions,” page 112.
Cor. 1.—Twice as many polygons may be constructed on AB similar to a
given polygon CDEF G as that figure has sides.
Cor. 2.—If the figure ABHIJ be applied to CDEF G so that the point A
will coincide with C, and that the line AB may be placed along CD, then the
points H, I, J will be respectively on the lines CE, CF , CG; also the sides BH,
HI, IJ of the one polygon will be respectively parallel to their homologous sides
DE, EF , F G of the other.
Cor. 3.—If lines drawn from any point O in the plane of a figure to all
its angular points be divided in the same ratio, the lines joining the points of
division will form a new figure similar to, and having every side parallel to, the
homologous side of the original.

PROP. XIX.—Theorem.
Similar triangles (ABC, DEF ) have their areas to one another in the
duplicate ratio of their homologous sides.

Dem.—Take BG a third propor-

tional to BC, EF [xi.]. Join AG.
Then because the triangles ABC,
DEF are similar, AB : BC :: DE :
EF ; hence (alternately) AB : DE ::
BC : EF ; but BC : EF :: EF : BG
(const.); therefore [V. xi.] AB :
DE :: EF : BG; hence the sides of
the triangles ABG, DEF about the
equal angles B, E are reciprocally proportional; therefore the triangles are equal.

151
Again, since the lines BC, EF , BG are continual proportionals, BC : BG in the
duplicate ratio of BC : EF [V. Def. x.]; but BC : BG :: triangle ABC : ABG.
Therefore ABC : ABG in the duplicate ratio of BC : EF ; but it has been
proved that the triangle ABG is equal to DEF . Therefore the triangle ABC is
to the triangle DEF in the duplicate ratio of BC : EF .
This is the first Proposition in Euclid in which the technical term “duplicate
ratio” occurs. My experience with pupils is, that they find it very difficult to
understand either Euclid’s proof or his definition. On this account I submit the
following alternative proof, which, however, makes use of a new definition of the
duplicate ratio of two lines, viz. the ratio of the squares (see Annotations on
V. Def. x.) described on these lines.
On AB and DE describe squares, and through C and F draw lines parallel
to AB and DE, and complete the rectangles AI, DN .
Now, the triangles JAC, ODF are evidently equiangular.

Hence JA : AC :: OD : DF [iv.];
but AC : AB :: DF : DE [iv.].
Hence JA : AB :: OD : DE (ex æquali );
but AB = AG, and DE = DL;
therefore JA : AG :: OD : DL.
Again, JA : AG :: AI : square AH [i.],
and OD : DL :: DN : square DM [i.].
Hence AI : AH :: DN : DM ;
therefore AI : DN :: AH : DM [V. xvi.];
hence △ABC : △DEF :: AB 2 : DE 2 .

152
 Exercises.
1. If one of two similar triangles has its sides 50 per cent. longer than the homologous
sides of the other; what is the ratio of their areas?
2. When the inscribed and circumscribed regular polygons of any common number of sides
to a circle have more than four sides, the difference of their areas is less than the square of
the side of the inscribed polygon.

PROP. XX.—Theorem.
Similar polygons may be divided (1) into the same number of similar trian-
gles; (2) the corresponding triangles have the same ratio to one another which
the polygons have; (3) the polygons are to each other in the duplicate ratio of
their homologous sides.
Dem.—Let ABHIJ, CDEF G be the polygons, and let the sides AB, CD
be homologous. Join AH, AI, CE, CF .

1. The triangles into which the polygons are divided are similar. For, since
the polygons are similar, they are equiangular, and have the sides about their
equal angles proportional [Def. i.]; hence the angle B is equal to D, and AB :
BH :: CD : DE; therefore [vi.] the triangle ABH is equiangular to CDE;
hence the angle BHA is equal to DEC; but BHI is equal to DEF (hyp.);
therefore the angle AHI is equal to CEF . Again, because the polygons are
similar, IH : HB :: F E : ED; and since the triangles ABH, CDE are similar,
HB : HA :: ED : EC; hence (ex aequali ) IH : HA :: F E : EC, and the angle
IHA has been proved to be equal to the angle F EC; therefore the triangles
IHA, F EC are equiangular. In the same manner it can be proved that the
remaining triangles are equiangular.
2. Since the triangle ABH is similar to CDE, we have [xix.].
ABH : CDE in the duplicate ratio of AH : CE.
In like manner,
AHI : CEF in the duplicate ratio of AH : CE;
hence ABH : CDE = AHI : CEF [V. xi.].
Similarly, AHI : CEF = AIJ : CF G.

153
In these equal ratios, the triangles ABH, AHI, AIJ are the antecedents, and
the triangles CDE, CEF , CF G the consequents, and [V. xii.] any one of these
equal ratios is equal to the ratio of the sum of all the antecedents to the sum
of all the consequents; therefore the triangle ABH : the triangle CDE :: the
polygon ABHIJ : the polygon CDEF G.
3. The triangle ABH : CDE in the duplicate ratio of AB : CD [xix.].
Hence (2) the polygon ABHIJ : the polygon CDEF G in the duplicate ratio of
AB : CD.
Cor. 1.—The perimeters of similar polygons are to one another in the ratio
of their homologous sides.
Cor. 2.—As squares are similar polygons, therefore the duplicate ratio of
two lines is equal to the ratio of the squares described on them (compare An-
notations, V. Def. x.).
Cor. 3.—Similar portions of similar figures bear the same ratio to each other
as the wholes of the figures.
Cor. 4.—Similar portions of the perimeters of similar figures are to each
other in the ratio of the whole perimeters.

Exercises.

Def. i.—Homologous points in the planes of two similar figures are such, that
lines drawn from them to the angular points of the two figures are proportional
to the homologous sides of the two figures.
1. If two figures be similar, to each
point in the plane of one there will be a
corresponding point in the plane of the
other.
Dem.—Let ABCD, A′ B ′ C ′ D′ be
the two figures, P a point in the plane
of ABCD. Join AP , BP , and con-
struct a triangle A′ P ′ B ′ on A′ B ′ , sim-
ilar to AP B; then it is easy to see that
lines from P ′ to the angular points of
A′ B ′ C ′ D′ are proportional to the lines
from P to the angular points of ABCD.
2. If two figures be directly similar, and
in the same plane, there is in the plane a spe-
cial point which, regarded as belonging to ei-
ther figure, is its own homologous point with
respect to the other. For, let AB, A′ B ′ be
two homologous sides of the figures, C their
point of intersection. Through the two triads
of points A, A′ , C; B, B ′ , C describe two cir-
cles intersecting again in the point O: O will
be the point required. For it is evident that
the triangles OAB, OA′ B ′ are similar and
that either may be turned round the point
O, so that the two bases, AB, A′ B ′ , will be parallel.
Def. ii.—The point O is called the centre of similitude of the figures. It is
also called their double point.
3. Two regular polygons of n sides each have n centres of similitude.

154
 4. If any number of similar triangles have their corresponding vertices lying on three given
lines, they have a common centre of similitude.
5. If two figures be directly similar, and have a pair of homologous sides parallel, every
pair of homologous sides will be parallel.
Def. iii.—Two figures, such as those in 5, are said to be homothetic.
6. If two figures be homothetic, the lines joining corresponding angular points are concur-
rent, and the point of concurrence is the centre of similitude of the figures.
7. If two polygons be directly similar, either may be turned round their centre of similitude
until they become homothetic, and this may be done in two different ways.
8. Two circles are similar figures.
Dem.—Let O, O′ be
their centres; let the angle
AOB be indefinitely small,
so that the arc AB may
be regarded as a right line;
make the angle A′ O′ B ′
equal to AOB; then the tri-
angles AOB, A′ O′ B ′ are
similar.
Again, make the an-
gle BOC indefinitely small,
and make B ′ O′ C ′ equal to
it; the triangles BOC, B ′ O′ C ′ are similar. Proceeding in this way, we see that the circles can
be divided into the same number of similar elementary triangles. Hence the circles are similar
figures.
9. Sectors of circles having equal central angles are similar figures.
10. As any two points of two circles may be regarded as homologous, two circles have
in consequence an infinite number of centres of similitude; their locus is the circle, whose
diameter is the line joining the two points for which the two circles are homothetic.
11. The areas of circles are to one another as the squares of their diameters. For they are
to one another as the similar elementary triangles into which they are divided, and these are
as the squares of the radii.
12. The circumferences of circles are as their diameters (Cor. 1).
13. The circumference of sectors having equal central angles are proportional to their radii.
Hence if a, a′ denote the arcs of two sectors, which subtend equal angles at the centres, and
a a′
if r, r′ be their radii, = ′.
r r
14. The area of a circle is equal to half the rectangle contained by the circumference and
the radius. This is evident by dividing the circle into elementary triangles, as in Ex. 8.
15. The area of a sector of a circle is equal to half the rectangle contained by the arc of
the sector and the radius of the circle.

PROP. XXI.—Theorem.
Rectilineal figures (A, B), which are similar to the same figure (C), are
similar to one another.

Dem.—Since the figures A and C are similar, they are equiangular, and
have the sides about their equal angles proportional. In like manner B and
C are equiangular, and have the sides about their equal angles proportional.
Hence A and B are equiangular, and have the sides about their equal angles
proportional. Therefore they are similar.

155
 Cor.—Two similar rectilineal figures which are homothetic to a third are
homothetic to one another.
Exercise.
If three similar rectilineal figures be homothetic, two by two, their three centres of simili-
tudes are collinear.

PROP. XXII—Theorem.
If four lines (AB, CD, EF, GH) be proportional, and any pair of similar
rectilineal figures (ABK, CDL) be similarly described on the first and second,
and also any pair (EI, GJ) on the third and fourth, these figures are propor-
tional. Conversely, if any rectilineal figure described on the first of four right
lines: the similar and similarly described figure described on the second :: any
rectilineal figure on the third : the similar and similarly described figure on the
fourth, the four lines are proportional.

Dem. 1.—ABK : CDL :: AB 2 : CD2 . [xx.];

and EI : GJ :: EF 2 : GH 2 [xx.].
But since AB : CD :: EF : GH,
AB 2 : CD2 :: EF 2 : GH 2 [V. xxii., Cor. 1];
therefore ABK : CDL :: EI : GJ.
If ABK : CDL :: EI : GJ, AB : CD :: EF : GH.
Dem. 2.—ABK : CDL :: AB 2 : CD2 [xx.],
2 2
and EI : GJ :: EF : GH [xx.];
2 2 2 2
therefore AB : CD :: EF : GH .
Hence AB : CD :: EF : GH.

156
 The enunciation of this Proposition is wrongly stated in Simson’s Euclid,
and in those that copy it. As given in those works, the four figures should be
similar.

PROP. XXIII.—Theorem.
Equiangular parallelograms (AD, CG) are to each other as the rectangles
contained by their sides about a pair of equal angles.
Dem.—Let the two sides AB, BC about the
equal angles ABD, CBG, be placed so as to form
one right line; then it is evident, as in Prop. xiv.,
that GB, BD form one right line. Complete the
parallelogram BF . Now, denoting the parallelo-
grams AB, BF , CG by X, Y , Z, respectively, we
have—
X : Y :: AB : BC [i.],
Y : Z :: BD : BG [i.].
Hence XY : Y Z :: AB . BD : BC . BG;
or X : Z :: AB . BD : BC . BG.
Observation.—Since AB . BD : BC . BG is compounded of the two ratios AB : BC and
BD : BG [V. Def. of compound ratio], the enunciation is the same as if we said, “in the ratio
compounded of the ratios of the sides,” which is Euclid’s; but it is more easily understood as
we have put it.

Exercises.
1. Triangles which have one angle of one equal or supplemental to one angle of the other,
are to one another in the ratio of the rectangles of the sides about those angles.
2. Two quadrilaterals whose diagonals intersect at equal angles are to one another in the
ratio of the rectangles of the diagonals.

PROP. XXIV.—Theorem.
In any parallelogram (AC), every two parallelograms (AF, F C) which are
about a diagonal are similar to the whole and to one another.
Dem.—Since the parallelograms AC, AF have a com-
mon angle, they are equiangular [I. xxxiv.], and all that
is required to be proved is, that the sides about the equal
angles are proportional. Now, since the lines EF , BC are
parallel, the triangles AEF , ABC are equiangular; there-
fore [iv.] AE : EF :: AB : BC, and the other sides of the
parallelograms are equal to AE, EF ; AB, BC: hence the
sides about the equal angles are proportional; therefore the
parallelograms AF , AC are similar. In the same manner the parallelograms AF ,
F C are similar.
Cor.—The parallelograms AF , F C, AC are, two by two, homothetic.

157
 PROP. XXV.—Problem.
To describe a rectilineal figure equal to a given one (A), and similar to another
given one (BCD).
Sol.—On any side BC of the figure BCD describe the rectangle BE equal to
BCD [I. xlv.], and on CE describe the rectangle EF equal to A. Between BC,
CF find a mean proportional GH, and on it describe the figure GHI similar
to BCD [xviii.], so that BC and GH may be homologous sides. GHI is the
figure required.

Dem.—The three lines BC, GH, CF are in continued proportion; therefore

BC : CF in the duplicate ratio of BC : GH [V. Def. x.]; and since the figures
BCD, GHI are similar, BCD : GHI in the duplicate ratio of BC : GH [xx.];
also BC : CF :: rectangle BE : rectangle EF . Hence rectangle BE : EF ::
figure BCD : GHI; but the rectangle BE is equal to the figure BCD; therefore
the rectangle EF is equal to the figure GHI; but EF is equal to A (const.).
Therefore the figure GHI is equal to A, and it is similar to BCD. Hence it is
the figure required.

158
 Or thus: Describe the squares EF JK, LM N O equal to the figures BCD and A respec-
tively [II. xiv.]; then find GH a fourth proportional to EF , LM , and BC [xii.]. On GH
describe the rectilineal figure GHI similar to the figure BCD [xviii.], so that BC and GH
may be homologous sides. GHI is the figure required.
Dem.—Because EF : LM :: BC : GH (const.), the figure EF JK : LM N O :: BCD :
GHI [xxii.]; but EF JK is equal to BCD (const.); therefore LM N O is equal to GHI; but
LM N O is equal to A (const.). Therefore GHI is equal to A, and it is similar to BCD.

PROP. XXVI.—Theorem.
If two similar and similarly situated parallelograms (AEF G, ABCD) have a
common angle, they are about the same diagonal.

Dem.—Draw the diagonals (see fig., Prop. xxiv.) AF , AC. Then because
the parallelograms AEF G, ABCD are similar figures, they can be divided into
the same number of similar triangles [xx.]. Hence the triangle F AG is similar
to CAD, and therefore the angle F AG is equal to the angle CAD. Hence the
line AC must pass through the point F , and therefore the parallelograms are
about the same diagonal.
Observation.—Proposition xxvi., being the converse of xxiv., has evidently been mis-
placed. The following would be a simpler enunciation:—“If two homothetic parallelograms
have a common angle, they are about the same diagonal.”

PROP. XXVII—Problem.
To inscribe in a given triangle (ABC) the maximum parallelogram having a
common angle (B) with the triangle.

Sol.—Bisect the side AC opposite to the angle B, at P : through P draw

P E, P F parallel to the other sides of the triangle. BP is the parallelogram
required.
Dem.—Take any other point D in AC :
draw DG, DH parallel to the sides, and CK
parallel to AB; produce EP , GD to meet CK
in K and J, and produce HD to meet P K
in I.
Now, since AC is bisected in P , EK is
also bisected in P ; hence [I. xxxvi.] the par-
allelogram EO is equal to OK; therefore EO
is greater than DK; but DK is equal to F D [I. xliii.]; hence EO is greater
than F D. To each add BO, and we have the parallelogram BP greater than
BD. Hence BP is the maximum parallelogram which can be inscribed in the
given triangle.
Cor. 1.—The maximum parallelogram exceeds any other parallelogram ab-
out the same angle in the triangle, by the area of the similar parallelogram
whose diagonal is the line between the middle point P of the opposite side and
the point D, which is the corner of the other inscribed parallelogram.

159
 Cor. 2.—The parallelograms inscribed in a triangle, and having one angle
common with it, are proportional to the rectangles contained by the segments
of the sides of the triangle, made by the opposite corners of the parallelograms.
Cor. 3.—The parallelogram AC : GH :: AC 2 : AD . DC.

PROP. XXVIII.—Problem.

To inscribe in a given triangle (ABC) a parallelogram equal to a given rec-

tilineal figure (X) not greater than the maximum inscribed parallelogram, and
having an angle (B) common with the triangle.
Sol.—Bisect the side AC opposite to B, at P . Draw P F , P E parallel to the
sides AB, BC; then [xxvii.] BP is the maximum parallelogram that can be
inscribed in the triangle ABC; and if X be equal to it, the problem is solved. If
not, produce EP , and draw CJ parallel to P F ; then describe the parallelogram
KLM N [xxv.] equal to the difference between the figure P JCF and X, and
similar to P JCF , and so that the sides P J and KL will be homologous; then
cut off P I equal to KL; draw IH parallel to AB, cutting AC in D, and draw
DG parallel to BC. BD is the parallelogram required.

Dem.—Since the parallelograms P C, P D are about the same diagonal, they

are similar [xxiv.]; but P C is similar to KP T (const.); therefore P D is similar
to KN , and (const.) their homologous sides, P I and KL, are equal; hence [xx.]
P D is equal to KN . Now, P D is the difference between EF and GH [xxvii.
Cor. 1], and KN is (const.) the difference between P C and X; therefore the
difference between P C and X is equal to the difference between EF and GH;
but EF is equal to P C. Hence GH is equal to X.

PROP. XXIX.—Problem.

To escribe to a given triangle (ABC) a parallelogram equal to a given rec-

tilineal figure (X), and having an angle common with an external angle (B) of
the triangle.

160
 Sol.—The construction is the same as the last, except that, instead of mak-
ing the parallelogram KN equal to the excess of the parallelogram P C over the
rectilineal figure X, we make it equal to their sum; and then make P I equal to
KL; draw IH parallel to AB, and the rest of the construction as before.

Dem.—Now it can be proved, as in II. vi., that the parallelogram BD is

equal to the gnomon OHJ; that is, equal to the difference between the paral-
lelograms P D and P C, or the difference (const.) between KN and P C; that is
(const.), equal to X, and BD is escribed to the triangle ABC, and has an angle
common with the external angle B. Hence the thing required is done.
Observation.—The enunciations of the three foregoing Propositions have been altered, in
order to express them in modern technical language. Some writers recommend the student to
omit them—we think differently. In the form we have given them they are freed from their
usual repulsive appearance. The constructions and demonstrations are Euclid’s, but slightly
modified.

PROP. XXX.—Theorem.
To divide a given line (AB) in “extreme and mean ratio.”
Sol.—Divide AB in C, so that the rectangle AB . BC may be equal to the
square on AC [II. xi.] Then C is the point required.
Dem.—Because the rectangle AB . BC is equal
to the square on AC, AB : AC :: AC : BC [xvii.].
Hence AB is cut in extreme and mean ratio in C [Def. ii.].
Exercises.
1. If the three sides of a right-angled triangle be in continued proportion, the hypotenuse
is divided in extreme and mean ratio by the perpendicular from the right angle on the hy-
potenuse.
2. In the same case the greater segment of the hypotenuse is equal to the least side of the
triangle.
3. The square on the diameter of the circle described about the triangle formed by the
points F , H, D (see fig. II. xi.), is equal to six times the square on the line F D.

161
 PROP. XXXI.—Theorem.

If any similar rectilineal figure be similarly described on the three sides of a

right-angled triangle (ABC), the figure on the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of
those described on the two other sides.
Dem.—Draw the perpendicular CD [I. xii.]. Then because ABC is a right-
angled triangle, and CD is drawn from the right angle perpendicular to the
hypotenuse; BD : AD in the duplicate ratio of BA : AC [viii. Cor. 4]. Again,
because the figures described on BA, AC are similar, they are in the duplicate
ratio of BA : AC [xx.]. Hence [V. xi.] BA : AD :: figure described on BA :
figure described on AC. In like manner, AB : BD :: figure described on AB :
figure described on BC. Hence [V. xxiv.] AB : sum of AD and BD :: figure
described on the line AB : sum of the figures described on the lines AC, BC; but
AB is equal to the sum of AD and BD. Therefore [V. a.] the figure described
on the line AB is equal to the sum of the similar figures described on the lines
AC and BC.
Or thus: Let us denote the sides by
a, b, c, and the figures by α, β, γ; then
because the figures are similar, we have
[xx.]

α : γ :: a2 : c2
α a2
therefore = 2.
γ c
β b2
In like manner, = 2;
γ c
α+β a2 + b2
therefore = ;
γ c2

but a2 + b2 = c2 [I. xlvii.]. Therefore α + β = γ; that is, the sum of the figures
on the sides is equal to the figure on the hypotenuse.

Exercise.
If semicircles be described on supplemental chords of a semicircle, the sum of the areas
of the two crescents thus formed is equal to the area of the triangle whose sides are the
supplemental chords and the diameter.

PROP. XXXII.—Theorem.

If two triangles (ABC, CDE) which have two sides of one proportional to
two sides of the other (AB : BC :: CD : DE), and the contained angles (B, D)
equal, be joined at an angle (C), so as to have their homologous sides parallel,
the remaining sides are in the same right line.

162
 Dem.—Because the triangles ABC, CDE
have the angles B and D equal, and the sides
about these angles proportional, viz., AB :
BC :: CD : DE, they are equiangular [vi.];
therefore the angle BAC is equal to DCE. To
each add ACD, and we have the sum of the an-
gles BAC, ACD equal to the sum of DCE and
ACD; but the sum of BAC, ACD is [I. xxix.] two right angles; therefore the
sum of DCE and ACD is two right angles. Hence [I. xiv.] AC, CE are in the
same right line.

PROP. XXXIII.–Theorem.

In equal circles, angles (BOC, EP F ) at the centres or (BAC, EDF ) at the

circumferences have the same ratio to one another as the arcs (BC, EF ) on
which they stand, and so also have the sectors (BOC, EP F ).

Dem.—1. Take any number of arcs CG, GH in the first circle, each equal
to BC. Join OG, OH, and in the second circle take any number of arcs F I,
IJ, each equal to EF . Join IP , JP . Then because the arcs BC, CG, GH are
all equal, the angles BOC, COG, GOH, are all equal [III. xxvii.]. Therefore
the arc BH and the angle BOH are equimultiples of the arc BC and the angle
BOC. In like manner it may be proved that the arc EJ and the angle EP J are
equimultiples of the arc EF and the angle EP F . Again, since the circles are
equal, it is evident that the angle BOH is greater than, equal to, or less than
the angle EP J, according as the arc BH is greater than, equal to, or less than
the arc EJ. Now we have four magnitudes, namely, the arc BC, the arc EF ,
the angle BOC, and the angle EP F ; and we have taken equimultiples of the
first and third, namely, the arc BH, the angle BOH, and other equimultiples
of the second and fourth, namely, the arc EJ and the angle EP J, and we have
proved that, according as the multiple of the first is greater than, equal to, or
less than the multiple of the second, the multiple of the third is greater than,
equal to, or less than the multiple of the fourth. Hence [V. Def. v.] BC : EF ::
the angle BOC : EP F .

163
 Again, since the angle BAC is half the angle BOC [III. xx.], and EDF is
half the angle EP F ,

BAC : EDF :: BOC : EP F [V. xv.];

but BOC : EP F :: BC : EF.
Hence BAC : EDF :: BC : EF [V. xi.].

2. The sector BOC : sector EP F :: BC : EF .

Dem.—The same construction being made, since the arc BC is equal to CG,
the angle BOC is equal to COG. Hence the sectors BOC, COG are congruent
(see Observation, Proposition xxix., Book III.); therefore they are equal. In
like manner the sectors COG, GOH are equal. Hence there are as many equal
sectors as there are equal arcs; therefore the arc BH and the sector BOH are
equimultiples of the arc BC and the sector BOC. In the same manner it may
be proved that the arc EJ and the sector EP J are equimultiples of the arc EF
and the sector EP F ; and it is evident, by superposition, that if the arc BH is
greater than, equal to, or less than the arc EJ, the sector BOH is greater than,
equal to, or less than the sector EP J. Hence [V. Def. v.] the arc BC : EF ::
sector BOC : sector EP F .
The second part may be proved as follows:—
Sector BOC = 12 rectangle contained by the arc BC, and the radius of the circle ABC
[xx. Ex. 14] and sector EP F = 21 rectangle contained by the arc EF and the radius of the
circle EDF ; and since the circles are equal, their radii are equal. Hence, sector BOC : sector
EP F :: arc BC : arc EF .

Questions for Examination on Book VI.

1. What is the subject-matter of Book VI.? Ans. Application of the theory of proportion.
2. What are similar rectilineal figures?
3. What do similar figures agree in?
4. How many conditions are necessary to define similar triangles?
5. How many to define similar rectilineal figures of more than three sides?
6. When is a figure said to be given in species?
7. When in magnitude?
8. When in position?
9. What is a mean proportional between two lines?
10. Define two mean proportionals.
11. What is the altitude of a rectilineal figure?
12. If two triangles have equal altitudes, how do their areas vary?
13. How do these areas vary if they have equal bases but unequal altitudes?
14. If both bases and altitudes differ, how do the areas vary?
15. When are two lines divided proportionally?
16. If in two lines divided proportionally a pair of homologous points coincide with their
point of intersection, what property holds for the lines joining the other pairs of homologous
points?
17. Define reciprocal proportion.
18. If two triangles have equal areas, prove that their perpendiculars are reciprocally
proportional to the bases.
19. What is meant by figures inversely similar?
20. If two figures be inversely similar, how can they be changed into figures directly
similar?

164
 21. Give an example of two triangles inversely similar. Ans. If two lines passing through
any point O outside a circle intersect it in pairs of points A, A′ ; B, B ′ , respectively, the
triangles OAB, OA′ B ′ , are inversely similar.
22. What point is it round which a figure can be turned so as to bring its sides into positions
of parallelism with the sides of a similar rectilineal figure. Ans. The centre of similitude of
the two figures.
23. How many figures similar to a given rectilineal figure of sides can be described on a
given line?
24. How many centres of similitude can two regular polygons of n sides each have? Ans.
n centres, which lie on a circle.
25. What are homothetic figures?
26. How do the areas of similar rectilineal figures vary?
27. What proposition is xix. a special case of?
28. Define Philo’s line.
29. How many centres of similitude have two circles?

Exercises on Book VI.

1. If in a fixed triangle we draw a variable parallel to the base, the locus of the points
of intersection of the diagonals of the trapezium thus cut off from the triangle is the median
that bisects the base.
2. Find the locus of the point which divides in a given ratio the several lines drawn from
a given point to the circumference of a given circle.
3. Two lines AB, XY , are given in position: AB is divided in C in the ratio m : n, and
parallels AA′ , BB ′ , CC ′ , are drawn in any direction meeting XY in the points A′ , B ′ , C ′ ;
prove
(m + n)CC ′ = nAA′ + mBB ′ .
4. Three concurrent lines from the vertices of a triangle ABC meet the opposite sides in
A′ , B ′ , C ′ ; prove
AB ′ . BC ′ . CA′ = A′ B . B ′ C . C ′ A.
5. If a transversal meet the sides of a triangle ABC in the points A′ , B ′ , C ′ ; prove
AB ′ . BC ′ . CA′ = −A′ B . B ′ C . C ′ A.
6. If on a variable line AC, drawn from a fixed point A to any point B in the circumference
of a given circle, a point C be taken such that the rectangle AB . AC is constant, the locus of
C is a circle.
7. If D be the middle point of the base BC of a triangle ABC, E the foot of the perpen-
dicular, L the point where the bisector of the angle A meets BC, H the point of contact of
the inscribed circle with BC; prove DE . HL = HE . HD.
8. In the same case, if K be the point of contact with BC of the escribed circle, which
touches the other sides produced, LH . BK = BD . LE.
9. If R, r, r′ , r′′ , r′′′ be the radii of the circumscribed, the inscribed, and the escribed
circles of a plane triangle, d, d′ , d′′ , d′′′ the distances of the centre of the circumscribed circle
from the centres of the others, then R2 = d2 + 2Rr = d′2 − 2Rr′ , &c.
10. In the same case, 12R2 = d2 + d′2 + d′′2 + d′′′2 .
11. If p′ , p′′ , p′′′ denote the perpendiculars of a triangle, then
1 1 1 1
(1) + ′′ + ′′′ = ;
p′ p p r
1 1 1 1
(2) ′′ + ′′′ − ′ = ′ , &c.;
p p p r
2 1 1
(3) ′ = − ′ , &c.;
p r r
2 1 1
(4) ′ = ′′ + ′′′ , &c.
p r r

165
 12. In a given triangle inscribe another of given form, and having one of its angles at a
given point in one of the sides of the original triangle.
13. If a triangle of given form move so that its three sides pass through three fixed points,
the locus of any point in its plane is a circle.
14. The angle A and the area of a triangle ABC are given in magnitude: if the point A
be fixed in position, and the point B move along a fixed line or circle, the locus of the point
C is a circle.
15. One of the vertices of a triangle of given form remains fixed; the locus of another is a
right line or circle; find the locus of the third.
16. Find the area of a triangle—(1) in terms of its medians; (2) in terms of its perpendic-
ulars.
17. If two circles touch externally, their common tangent is a mean proportional between
their diameters.
18. If there be given three parallel lines, and two fixed points A, B; then if the lines of
connexion of A and B to any variable point in one of the parallels intersect the other parallels
in the points C and D, E and F , respectively, CF and DE pass each through a fixed point.
19. If a system of circles pass through two fixed points, any two secants passing through
one of the points are cut proportionally by the circles.
20. Find a point O in the plane of a triangle ABC, such that the diameters of the three
circles, about the triangles OAB, OBC, OCA, may be in the ratios of three given lines.
21. ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral: the lines AB, AD, and the point C, are given in
position; find the locus of the point which divides BD in a given ratio.
22. CA, CB are two tangents to a circle; BE is perpendicular to AD, the diameter through
A; prove that CD bisects BE.
23. If three lines from the vertices of a triangle ABC to any interior point O meet the
opposite sides in the points A′ , B ′ , C ′ ; prove
OA′ OB ′ OC ′
′
+ ′
+ = 1.
AA BB CC ′
24. If three concurrent lines OA, OB, OC be cut by two transversals in the two systems
of points A, B, C; A′ , B ′ , C ′ , respectively: prove
AB OC BC OA CA OB
. = ′ ′. = ′ ′c .
A′ B ′ OC ′ B C OA′ C A OB ′
25. The line joining the middle points of the diagonals of a quadrilateral circumscribed to
a circle—
(1) divides each pair of opposite sides into inversely proportional segments;
(2) is divided by each pair of opposite lines into segments which, measured from the
centre, are proportional to the sides;
(3) is divided by both pairs of opposite sides into segments which, measured from
either diagonal, have the same ratio to each other.
26. If CD, CD′ be the internal and external bisectors of the angle C of the triangle ACB,
the three rectangles AD . DB, AC . CB, AD . BD′ are proportional to the squares of AD, AC,
AD′ ; and are—(1) in arithmetical progression if the difference of the base angles be equal to
a right angle; (2) in geometrical progression if one base angle be right; (3) in harmonical
progression if the sum of the base angles be equal to a right angle.
27. If a variable circle touch two fixed circles, the chord of contact passes through a fixed
point on the line connecting the centres of the fixed circles.

166
 Dem.—Let O, O′ be the centres of the two fixed circles; O′′ the centre of the variable
circle; A, B the points of contact. Let AB and OO′ meet in C, and cut the fixed circles again
in the points A′ , B ′ respectively. Join A′ O, AO, BO′ . Then AO, BO′ meet in O′′ [III. xi.].
Now, because the triangles OAA′ , O′′ AB are isosceles, the angle O′′ BA = O′′ AB = OA′ A.
Hence OA′ is parallel to O′ B; therefore OC : O′ C :: OA′ : O′ B; that is, in a given ratio.
Hence C is a given point.
28. If DD′ be the common tangent to the two circles, DD′2 = AB ′ . A′ B.
29. If R denote the radius of O′′ and ρ, ρ′ , the radii of O, O′ , DD′2 : AB 2 :: (R±ρ)(R±ρ′ ) :
R2 , the choice of sign depending on the nature of the contacts. This follows from 28.
30. If four circles be tangential to a fifth, and if we denote by 12 the common tangent to
the first and second, &c., then
12 . 34 + 23 . 14 = 13 . 24.
31. The inscribed and escribed circles of any triangle are all touched by its nine-points
circle.
32. The four triangles which are determined by four points, taken three by three, are such
that their nine-points circles have one common point.
33. If a, b, c, d denote the four sides, and D, D′ the diagonals of a quadrilateral; prove
that the sides of the triangle, formed by joining the feet of the perpendiculars from any of
its angular points on the sides of the triangle formed by the three remaining points, are
proportional to the three rectangles ac, bd, DD′ .
34. Prove the converse of Ptolemy’s theorem (see xvii., Ex. 13).
35. Describe a circle which shall—(1) pass through a given point, and touch two given
circles; (2) touch three given circles.
36. If a variable circle touch two fixed circles, the tangent to it from their centre of
similitude, through which the chord of contact passes (27), is of constant length.
37. If the lines AD, BD′ (see fig., Ex. 27) be produced, they meet in a point on the
circumference of O′′ , and the line O′′ P is perpendicular to DD′ .
38. If A, B be two fixed points on two lines given in position, and A′ , B ′ two variable
points, such that the ratio AA′ : BB ′ is constant, the locus of the point dividing A′ B ′ in a
given ratio is a right line.
39. If a line EF divide proportionally two opposite sides of a quadrilateral, and a line
GH the other sides, each of these is divided by the other in the same ratio as the sides which
determine them.
40. In a given circle inscribe a triangle, such that the triangle whose angular points are the
feet of the perpendiculars from the extremities of the base on the bisector of the vertical angle,
and the foot of the perpendicular from the vertical angle on the base, may be a maximum.
41. In a circle, the point of intersection of the diagonals of any inscribed quadrilateral
coincides with the point of intersection of the diagonals of the circumscribed quadrilateral,
whose sides touch the circle at the angular points of the inscribed quadrilateral.
42. Through two given points describe a circle whose common chord with another given
circle may be parallel to a given line, or pass through a given point.
43. Being given the centre of a circle, describe it so as to cut the legs of a given angle
along a chord parallel to a given line.

167
 44. If concurrent lines drawn from the angles of a polygon of an odd number of sides
divide the opposite sides each into two segments, the product of one set of alternate segments
is equal to the product of the other set.
45. If a triangle be described about a circle, the lines from the points of contact of its
sides with the circle to the opposite angular points are concurrent.
46. If a triangle be inscribed in a circle, the tangents to the circle at its three angular
points meet the three opposite sides at three collinear points.
47. The external bisectors of the angles of a triangle meet the opposite sides in three
collinear points.
48. Describe a circle touching a given line at a given point, and cutting a given circle at
a given angle.
Def.—The centre of mean position of any number of points A, B, C, D, &c., is a point
which may be found as follows:—Bisect the line joining any two points A, B, in G. Join G
to a third point C; divide GC in H, so that GH = 13 GC. Join H to a fourth point D, and
divide HD in K, so that HK = 41 HD, and so on. The last point found will be the centre of
mean position of the given points.
49. The centre of mean position of the angular points of a regular polygon is the centre
of figure of the polygon.
50. The sum of the perpendiculars let fall from any system of points A, B, C, D, &c.,
whose number is n on any line L, is equal to n times the perpendicular from the centre of
mean position on L.
51. The sum of the squares of lines drawn from any system of points A, B, C, D, &c., to
any point P , exceeds the sum of the squares of lines from the same points to their centre of
mean position, O, by nOP 2 .
52. If a point be taken within a triangle, so as to be the centre of mean position of the
feet of the perpendiculars drawn from it to the sides of the triangle, the sum of the squares
of the perpendiculars is a minimum.
53. Construct a quadrilateral, being given two opposite angles, the diagonals, and the
angle between the diagonals.
54. A circle rolls inside another of double its diameter; find the locus of a fixed point in
its circumference.
55. Two points, C, D, in the circumference of a given circle are on the same side of a
given diameter; find a point P in the circumference at the other side of the given diameter,
AB, such that P C, P D may cut AB at equal distances from the centre.
56. If the sides of any polygon be cut by a transversal, the product of one set of alternate
segments is equal to the product of the remaining set.
57. A transversal being drawn cutting the sides of a triangle, the lines from the angles
of the triangle to the middle points of the segments of the transversal intercepted by those
angles meet the opposite sides in collinear points.
58. If lines be drawn from any point P to the angles of a triangle, the perpendiculars at
P to these lines meet the opposite sides of the triangle in three collinear points.
59. Divide a given semicircle into two parts by a perpendicular to the diameter, so that
the radii of the circles inscribed in them may have a given ratio.
60. From a point within a triangle perpendiculars are let fall on the sides; find the locus
of the point, when the sum of the squares of the lines joining the feet of the perpendiculars is
given.
61. If a circle make given intercepts on two fixed lines, the rectangle contained by the
perpendiculars from its centre on the bisectors of the angle formed by the lines is given.
62. If the base and the difference of the base angles of a triangle be given, the rectangle
contained by the perpendiculars from the vertex on two lines through the middle point of the
base, parallel to the internal and external bisectors of the vertical angle, is constant.
63. The rectangle contained by the perpendiculars from the extremities of the base of
a triangle, on the internal bisector of the vertical angle, is equal to the rectangle contained
by the external bisector and the perpendicular from the middle of the base on the internal
bisector.
64. State and prove the corresponding theorem for perpendiculars on the external bisector.

168
 65. If R, R′ denote the radii of the circles inscribed in the triangles into which a right-
angled triangle is divided by the perpendicular from the right angle on the hypotenuse; then,
if c be the hypotenuse, and s the semiperimeter, R2 + R′2 = (s − c)2 .
66. If A, B, C, D be four collinear points, find a point O in the same line with them such
that OA . OD = OB . OC.
67. The four sides of a cyclic quadrilateral are given; construct it.
68. Being given two circles, find the locus of a point such that tangents from it to the
circles may have a given ratio.
69. If four points A, B, C, D be collinear, find the locus of the point P at which AB and
CD subtend equal angles.
70. If a circle touch internally two sides, CA, CB, of a triangle and its circumscribed
circle, the distance from C to the point of contact on either side is a fourth proportional to
the semiperimeter, and CA, CB.
71. State and prove the corresponding theorem for a circle touching the circumscribed
circle externally and two sides produced.
72. Pascal’s Theorem.—If the opposite
sides of an irregular hexagon ABCDEF in-
scribed in a circle be produced till they meet,
the three points of intersection G, H, I are
collinear.
Dem.—Join AD. Describe a circle
about the triangle ADI, cutting the lines
AF , CD produced, if necessary, in K and
L. Join IK, KL, LI. Now, the angles KLG,
F CG are each [III. xxi.] equal to the an-
gle GAD. Hence they are equal. Therefore
KL is parallel to CF . Similarly, LI is paral-
lel to CH, and KI to F H; hence the trian-
gles KLI, F CH are homothetic. Hence the
lines joining corresponding vertices are con-
current. Therefore the points I, H, G are
collinear.
73. If two sides of a triangle circum-
scribed to a given circle be given in posi-
tion, but the third side variable, the circle
described about the triangle touches a fixed
circle.
74. If two sides of a triangle be given in
position, and if the area be given in mag-
nitude, two points can be found, at each of
which the base subtends a constant angle.
75. If a, b, c, d denote the sides of a cyclic
quadrilateral,
p and s its semiperimeter, prove
its area = (s − a)(s − b)(s − c)(s − d).
76. If three concurrent lines from the angles of a triangle ABC meet the opposite side in
the points A′ , B ′ , C ′ , and the points A′ , B ′ , C ′ be joined, forming a second triangle A′ B ′ C ′ ,
△ ABC : △ A′ B ′ C ′ :: AB . BC . CA : 2AB ′ . BC ′ . CA′ .
77. In the same case the diameter of the circle circumscribed about the triangle ABC =
AB ′ . BC ′ . CA′ divided by the area of A′ B ′ C ′ .
78. If a quadrilateral be inscribed in one circle, and circumscribed to another, the square
of its area is equal to the product of its four sides.
79. If on the sides AB, AC of a triangle ABC we take two points D, E, and on their line
of connexion F , such that
BD AE DF
= = ;
AD CE EF
prove the triangle BF C = 2ADE.

169
 80. If through the middle points of each of the two diagonals of a quadrilateral we draw
a parallel to the other, the lines drawn from their points of intersection to the middle points
of the sides divide the quadrilateral into four equal parts.
81. CE, DF are perpendiculars to the diameter of a semicircle, and two circles are de-
scribed touching CE, DE, and the semicircle, one internally and the other externally; the
rectangle contained by the perpendiculars from their centres on AB is equal to CE . DF .
82. If lines be drawn from any point in the circumference of a circle to the angular points
of any inscribed regular polygon of an odd number of sides, the sums of the alternate lines
are equal.
83. If at the extremities of a chord drawn through a given point within a given circle
tangents be drawn, the sum of the reciprocals of the perpendiculars from the point upon the
tangents is constant.
84. If a cyclic quadrilateral be such that three of its sides pass through three fixed collinear
points, the fourth side passes through a fourth fixed point, collinear with the three given ones.
85. If all the sides of a polygon be parallel to given lines, and if the loci of all the angles
but one be right lines, the locus of the remaining angle is also a right line.
86. If the vertical angle and the bisector of the vertical angle be given, the sum of the
reciprocals of the containing sides is constant.
87. If P , P ′ denote the areas of two regular polygons of any common number of sides,
inscribed and circumscribed to a circle, and Π, Π′ the areas of the corresponding polygons
of double the number of sides; prove Π is a geometric mean between P and P ′ , and Π′ a
harmonic mean between Π and P ′ .
88. The difference of the areas of the triangles formed by joining the centres of the circles
described about the equilateral triangles constructed—(1) outwards; (2) inwards—on the sides
of any triangle, is equal to the area of that triangle.
89. In the same case, the sum of the squares of the sides of the two new triangles is equal
to the sum of the squares of the sides of the original triangle.
90. If R, r denote the radii of the circumscribed and inscribed circles to a regular polygon
of any number of sides, R′ , r′ , corresponding radii to a regular polygon of the same area, and
double the number of sides; prove
r
′
√ ′ r(R + r)
R = Rr, and r = .
2
91. If the altitude of a triangle be equal to its base, the sum of the distances of the
orthocentre from the base and from the middle point of the base is equal to half the base.
92. In any triangle, the radius of the circumscribed circle is to the radius of the circle
which is the locus of the vertex, when the base and the ratio of the sides are given, as the
difference of the squares of the sides is to four times the area.
93. Given the area of a parallelogram, one of its angles, and the difference between its
diagonals; construct the parallelogram.
94. If a variable circle touch two equal circles, one internally and the other externally,
and perpendiculars be let fall from its centre on the transverse tangents to these circles, the
rectangle of the intercepts between the feet of these perpendiculars and the intersection of the
tangents is constant.
95. Given the base of a triangle, the vertical angle, and the point in the base whose
distance from the vertex is equal half the sum of the sides; construct the triangle.
96. If the middle point of the base BC of an isosceles triangle ABC be the centre of a
circle touching the equal sides, prove that any variable tangent to the circle will cut the sides
in points D, E, such that the rectangle BD . CE will be constant.
97. Inscribe in a given circle a trapezium, the sum of whose opposite parallel sides is given,
and whose area is given.
98. Inscribe in a given circle a polygon all whose sides pass through given points.
99. If two circles X, Y be so related that a triangle may be inscribed in X and circum-
scribed about Y , an infinite number of such triangles can be constructed.
100. In the same case, the circle inscribed in the triangle formed by joining the points of
contact on Y touches a given circle.
101. And the circle described about the triangle formed by drawing tangents to X, at the
angular points of the inscribed triangle, touches a given circle.

170
 102. Find a point, the sum of whose distances from three given points may be a minimum.
103. A line drawn through the intersection of two tangents to a circle is divided harmon-
ically by the circle and the chord of contact.
104. To construct a quadrilateral similar to a given one whose four sides shall pass through
four given points.
105. To construct a quadrilateral, similar to a given one, whose four vertices shall lie on
four given lines.
106. Given the base of a triangle, the difference of the base angles, and the rectangle of
the sides; construct the triangle.
107. ABCD is a square, the side CD is bisected in E, and the line EF drawn, making
the angle AEF = EAB; prove that EF divides the side BC in the ratio of 2 : 1.
108. If any chord be drawn through a fixed point on a diameter of a circle, and its
extremities joined to either end of the diameter, the joining lines cut off, on the tangent at
the other end, portions whose rectangle is constant.
109. If two circles touch, and through their point of contact two secants be drawn at
right angles to each other, cutting the circles respectively in the points A, A′ ; B, B ′ ; then
AA′2 + BB ′2 is constant.
110. If two secants at right angles to each other, passing through one of the points of
intersection of two circles, cut the circles again, and the line through their centres in the two
systems of points a, b, c; a′ , b′ , c′ respectively, then ab : bc :: a′ b′ : b′ c′ .
111. Two circles described to touch an ordinate of a semicircle, the semicircle itself, and
the semicircles on the segments of the diameter, are equal to one another.
112. If a chord of a given circle subtend a right angle at a given point, the locus of the
intersection of the tangents at its extremities is a circle.
113. The rectangle contained by the segments of the base of a triangle, made by the point
of contact of the inscribed circle, is equal to the rectangle contained by the perpendiculars
from the extremities of the base on the bisector of the vertical angle.
114. If O be the centre of the inscribed circle of the triangle prove
OA2 OB 2 OC 2
+ + = 1.
bc ca ab
115. State and prove the corresponding theorems for the centres of the escribed circles.
116. Four points A, B, C, D are collinear; find a point P at which the segments AB, BC,
CD subtend equal angles.
117. The product of the bisectors of the three angles of a triangle whose sides are a, b, c,
is
8abc.s.area
.
(a + b)(b + c)(c + a)
118. In the same case the product of the alternate segments of the sides made by the
bisectors of the angles is
a2 b2 c2
.
(a + b)(b + c)(c + a)
119. If three of the six points in which a circle meets the sides of any triangle be such,
that the lines joining them to the opposite vertices are concurrent, the same property is true
of the three remaining points.
120. If a triangle A′ B ′ C ′ be inscribed in another ABC, prove
AB ′ . BC ′ . CA′ + A′ B . B ′ C . C ′ A
is equal twice the triangle A B ′ C ′ multiplied by the diameter of the circle ABC.
′

121. Construct a polygon of an odd number of sides, being given that the sides taken in
order are divided in given ratios by fixed points.
122. If the external diagonal of a quadrilateral inscribed in a given circle be a chord of
another given circle, the locus of its middle point is a circle.
123. If a chord of one circle be a tangent to another, the line connecting the middle point
of each arc which it cuts off on the first, to its point of contact with the second, passes through
a given point.
124. From a point P in the plane of a given polygon perpendiculars are let fall on its sides;
if the area of the polygon formed by joining the feet of the perpendiculars be given, the locus
of P is a circle.

171
 BOOK XI.
THEORY OF PLANES, COPLANAR LINES, AND SOLID
ANGLES

DEFINITIONS.

i. When two or more lines are in one plane they are said to be coplanar .
ii. The angle which one plane makes with another is called a dihedral angle.
iii. A solid angle is that which is made by more than two plane angles, in
different planes, meeting in a point.
iv. The point is called the vertex of the solid angle.
v. If a solid angle be composed of three plane angles it is called a trihedral
angle; if of four, a tetrahedral angle; and if of more than four, a polyhedral angle.

PROP. I.—Theorem.
One part (AB) of a right line cannot be in a plane (X), and another part
(BC) not in it.
Dem.—Since AB is in the plane X, it
can be produced in it [Bk. I. Post. ii.]; let
it be produced to D. Then, if BC be not in
X, let any other plane passing through AD
be turned round AD until it passes through
the point C. Now, because the points B,
C are in this second plane, the line BC [I., Def. vi.] is in it. Therefore the two
right lines ABC, ABD lying in one plane have a common segment AB, which
is impossible. Therefore, &c.

PROP. II.—Theorem.
Two right lines (AB, CD) which intersect one
another in any point (E) are coplanar, and so also
are any three right lines (EC, CB, BE) which
form a triangle.
Dem.—Let any plane pass through EB, and
be turned round it until it passes through C. Then
because the points E, C are in this plane, the right
line EC is in it [I., Def. vi.]. For the same reason
the line BC is in it. Therefore the lines EC, CB,
BE are coplanar; but AB and CD are two of these lines. Hence AB and CD
are coplanar.

172
 PROP. III.—Theorem.
If two planes (AB, BC) cut one another, their common section (BD) is a
right line.

Dem.—If not from B to D, draw in the

plane AB the right line BED, and in the plane
BC the right line BF D. Then the right lines
BED, BF D enclose a space, which [I., Ax-
iom x.] is impossible. Therefore the common
section BD of the two planes must be a right
line.

PROP. IV.—Theorem.

If a right line (EF ) be perpendicular to each of two intersecting lines (AB,

CD), it will be perpendicular to any line GH, which is both coplanar and con-
current with them.

Dem.—Through any point G in GH draw a line BC intersecting AB, CD,

and so as to be bisected in G; and join any point F in EF to B, G, C. Then,
because EF is perpendicular to the lines EB, EC, we have

BF 2 = BE 2 + EF 2 , and CF 2 = CE 2 + EF 2 ;
∴ BF 2 + CF 2 = BE 2 + CE 2 + 2EF 2 .
Again BF 2 + CF 2 = 2BG2 + 2GF 2 [II. x. Ex. 2],
and BE 2 + CE 2 = 2BG2 + 2GE 2 ;
∴ 2BG2 + 2GF 2 = 2BG2 + 2GE 2 + 2EF 2 ;
∴ GF 2 = GE 2 + EF 2 .

173
 Hence the angle GEF is right, and EF is perpendicular to EG.
Def. vi.—A line such as EF , which is perpendicular to a system of concur-
rent and coplanar lines, is said to be perpendicular to the plane of these lines,
and is called a normal to it.
Cor. 1.—The normal is the least line that may be drawn from a given point
to a given plane; and of all others that may be drawn to it, the lines of any
system making equal angles with the normal are equal to each other.
Cor. 2.—A perpendicular to each of two intersecting lines is normal to their
plane.

PROP. V.—Theorem.
If three concurrent lines (BC, BD, BE) have a
common perpendicular (AB), they are coplanar.
Dem.—For if possible let BC be not coplanar with
BD, BE, and let the plane of AB, BC intersect the
plane of BD, BE in the line BF . Then [XI. iii.] BF
is a right line; and, since it is coplanar with BD, BE,
which are each perpendicular to AB, it is [XI. iv.]
perpendicular to AB. Therefore the angle ABF is
right; and the angle ABC is right (hyp.). Hence ABC
is equal to ABF , which is impossible [I., Axiom ix.].
Therefore the lines BC, BD, BE are coplanar.

PROP. VI.—Theorem.
If two right lines (AB, CD) be normals to the same plane (X), they shall be
parallel to one another.
Dem.—Let AB, CD meet the plane X at the points
B, D. Join BD, and in the plane X draw DE at right
angles to BD; take any point E in DE. Join BE, AE,
AD. Then because AB is normal to X, the angle ABE
is right. Therefore AE 2 = AB 2 + BE 2 = AB 2 + BD2 +
DE 2 ; because the angle BDE is right. But AB 2 +
BD2 = AD2 , because the angle ABD is right. Hence
AE 2 = AD2 + DE 2 . Therefore the angle ADE is right.
[I. xlviii]. And since CD is normal to the plane X,
DE is perpendicular to CD. Hence DE is a common
perpendicular to the three concurrent lines CD, AD,
BD. Therefore these lines are coplanar [XI. v.]. But AB is coplanar with AD,
BD [XI. ii.]. Therefore the lines AD, BD, CD are coplanar; and since the
angles ABD, BDC are right, the line AB is parallel to CD [I. xxviii.].
Def. vii.—If from every point in a given line normals be drawn to a given
plane, the locus of their feet is called the projection of the given line on the
plane.

174
 Exercises.
1. The projection of any line on a plane is a right line.
2. The projection on either of two intersecting planes of a normal to the other plane is
perpendicular to the line of intersection of the planes.

PROP. VII.—Theorem.
Two parallel lines (AB, CD) and any line (EF ) intersecting them are
coplanar.

Dem.—If possible let the intersecting

line be out of the plane, as EGF . And in
the plane, of the parallels draw [I. Post. ii.]
the right line EHF . Then we have two
right lines EGF , EHF , enclosing a space,
which [I. Axiom x.] is impossible. Hence
the two parallel right lines and the transversal are coplanar.
Or thus: Since the points E, F are in the plane of the parallels, the line joining these
points is in that plane [I. Def. vi].

PROP. VIII.—Theorem.
If one (AB) of two parallel right lines (AB, CD), be normal to a plane (X),
the other line (CD) shall be normal to the same plane.

Dem.—Let AB, CD meet the plane X in the

points B, D. Join BD. Then the lines AB, BD,
CD are coplanar. Now in the plane X, to which AB
is normal, draw DE at right angles to BD. Take any
point E in DE, and join BE, AE, AD.
Then because AB is normal to the plane X, it
is perpendicular to the line BE in that plane [XI.
Def. vi.]. Hence the angle ABE is right; therefore
AE 2 = AB 2 + BE 2 = AB 2 + BD2 + DE 2 (because
BDE is right (const.)) = AD2 + DE 2 (because ABD
is right (hyp.)). Therefore the angle ADE is right.
Hence DE is at right angles both to AD and BD. Therefore [XI. iv.] DE
is perpendicular to CD, which is coplanar and concurrent with AD and BD.
Again, since AB and CD are parallel, the sum of the angles ABD, BDC is
two right angles [I. xxix.]; but ABD is right (hyp.); therefore BDC is right.
Hence CD is perpendicular to the two lines DB, DE, and therefore [XI. iv.] it
is normal to their plane, that is, it is normal to X.

175
 PROP. IX—Theorem.
Two right lines (AB, CD) which are each parallel to a third line (EF ) are
parallel to one another.

Dem.—If the three lines be coplanar, the

Proposition is evidently the same as I. xxx.
If they are not coplanar, from any point G in
EF draw in the planes of EF , AB; EF , CD,
respectively, the lines GH, GK each perpen-
dicular to EF [I. xi.]. Then because EF is
perpendicular to each of the lines GH, GK, it
is normal to their plane [XI. iv.]. And because AB is parallel to EF (hyp.), and
EF is normal to the plane GHK, AB is normal to the plane GHK [XI. viii.].
In like manner CD is normal to the plane HGK. Hence, since AB and CD are
normals to the same plane, they are parallel to one another.

PROP. X.—Theorem.

If two intersecting right lines (AB, BC) be respectively parallel to two other
intersecting right lines (DE, EF ), the angle (ABC) between the former is equal
to the angle (DEF ) between the latter.
Dem.—If both pairs of lines be coplanar, the
proposition is the same as I. xxix., Ex. 2. If not,
take any points A, C in the lines AB, BC, and cut
off ED = BA, and EF = BC [I. iii.]. Join AD,
BE, CF , AC, DF . Then because AB is equal
and parallel to DE, AD is equal and parallel to
BE [I. xxxiii]. In like manner CF is equal and
parallel to BE. Hence [XI. ix.] AD is equal and
parallel to CF . Hence [I. xxxiii.] AC is equal to
DF . Therefore the triangles ABC, DEF , have
the three sides of one respectively equal to the three sides of the other. Hence
[I. viii.] the angle ABC is equal to DEF .
Def. viii.—Two planes which meet are perpendicular to each other, when
the right lines drawn in one of them perpendicular to their common section are
normals to the other.
Def. ix.—When two planes which meet are not perpendicular to each other,
their inclination is the acute angle contained by two right lines drawn from any
point of their common section at right angles to it—one in one plane, and the
other in the other.
Observation.—These definitions tacitly assume the result of Props. iii. and x. of this book.
On this account we have departed from the usual custom of placing them at the beginning of
the book. We have altered the place of Definition vi. for a similar reason.

176
 PROP. XI.—Problem.
To draw a normal to a given plane (BH) from a given point (A) not in it.

Sol.—In the given plane BH draw any

line BC, and from A draw AD perpendic-
ular to BC [I. xii.]; then if AD be perpen-
dicular to the plane, the thing required is
done. If not, from D draw DE in the plane
BH at right angles to BC [I. xi.], and from
A draw AF [I. xii.] perpendicular to DE.
AF is normal to the plane BH.
Dem.—Draw GH parallel to BC.
Then because BC is perpendicular both to ED and DA, it is normal to the
plane of ED, DA [XI. iv.]; and since GH is parallel to BC, it is normal to the
same plane [XI. viii.]. Hence AF is perpendicular to GH [XI. Def. vi.], and AF
is perpendicular to DE (const.). Therefore AF is normal to the plane of GH
and ED—that is, to the plane BH.

PROP. XII.—Problem.

To draw a normal to a given plane from

a given point (A) in the plane.
Sol.—From any point B not in the
plane draw [XI. xi.] BC normal to it. If
this line pass through A it is the normal
required. If not, from A draw AD parallel
to BC [I. xxxi.]. Then because AD and
BC are parallel, and BC is normal to the
plane, AD is also normal to it [XI. viii.],
and it is drawn from the given point. Hence
it is the required normal.

PROP. XIII.—Theorem.

From the same point (A) there can be

but one normal drawn to a given plane
(X).
Dem.—1. Let A be in the given plane,
and if possible let AB, AC be both normals
to it, on the same side. Now let the plane
of BA, AC cut the given plane X in the
line DE. Then because BA is a normal,
the angle BAE is right. In like manner CAE is right. Hence BAE = CAE,
which is impossible.

177
 2. If the point be above the plane, there can be but one normal; for, if there
could be two, they would be parallel [XI. vi.] to one another, which is absurd.
Therefore from the same point there can be drawn but one normal to a given
plane.

PROP. XIV.—Theorem.

Planes (CD, EF ) which have a com-

mon normal (AB) are parallel to each
other.
Dem.—If the planes be not parallel,
they will meet when produced. Let them
meet, their common section being the line
GH, in which take any point K. Join
AK, BK. Then because AB is normal
to the plane CD, it is perpendicular to
the line AK, which it meets in that plane
[XI. Def. vi.]. Therefore the angle BAK
is right. In like manner the angle ABK
is right. Hence the plane triangle ABK
has two right angles, which is impossi-
ble. Therefore the planes CD, EF cannot
meet—that is, they are parallel.

Exercises.
1. The angle between two planes is equal to the angle between two intersecting normals
to these planes.
2. If a line be parallel to each of two planes, the sections which any plane passing through
it makes with them are parallel.
3. If a line be parallel to each of two intersecting planes, it is parallel to their intersection.
4. If two right lines be parallel, they are parallel to the common section of any two planes
passing through them.
5. If the intersections of several planes be parallel, the normals drawn to them from any
point are coplanar.

PROP. XV.—Theorem.

Two planes (AC, DF ) are parallel, if two intersecting lines (AB, BC) on
one of them be respectively parallel to two intersecting lines (DE, EF ) on the
other.
Dem.—From B draw BG perpendicular to the plane DF [XI. xi.], and let
it meet that plane in G. Through G draw GH parallel to ED, and GK to EF .
Now, since GH is parallel to ED (const.), and AB to ED (hyp.), AB is parallel
to GH [XI. ix.]. Hence the sum of the angles ABG, BGH is two right angles
[I. xxix]; but BGH is right (const.); therefore ABG is right. In like manner

178
CBG is right. Hence BG is normal to the plane AC [XI. Def. vi.], and it is
normal to DF (const.). Hence the planes AC, DF have a common normal BG;
therefore they are parallel to one another.

PROP. XVI.—Theorem.

If two parallel planes (AB, CD)

be cut by a third plane (EF, HG),
their common sections (EF, GH)
with it are parallel.
Dem.—If the lines EF , GH are
not parallel, they must meet at some
finite distance. Let them meet in K.
Now since K is a point in the line
EF , and EF is in the plane AB, K
is in the plane AB. In like manner
K is a point in the plane CD. Hence
the planes AB, CD meet in K, which
is impossible, since they are parallel.
Therefore the lines EF , GH must be
parallel.

Exercises.
1. Parallel planes intercept equal segments on parallel lines.
2. Parallel lines intersecting the same plane make equal angles with it.
3. A right line intersecting parallel planes makes equal angles with them.

PROP. XVII.—Theorem.

If two parallel lines (AB, CD) be cut by three parallel planes (GH, KL,
M N ) in two triads of points (A, E, B; C, F, D), their segments between
those points are proportional.

179
 Dem.—Join AC, BD, AD. Let AD meet
the plane KL in X. Join EX, XF . Then be-
cause the parallel planes KL, M N are cut by
the plane ABD in the lines EX, BD, these lines
are parallel [XI. xvi.]. Hence

AE : EB :: AX : XD [VI. ii.].

In like manner,

AX : XD :: CF : F D.

Therefore [V. xi.]

AE : EB :: CF : F D.

PROP. XVIII.—Theorem.

If a right line (AB) be normal to a plane (CI), any plane (DE) passing
through it shall be perpendicular to that plane.
Dem.—Let CE be the common sec-
tion of the planes DE, CI. From any
point F in CE draw F G in the plane
DE parallel to AB [I. xxxi.]. Then be-
cause AB and F G are parallel, but AB
is normal, to the plane CI; hence F G is
normal to it [XI. viii.]. Now since F G is
parallel to AB, the angles ABF , BF G
are equal to two right angles [I. xxix.];
but ABF is right (hyp.); therefore BF G is right—that is, F G is perpendicular
to CE. Hence every line in the plane DE, drawn perpendicular to the com-
mon section of the planes DE, CI, is normal to the plane CI. Therefore [XI.
Def. viii.] the planes DE, CI are perpendicular to each other.

PROP. XIX.—Theorem.
If two intersecting planes (AB, BC) be each
perpendicular to a third plane (ADC), their com-
mon section (BD) shall be normal to that plane.
Dem.—If not, draw from D in the plane AB
the line DE perpendicular to AD, the common sec-
tion of the planes AB, ADC; and in the plane BC
draw BF perpendicular to the common section DC
of the planes BC, ADC. Then because the plane
AB is perpendicular to ADC, the line DE in AB

180
is normal to the plane ADC [XI. Def. viii.]. In
like manner DF is normal to it. Therefore from
the point D there are two distinct normals to the
plane ADC, which [XI. xiii.] is impossible. Hence
BD must be normal to the plane ADC.

Exercises.
1. If three planes have a common line of intersection,
the normals drawn to these planes from any point of that
line are coplanar.
2. If two intersecting planes be respectively perpendic-
ular to two intersecting lines, the line of intersection of the
former is normal to the plane of the latter.
3. In the last case, show that the dihedral angle between
the planes is equal to the rectilineal angle between the nor-
mals.

PROP. XX.—Theorem.
The sum of
any two plane angles (BAD, DAC) of a trihedral
angle (A) is greater than the third (BAC).

Dem.—If the third angle BAC be less

than or equal to either of the other angles
the proposition is evident. If not, suppose
it greater: take any point D in AD, and
at the point A in the plane BAC make the
angle BAE equal BAD [I. xxiii.], and cut
off AE equal AD. Through E draw BC,
cutting AB, AC in the points B, C. Join
DB, DC.
Then the triangles BAD, BAE have the two sides BA, AD in one equal
respectively to the two sides BA, AE in the other, and the angle BAD equal
to BAE; therefore the third side BD is equal to BE. But the sum of the sides
BD, DC is greater than BC; hence DC is greater than EC. Again, because
the triangles DAC, EAC have the sides DA, AC respectively equal to the sides
EA, AC in the other, but the base DC greater than EC; therefore [I. xxv.] the
angle DAC is greater than EAC, but the angle DAB is equal to BAE (const.).
Hence the sum of the angles BAD, DAC is greater than the angle BAC.

PROP. XXI.—Theorem.
The sum of all the plane angles (BAC, CAD,
&c.) forming any solid angle (A) is less than
four right angles.

181
 Dem.—Suppose for simplicity that the solid
angle A is contained by five plane angles BAC,
CAD, DAE, EAF , F AB; and let the planes of
these angles be cut by another plane in the lines
BC, CD, DE, EF , F B; then we have [XI. xx.],
∠ABC + ABF greater than F BC,
∠ACB + ACD ,, BCD, &c.
Hence, adding, we get the sum of the base angles
of the five triangles BAC, CAD, &c., greater
than the sum of the interior angles of the pen-
tagon BCDEF —that is, greater than six right
angles. But the sum of the base angles of the
same triangles, together with the sum of the
plane angles BAC, CAD, &c., forming the solid
angle A, is equal to twice as many right angles
as there are triangles BAC, CAD, &c.—that is,
equal to ten right angles. Hence the sum of the
angles forming the solid angle is less than four right angles.
Observation.—This Prop. may not hold if the polyg-
onal base BCDEF contain re-entrant angles.

Exercises on Book XI.

1. Any face angle of a trihedral angle is less than the
sum, but greater than the difference, of the supplements
of the other two face angles.
2. A solid angle cannot be formed of equal plane
angles which are equal to the angles of a regular polygon
of n sides, except in the case of n = 3, 4, or 5.
3. Through one of two non-coplanar lines draw a
plane parallel to the other.
4. Draw a common perpendicular to two non-coplanar
lines, and show that it is the shortest distance between
them.
5. If two of the plane angles of a tetrahedral angle
be equal, the planes of these angles are equally inclined
to the plane of the third angle, and conversely. If two
of the planes of a trihedral angle be equally inclined to
the third plane, the angles contained in those planes are
equal.
6. The three lines of intersection of three planes are
either parallel or concurrent.
7. If a trihedral angle O be formed by three right
angles, and A, B, C be points along the edges, the or-
thocentre of the triangle ABC is the foot of the normal
from O on the plane ABC.
8. If through the vertex O of a trihedral angle O—
ABC any line OD be drawn interior to the angle, the
sum of the rectilineal angles DOA, DOB, DOC is less
than the sum, but greater than half the sum, of the face
angles of the trihedral.

182
 9. If on the edges of a trihedral angle O—ABC three
equal lines OA, OB, OC be taken, each of these is
greater than the radius of the circle described about the
triangle ABC.
10. Given the three angles of a trihedral angle, find,
by a plane construction, the angles between the contain-
ing planes.
11. If any plane P cut the four sides of a Gauche
quadrilateral (a quadrilateral whose angular points are
not coplanar) ABCD in four points, a, b, c, d, then the
product of the four ratios
Aa Bb Cc Dd
, , ,
aB bC cD dA
is plus unity, and conversely, if the product
Aa Bb Cc Dd
. . . = +1,
aB bC cD dA
the points a, b, c, d are coplanar.
12. If in the last exercise the intersecting plane be
parallel to any two sides of the quadrilateral, it cuts the
two remaining sides proportionally.
Def. x.—If at the vertex O of a trihedral angle O—
ABC we draw normals OA′ , OB ′ , OC ′ to the faces
OBC, OCA, OAB, respectively, in such a manner that
OA′ will be on the same side of the plane OBC as OA,
&c., the trihedral angle O—A′ B ′ C ′ is called the supple-
mentary of the trihedral angle O—ABC.
13. If O—A′ B ′ C ′ be the supplementary of O—ABC,
prove that O—ABC is the supplementary of O—A′ B ′ C ′ .
14. If two trihedral angles be supplementary, each
dihedral angle of one is the supplement of the corre-
sponding face angle of the other.
15. Through a given point draw a right line which
will meet two non-coplanar lines.
16. Draw a right line parallel to a given line, which
will meet two non-coplanar lines.
17. Being given an angle AOB, the locus of all the
points P of space, such that the sum of the projections
of the line OP on OA and OB may be constant, is a
plane.

183
 APPENDIX.
PRISM, PYRAMID, CYLINDER, SPHERE, AND CONE

DEFINITIONS.

i. A polyhedron is a solid figure contained by

plane figures: if it be contained by four plane
figures it is called a tetrahedron; by six, a hex-
ahedron; by eight, an octahedron; by twelve, a
dodecahedron; and if by twenty, an icosahedron.
ii. If the plane faces of a polyhedron be equal
and similar rectilineal figures, it is called a reg-
ular polyhedron.
iii. A pyramid is a polyhedron of which all
the faces but one meet in a point. This point
is called the vertex ; and the opposite face, the
base.
iv. A prism is a polyhedron having a pair of
parallel faces which are equal and similar recti-
lineal figures, and are called its ends. The oth-
ers, called its side faces, are parallelograms.
v. A prism whose ends are perpendicular
to its sides is called a right prism; any other is
called an oblique prism.
vi. The altitude of a pyramid is the length
of the perpendicular drawn from its vertex to
its base; and the altitude of a prism is the per-
pendicular distance between its ends.
vii. A parallelopiped is a prism whose bases
are parallelograms. A parallelopiped is evidently
a hexahedron.
viii. A cube is a rectangular parallelopiped,
all whose sides are squares.
ix. A cylinder is a solid figure formed by the
revolution of a rectangle about one of its sides,
which remains fixed, and which is called its axis.
The circles which terminate a cylinder are called
its bases or ends.
x. A cone is the solid figure described by
the revolution of a right-angled triangle about
one of the legs, which remains fixed, and which

184
is called the axis. The other leg describes the
base, which is a circle.
xi. A sphere is the solid described by the
revolution of a semicircle about a diameter, which
remains fixed. The centre of the sphere is the
centre of the generating semicircle. Any line
passing through the centre of a sphere and ter-
minated both ways by the surface is called a
diameter.

PROP. I.—Theorem.

Right prisms (ABCDE–F GHIJ, A′ B ′ C ′ D′ E ′ –F ′ G′ H ′ I ′ J ′ ) which have ba-

ses (ABCDE, A′ B ′ C ′ D′ E ′ ) that are equal and similar, and which have equal
altitudes, are equal.
Dem.—Apply the bases to each
other; then, since they are equal and
similar figures, they will coincide—
that is, the point A with A′ , B with
B ′ , &c. And since AF is equal to
A′ F ′ , and each is normal to its re-
spective base, the: point F will co-
incide with F ′ . In the same manner
the points G, H, I, J will coincide
respectively with the points G′ , H ′ ,
I ′ , J ′ . Hence the prisms are equal in
every respect.
Cor. 1.—Right prisms which have equal bases (EF, E ′ F ′ ) and equal altitudes
are equal in volume.

Dem.—Since the bases are equal, but not similar, we can suppose one of
them, EF , divided into parts A, B, C, and re-arranged so as to make them
coincide with the other [I. xxxv., note]; and since the prism on E ′ F ′ can be
subdivided in the same manner by planes perpendicular to the base, the propo-
sition is evident.
Cor. 2.—The volumes of right prisms (X, Y ) having equal bases are propor-
tional to their altitudes.
For, if the altitudes be in the ratio of m : n, X can be divided into m
prisms of equal altitudes by planes parallel to the base; then these m prisms

185
will be all equal. In like manner, Y can be divided into n equal prisms. Hence
X : Y :: m : n.
Cor. 3.—In right prisms of equal altitudes the volumes are to one another
as the areas of their bases. This may be proved by dividing the bases into parts
so that the subdivisions will be equal, and then the volumes proportional to the
number of subdivisions in their respective bases, that is, to their areas.
Cor. 4.—The volume of a rectangular parallelopiped is measured by the
continued product of its three dimensions.

PROP. II.—Theorem.
Parallelopipeds (ABCD–EF GH, ABCD–M N OP ), having a common base
(ABCD) and equal altitudes, are equal.

1◦ . Let the edges M N , EF be in one right line; then GH, OP must be in

one right line. Now EF = M N , because each equal AB; therefore M E = N F ;
therefore the prisms AEM –DHP , and BF N –CGO, have their triangular bases
AEM , BF N identically equal, and they have equal altitudes; hence they are
equal; and supposing them taken away from the entire solid, the remaining
parallelopipeds ABCD–EF GH, ABCD–M N OP are equal.

186
 2◦ . Let the edges EF , M N be in different lines; then produce ON , P M
to meet the lines EF and GH produced in the points J, K, L, I. Then by
1◦ the parallelopipeds ABCD–EF GH, ABCD–M N OP are each equal to the
parallelopiped ABCD–IJKL. Hence they an equal to one another.
Cor.—The volume of any parallelopiped is equal to the product of its base
and altitude.

PROP. III.—Theorem.
A diagonal plane of a parallelopiped divides it into two prisms of equal volume.

1◦ . When the parallelopiped is rectangular the proposition is evident.

2◦ . When it is any parallelopiped, ABCD–EF GH, the diagonal plane bi-
sects it.
Dem.—Through the vertices A, E let planes
be drawn perpendicular to the edges and cutting
them in the points I, J, K; L, M , N , respec-
tively. Then [I. xxxiv.] we have IL = BF , be-
cause each is equal to AE. Hence IB = LF .
In like manner JC = M G. Hence the pyramid
A–IJCB agrees in everything but position with
E–LM GF ; hence it is equal to it in volume. To
each add the solid ABC–LM E, and we have the
prism AIJ–ELM equal to the prism ABC–EF G.
In like manner AJK–EM N = ACD–EGH; but
(1◦ ) the prism AIJ–ELM = AJK–EM N . Hence
ABC–EF G = ACD–EGH. Therefore the diago-
nal plane bisects the parallelopiped.

187
 Cor. 1.—The volume of a triangular prism is
equal to the product of its base and altitude; be-
cause it is half of a parallelopiped, which has a
double base and equal altitude.
Cor. 2.—The volume of any prism is equal to the product of its base and
altitude; because it can be divided into triangular prisms.

PROP. IV.—Theorem.
If a pyramid (O–ABCDE) be cut by any plane (abcde) parallel to the base, the
section is similar to the base.

Dem.—Because the plane AOB cuts the par-

allel planes ABCDE, abcde, the sections AB,
ab are parallel [XI. xvi.] In like manner BC,
bc are parallel. Hence the angle ABC = abc
[XI. x.]. In like manner the remaining angles of
the polygon ABCDE are equal to the correspond-
ing angles of abcde. Again, because ab is paral-
lel to AB, the triangles ABO, abO are equiangu-
lar.

Hence AB : BO :: ab : bO. [VI. iv.]

In like manner BO : BC :: bO : bc;
therefore AB : BC :: ab : bc. [Ex æquali.]
In like manner BC : CD :: bc : cd, &c.

Therefore the polygons ABCDE, abcde are

equiangular, and have the sides about their equal angles proportional. Hence
they are similar.
Cor. 1.—The edges and the altitude of the pyramid are similarly divided by
the parallel plane.
Cor. 2.—The areas of parallel sections are in the duplicate ratio of the dis-
tances of their planes from the vertex.
Cor. 3.—In any two pyramids, sections parallel to their bases, which divide
their altitudes in the same ratio, are proportional to their bases.

PROP. V.—Theorem.
Pyramids (P –ABCD, p–abc), having equal altitudes (P O, po) and bases
(ABCD, abc) of equal areas, have equal volumes.

188
 Dem.—If they be not equal in volume, let abc be the base of the greater;
and let ox be the altitude of a prism, with an equal base, and whose volume
is equal to their difference; then let the equal altitudes P O, po be divided into
such a number of equal parts, by planes parallel to the bases of the pyramids,
that each part shall be less than ox. Then [iv. Cor. 3] the sections made by
these planes will be equal each to each. Now let prisms be constructed on these
sections as bases and with the equal parts of the altitudes of the pyramids as
altitudes, and let the prisms in P –ABCD be constructed below the sections,
and in p–abc, above. Then it is evident that the sum of the prisms in P –ABCD
is less than that pyramid, and the sum of those on the sections of p–abc greater
than p–abc. Therefore the difference between the pyramids is less than the
difference between the sums of the prisms, that is, less than the lower prism in
the pyramid p–abc; but the altitude of this prism is less than ox (const.). Hence
the difference between the pyramids is less than the prism whose base is equal
to one of the equal bases, and whose altitude is equal to ox, and the difference
is equal to this prism (hyp.), which is impossible. Therefore the volumes of the
pyramids are equal.
Cor. 1.—The volume of a triangular pyramid E–
ABC is one third the volume of the prism ABC–
DEF , having the same base and altitude.
For, draw the plane EAF , then the pyramids E–
AF C, E–AF D are equal, having equal bases AF C,
AF D, and a common altitude; and the pyramids
E–ABC, F –ABC are equal, having a common base
and equal altitudes. Hence the pyramid E–ABC is

189
one of three equal pyramids into which the prism is
divided. Therefore it is one third of the prism.
Cor. 2.—The volume of every pyramid is one-
third of the volume of a prism having an equal base
and altitude.
Because it may be divided into triangular pyramids by planes through the
vertex and the diagonals of the base.

PROP. VI.—Theorem.
The volume of a cylinder is equal to the product of the area of its base by its
altitude
.
Dem.—Let O be the centre of its circu-
lar base; and take the angle AOB indefinitely
small, so that the arc AB may be regarded as
a right line. Then planes perpendicular to the
base, and cutting it in the lines OA, OB, will
be faces of a triangular prism, whose base will
be the triangle AOB, and whose altitude will
be the altitude of the cylinder. The volume
of this prism will be equal to the area of the
triangle AOB by the height of the cylinder.
Hence, dividing the circle into elementary tri-
angles, the cylinder will be equal to the sum of all the prisms, and therefore its
volume will be equal to the area of the base multiplied by the altitude.
Cor. 1.—If r be the radius, and h the height of the cylinder,
vol. of cylinder = πr2 h.
Cor. 2.—If ABCD be a rectangle; X a line
in its plane parallel to the side AB; O the
middle point of the rectangle; the volume of
the solid described by the revolution of ABCD
round X is equal to the area of ABCD mul-
tiplied by the circumference of the circle de-
scribed by O.
Dem.—Produce the lines AD, BC to meet
X in the points E, F . Then when the rectangle revolves round X, the rectangles
ABF E, DCF E will describe cylinders whose bases will be circles having AE,
DE as radii, and whose common altitude will be AB. Hence the difference be-
tween the volumes of these cylinders will be equal to the differences between the
areas of the bases multiplied by AB, that is = π(AE 2 − DE 2 ) . AB. Therefore
the volume described by ABCD
= π . AB . (AE + DE)(AE − DE);
but AE + DE = 2OG, and AE − DE = AD.

190
Hence volume described by the rectangle ABCD
= 2π . OG . AB . AD.
= rectangle ABCD multiplied by the circumference of
the circle described by its middle point O.
Observation.—This Cor. is a simple case of Guldinus’s celebrated theorem. By its assis-
tance we give in the two following corollaries original methods of finding the volumes of the
cone and sphere, and it may be applied with equal facility to the solution of several other
problems which are usually done by the Integral Calculus.
Cor. 3.—The volume of a cone is one-third the volume of a cylinder having
the same base and altitude.
Dem.—Let ABCD be a rectangle
whose diagonal is AC. The triangle
ABC will describe a cone, and the rect-
angle a cylinder by revolving round AB.
Take two points E, F infinitely near each
other in AC, and form two rectangles,
EH, EK, by drawing lines parallel to
AD, AB. Now if O, O′ be the middle
points of these rectangles, it is evident
that, when the whole figure revolves round AB, the circumference of the circle
described by O′ will ultimately be twice the circumference of the circle described
by O; and since the parallelogram EK is equal to EH [I. xliii.], the solid de-
scribed by EK (Cor. 1) will be equal to twice the solid described by EH. Hence,
if AC be divided into an indefinite number of equal parts, and rectangles cor-
responding to EH, EK be inscribed in the triangles ABC, ADC, the sum of
the solids described by the rectangles in the triangle ADC is equal to twice the
sum of the solids described by the rectangles in the triangle ABC—that is, the
difference between the cylinder and cone is equal to twice the cone. Hence the
cylinder is equal to three times the cone.
Or thus: We may regard the cone and the cylinder as limiting cases of a pyramid and
prism having the same base and altitude; and since (v. Cor. 2) the volume of a pyramid is
one-third of the volume of a prism, having the same base and altitude, the volume of the cone
is one-third of the volume of the cylinder.
Cor. 4.—If r be the radius of the base of a cone, and h its height,

πr2 h
vol. of cone = .
3
Cor. 5.—The volume of a sphere is two-thirds of the volume of a circum-
scribed cylinder.

191
 Dem.—Let AB be the diameter of the semicircle which describes the sphere;
ABCD the rectangle which describes the cylinder. Take two points E, F indef-
initely near each other in the semicircle. Join EF , which will be a tangent, and
produce it to meet the diameter P Q perpendicular to AB in N . Let R be the
centre. Join RE; draw EG, F H, N L parallel to AB; and EI, F K parallel to
P Q; and produce to meet LN in M and L; and let O, O′ be the middle points
of the rectangles EH, EK.
Now the rectangle N G . GR = P G . GQ, because each is equal to GE 2 .
Hence N G : GP :: GQ : GR, or M E : IE :: RP + RG : RG. Now, denoting
the radii of the circles described by the points O, O′ by ρ, ρ′ respectively, we
have ultimately ρ = GR and ρ′ = 12 (RP + RG). Hence M E : IE :: 2ρ′ : ρ; but
M E : IE :: rectangle EL : rectangle EK :: [I. xliii.] EH : EK;

∴ EH : EK :: 2ρ′ : ρ;
∴ 2πρ . EH = 2(2πρ′ . EK).

Hence the solid described by EH equal twice the solid described by EK. There-
fore we infer, as in the last Cor., that the whole volume of the sphere is equal
to twice the difference between the cylinder and sphere. Therefore the sphere is
two-thirds of the cylinder.
Cor. 6.—If r be the radius of a sphere,

4πr3
vol. = .
3

192
 PROP. VII.—Theorem.
The surface of a sphere is equal to the convex surface of the circumscribed
cylinder.

Dem.—Let AB be the diameter of the semicircle which describes the sphere.

Take two points, E, F , indefinitely near each other in the semicircle. Join EF ,
and produce to meet the tangent CD parallel to AB in N . Draw EI, F K
parallel to P Q. Produce EI to meet AB in G. Let O be the centre. Join OE.

Now we have F E : KI :: EN : IN [VI. ii.];

but EN : IN :: OE : EG,

because the triangles EN I and OEG are similar.

Hence F E : KI :: OE : EG;
but OE = IG.

Hence EF : IK :: IG : EG; and IG : EG :: circumference of circle described

by the point I : circumference of circle described by the point E. Hence the
rectangle contained by EF , and circumference of circle described by E is equal
to the rectangle contained by IK, and circumference of circle described by I—
that is, the portion of the spherical surface described by EF is equal to the
portion of the cylindrical surface described by IK. Hence it is evident, if planes
be drawn perpendicular to the diameter AB—that the portions of cylindrical
and spherical surface between any two of them are equal. Hence the whole
spherical surface is equal to the cylindrical surface described by CD.
Or thus: Conceive the whole surface of the sphere divided into an indefinitely great
number of equal parts, then it is evident that each of these may be regarded as the base of
a pyramid having the centre of the sphere as a common vertex. Therefore the volume of the

193
sphere is equal to the whole area of the surface multiplied by one-third of the radius. Hence
if S denote the surface, we have
r 4πr3
S× = [vi., Cor. 6];
3 3
therefore S = 4πr2 .

That is, the area of the surface of a sphere is equal four times the area of one of its great
circles.

Exercises.
1. The convex surface of a cone is equal to half the rectangle contained by the circumference
of the base and the slant height.
2. The convex surface of a right cylinder is equal to the rectangle contained by the cir-
cumference of the base and the altitude.
3. If P be a point in the base ABC of a triangular pyramid O–ABC, and if parallels to
the edges OA, OB, OC, through P , meet the faces in the points a, b, c, the sum of the ratios
Pa Pb Pc
, , = 1.
OA OB OC
4. The volume of the frustum of a cone, made by a plane parallel to the base, is equal to
the sum of the three cones whose bases are the two ends of the frustum, and the circle whose
diameter is a mean proportional between the end diameters, and whose common altitude is
equal to one-third of the altitude of the frustum.
5. If a point P be joined to the angular points A, B, C, D of a tetrahedron, and the
joining lines, produced if necessary, meet the opposite faces in a, b, c, d, the sum of the ratios
Pa Pb Pc Pd
, , , = 1.
Aa Bb Cc Dd
6. The surface of a sphere is equal to the rectangle by its diameter, and the circumference
of a great circle.
7. The surface of a sphere is two thirds of the whole surface of its circumscribed cylinder.
8. If the four diagonals of a quadrangular prism be concurrent, it is a parallelopiped.
9. If the slant height of a right cone be equal to the diameter of its base, its total surface
is to the surface of the inscribed sphere as 9 : 4.
10. The middle points of two pairs of opposite edges of a triangular pyramid are coplanar,
and form a parallelogram.
11. If the four perpendiculars from the vertices on the opposite faces of a pyramid ABCD
be concurrent, then
AB 2 + CD2 = BC 2 + AD2 = CA2 + BD2 .
12. Every section of a sphere by a plane is a circle.
13. The locus of the centres of parallel sections is a diameter of the sphere.
14. If any number of lines in space pass through a fixed point, the feet of the perpendiculars
on them from another fixed point are homospheric.
15. Extend the property of Ex. 4 to the pyramid.
16. The volume of the ring described by a circle which revolves round a line in its plane
is equal to the area of the circle, multiplied by the circumference of the circle described by its
centre.
17. Any plane bisecting two opposite edges of a tetrahedron bisects its volume.
18. Planes which bisect the dihedral angles of a tetrahedron meet in a point.
19. Planes which bisect perpendicularly the edges of a tetrahedron meet in a point.
20. The volumes of two triangular pyramids, having a common solid angle, are proportional
to the rectangles contained by the edges terminating in that angle.
21. A plane bisecting a dihedral angle of a tetrahedron divides the opposite edge into
portions proportional to the areas containing that edge.
22. The volume of a sphere: the volume of the circumscribed cube as π : 6.

194
 πh 2
23. If h be the height, and ρ the radius of a segment of a sphere, its volume is (h +3ρ2 ).
6
24. If h be the perpendicular distance between two parallel planes, which cut a sphere in
πh 2
sections whose radii are ρ1 , ρ2 , the volume of the frustum is {h + 3(ρ21 + ρ22 )}.
6
25. If δ be the distance of a point P from the centre of a sphere whose radius is R,
the sum of the squares of the six segments at three rectangular chords passing through P is
= 6R2 − 2δ 2 .
26. The volume of a sphere : the volume of an inscribed cube as π : 2.
27. If O–ABC be a tetrahedron whose angles AOB, BOC, COA are right, the square of
the area of the triangle ABC is equal to the sum of the squares of the three other triangular
faces.
28. In the same case, if p be the perpendicular from O on the face ABC,
1 1 1 1
= + + .
p2 OA2 OB 2 OC 2
29. If h be the height of an æronaut, and R the radius of the earth, the extent of surface
2πR2 h
visible = .
R+h
30. If the four sides of a gauche quadrilateral touch a sphere, the points of contact are
concyclic.

195
 NOTES.

NOTE A.
MODERN THEORY OF PARALLEL LINES.

In every plane there is one special line called the line at infinity. The point where any
other line in the plane cuts the line at infinity is called the point at infinity in that line. All
other points in the line are called finite points. Two lines in the plane which meet the line
at infinity in the same point are said to have the same direction, and two lines which meet
it in different points to have different directions. Two lines which have the same direction
cannot meet in any finite point [I. Axiom x.], and are parallel. Two lines which have different
directions must intersect in some finite point, since, if produced, they meet the line at infinity
in different points. This is a fundamental conception in Geometry, it is self-evident, and may
be assumed as an Axiom (see Observations on the Axioms, Book I.). Hence we may infer the
following general proposition:—“Any two lines in the same plane must meet in some point in
that plane; that is—(1) at infinity, when the lines have the same direction; (2) in some finite
point, when they have different directions.”—See Poncelet, Propriétés Projectives, page 52.

NOTE B.
legendre’s and hamilton’s proofs of euclid, I. xxxii.
The discovery of the Proposition that “the sum of the three angles of a triangle is equal to
two right angles” is attributed to Pythagoras. Until modern times no proof of it, independent
of the theory of parallels, was known. We shall give here two demonstrations, each independent
of that theory. These are due to two of the greatest mathematicians of modern times—one,
the founder of the Theory of Elliptic Functions; the other, the discoverer of the Calculus of
Quaternions.

Legendre’s Proof.—Let ABC be a triangle, of which the side AC is the greatest. Bisect
BC in D. Join AD. Then AD is less than AC [I. xix. Ex. 5]. Now, construct a new triangle
AB ′ C ′ , having the side AC ′ = 2AD, and AB ′ = AC. Again, bisect B ′ C ′ in D′ , and form
another triangle AB ′′ C ′′ , having AC ′′ = 2AD′ , and AB ′′ = AC ′ , &c. (1) The sum of the
angles of the triangle ABC = the sum of the angles of AB ′ C ′ [I. xvi. Cor. 1] = the sum of the
angles of AB ′′ C ′′ = the sum of the angles of AB ′′′ C ′′′ , &c. (2) The angle B ′ AC ′ is less than
half BAC; the angle B ′′ AC ′′ is less than half B ′ AC ′ , and so on; hence the angle B (n) A(n)
will ultimately become infinitely small. (3) The sum of the base angles of any triangle of the
series is equal to the angle of the preceding triangle (see Dem. I. xvi.). Hence, if the annexed
diagram represent the triangle AB (n+1) C (n+1) , the sum of the base angles A and C (n+1) is

196
equal to the angle B (n) C (n) ; and when n is indefinitely large, this angle is an infinitesimal;
hence the point B (n+1) will ultimately be in the line AC, and the angle AB (n+1) C (n+1) will
become a straight angle [I. Def. x.], that is, it is equal to two right angles; but the sum of the
angles of AB (n+1) C (n+1) is equal to the sum of the angles ABC. Hence the sum of the three
angles of ABC is equal to two right angles.

Hamilton’s Quaternion Proof.—Let ABC be the triangle. Produce BA to D, and

make AD equal to AC. Produce CB to E, and make BE equal to BD; finally, produce AC
to F , and make CF equal to CE. Denote the exterior angles thus formed by A′ , B ′ , C ′ . Now
let the leg AC of the angle A′ be turned round the point A through the angle A′ ; then the
point C will coincide with D. Again, let the leg BD of the angle B ′ be turned round the point
B through the angle B ′ , until BD coincides with BE; then the point D will coincide with E.
Lastly, let CE be turned round C, through the angle C ′ , until CE coincides with CF , and
the point E with F . Now, it is evident that by these rotations the point C has been brought
successively into the positions D, E, F ; hence, by a motion of mere translation along the line
F C, the line CA can be brought into its former position. Therefore it follows, since rotation
is independent of translation, that the amount of the three rotations is equal to one complete
revolution round the point A; therefore A′ + B ′ + C ′ = four right angles; but
A + A′ + B + B ′ + C + C ′ = six right angles [I. xiii.];
hence A + B + C = two right angles.
Observation.—The foregoing demonstration is the most elementary that was ever given of
this celebrated Proposition. I have reduced it to its simplest form, and without making any
use of the language of Quaternions. The same method of proof will establish the more general
Proposition, that the sum of the external angles of any convex rectilineal figure is equal to
four right angles.
Mr. Abbott, f.t.c.d., has informed me that this demonstration was first given by Playfair
in 1826, so that Hamilton was anticipated. It has been objected to on the ground that,
applied verbatim to a spherical triangle, it would lead to the conclusion that the sum of the
angles is two right angles, which being wrong, proves that the method is not valid. A slight
consideration will show that the cases are different. In the proof given in the text there are
three motions of rotation, in each of which a point describes an arc of a circle, followed by
a motion of translation, in which the same point describes a right line, and returns to its
original position. On the surface of a sphere we should have, corresponding to these, three

197
motions of rotation, in each of which the point would describe an arc of a circle, followed by a
motion of rotation about the centre of the sphere, in which the point should describe an arc
of a great circle to return to its original position. Hence, the proof for a plane triangle cannot
be applied to a spherical triangle.

NOTE C.
to inscribe a regular polygon of seventeen sides in a circle.
Analysis.—Let A be one of the angular points, AO the diameter, A1 , A2 , . . . A8 the ver-
tices at one side of AO. Produce OA3 to M , and OA2 to P , making A3 M = OA5 , and
A2 P = OA8 . Again, cut off A6 N = OA7 , and A1 Q = OA4 . Lastly, cut off OR = ON , and
OS = OQ. Then we have [IV. Ex. 40],
ρ1 ρ4 = R(ρ3 + ρ5 ) = R . OM,
ρ2 ρ8 = R(ρ6 − ρ7 ) = R . ON ;
but ρ1 ρ2 ρ4 ρ8 =R4 [IV. Ex. 34];
2
therefore OM . ON =R (1).
In like manner, OP . OQ =R2 (2).

Again, OM . ON = (ρ3 + ρ5 )(ρ6 − ρ7 )

= ρ3 ρ6 + ρ5 ρ6 − ρ3 ρ7 − ρ5 ρ7
= R(ρ3 − ρ8 ) + R(ρ1 − ρ6 ) − R(ρ2 − ρ7 ) − R(ρ2 − ρ5 ) [IV. Ex. 40].
= R(OM − ON − OP + OQ) = R(M R − P S) :
M R − P S = R.
Again, M R . P S = (OM − ON )(OP − OQ)
= (ρ3 + ρ5 − ρ6 + ρ7 )(ρ2 + ρ8 − ρ1 + ρ4 );

198
and performing the multiplication and substituting, we get
4R(OM − ON − OP + OQ) = 4R2 .
Hence, the rectangle and the difference of the lines M R and P S being given, each is given;
hence M R is given; but M R = OM − ON ; therefore OM − ON is given; and we have proved
that the rectangle OM . ON = R2 ; therefore OM and ON are each given. In like manner,
OP and OQ are each given.
Again,
ρ6 . ρ7 = R(ρ1 − ρ4 ) = R . OQ, and ρ6 − ρ7 = ON.
Hence, since OQ and ON are each given, ρ6 and ρ7 are each given; therefore we can draw these
chords, and we have the arc A6 A7 between their extremities given; that is, the seventeenth
part of the circumference of a circle. Hence the problem is solved.
The foregoing analysis is due to Ampere: see Catalan, Théorèmes et Problèmes de
Géométrie Elémentaire. We have abridged and simplified Ampere’s solution.

NOTE D.
to find two mean proportionals between two given lines.
The problem to find two mean proportionals is one of the most celebrated in Geometry
on account of the importance which the ancients attached to it. It cannot be solved by the
line and circle, but is very easy by Conic Sections. The following is a mechanical construction
by the Ruler and Compass.
Sol.—Let the extremes AB, BC be placed at right angles to each other; complete the
rectangle ABCD, and describe a circle about it. Produce DA, DC, and let a graduated ruler
be made to revolve round the point B, and so adjusted that BE shall be equal to GF ; then
AF , CE are two mean proportionals between AB, BC.

Dem.—Since BE is equal to GF , the rectangle BE . GE = BF . GF . Therefore DE . CE

= DF . AF ; hence DE : DF :: AF : CE; and by similar triangles, AB : AF :: DE : DF , and
CE : CB :: DE : DF . Hence AB : AF :: AF : CE; and AF : CE :: CE : CB. Therefore
AB, AF , CE, CB are continual proportions. Hence [VI. Def. iv.] AF , CE are two mean
proportionals between AB and BC.
The foregoing elegant construction is due to the ancient Geometer Philo of Byzantium.
If we join DG it will be perpendicular to EF . The line EF is called Philo’s Line; it possesses
the remarkable property of being the minimum line through the point B between the fixed
lines DE, DF .
Newton’s Construction.—Let AB and L be the two given lines of which AB is the
greater. Bisect AB in C. With A as centre and AC as radius, describe a circle, and in it
place the chord CD equal to the second line L. Join BD, and draw by trial through A a line
meeting BD, CD produced in the points E, F , so that the intercept EF will be equal to the
radius of the circle. DE and F A are the mean proportionals required.

199
 Dem.—Join AD. Since the line BF cuts the sides of the △ ACE, we have
AB . CD . EF = CB . DE . F A; but EF = CB;
CD FA
therefore AB . CD = DE . F A, or = .
DE AB
Again, since the △ ACD is isosceles, we have
ED . EC = EA2 − AC 2 = (F A + AC)2 − AC 2
= 2F A . AC + F A2 = F A . AB + F A2 .

Hence ED(ED + CD) = F A(AB + F A),

   
CD AF
or DE 2 1 + = F A . AB 1 + ,
DE AB
therefore DE 2 = F A . AB, and we have AB . CD = DE . F A.
Hence AB, DE, F A, CD are in continued proportion.

NOTE E.
on philo’s line.
I am indebted to Professor Galbraith for the following proof of the minimum property of
Philo’s Line. It is due to the late Professor Mac Cullagh:—Let AC, CB be two given lines, E
a fixed point, CD a perpendicular on AB; it is required to prove, if AE is equal to DB, that
AB is a minimum.
Dem.—Through E draw EM parallel to BC; make EN = EM ; produce AB until
EP = AB. Through the points N , P draw N T , RP each parallel to AC, and through P draw
P Q parallel to BC. It is easy to see from the figure that the parallelogram QR is equal to the
parallelogram M F , and is therefore given. Through P draw ST perpendicular to EP . Now,
since AE = DB, BP is equal to DB; therefore P S = CD. Again, since OP = AD, P T is
equal to CD; therefore P S = P T . Hence QR is the maximum parallelogram in the triangle
SV T .

200
 Again, if any other line A′ B be drawn through E, and produced to P ′ , so that EP ′ = AP ′ ,
the point P ′ must fall outside ST , because the parallelogram Q′ R′ , corresponding to QR, will
be equal to M F , and therefore equal to QR. Hence the line EP ′ is greater than EP , or A′ B ′
is greater than AB. Hence AB is a minimum.

NOTE F.
on the trisection of an angle.
The following mechanical method of trisecting an angle occurred to me several years ago.
Apart from the interest belonging to the Problem, it is valuable to the student as a geometrical
exercise:—
To trisect a given angle ACB.

201
 Sol.—Erect CD perpendicular to CA; bisect the angle BCD by CG, and make the angle
ECI equal half a right angle; it is evident that CI will fall between CB and CA. Then, if
we use a jointed ruler—that is two equal rulers connected by a pivot—and make CB equal to
the length of one of these rulers, and, with C as centre and CB as radius, describe the circle
BAM , cutting CI in I: at I draw the tangent IG, cutting CG in G.
Then, since ICG is half a right angle, and CIG is right, IGC is half a right angle; therefore
IC is equal to IG; but IC equal CB; therefore IG = CB—equal length of one of the two
equal rulers. Hence, if the rulers be opened out at right angles, and placed so that the pivot
will be at I, and one extremity at C, the other extremity at G; it is evident that the point B
will be between the two rulers; then, while the extremity at C remains fixed, let the other be
made to traverse the line GF , until the edge of the second ruler passes through B: it is plain
that the pivot moves along the circumference of the circle. Let CH, HF , be the positions of
the rulers when this happens; draw the line CH; the angle ACH is one-third of ACB.
Dem.—Produce BC to M . Join HM . Erect BO at right angles to BM . Then, because
CH = HF , the angle HCF = HF C, and the angle DCE = ECB (const.). Hence the angle
HCD = HBC [I. xxxii.], and the right angles ACD, CBO are equal; therefore the angle
ACH is equal to HBO; that is [III. xxxii.], equal to HM B, or to half the angle HCB. Hence
ACH is one-third of ACB.

NOTE G.
on the quadrature of the circle.
Modern mathematicians denote the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter by
the symbol π. Hence, if r denote the radius, the circumference will be 2πr; and, since the area
of a circle [VI. xx. Ex. 15] is equal to half the rectangle contained by the circumference and the
radius, the area will be πr2 . Hence, if the area be known, the value of π will be known; and,
conversely, if the value of π be known, the area is known. On this account the determination
of the value of π is called “the problem of the quadrature of the circle,” and is one of the most
celebrated in Mathematics. It is now known that the value of π is incommensurable; that is,
that it cannot be expressed as the ratio of any two whole numbers, and therefore that it can
be found only approximately; but the approximation can be carried as far as we please, just as
in extracting the square root we may proceed to as many decimal places as may be required.
The simplest approximate value of π was found by Archimedes, namely, 22 : 7. This value is
tolerably exact, and is the one used in ordinary calculations, except where great accuracy is
required. The next to this in ascending order, viz. 355 : 113, found by Vieta, is correct to
six places of decimals. It differs very little from the ratio 3.1416 : 1, given in our elementary
books.
Several expeditious methods, depending on the higher mathematics, are known for cal-
culating the value of π. The following is an outline of a very simple elementary method for
determining this important constant. It depends on a theorem which is at once inferred from
VI., Ex. 87, namely “If a, A denote the reciprocals of the areas of any two polygons of the
same number of sides inscribed and circumscribed to a circle; a′ , A′ the corresponding quan-
tities for polygons of twice the number; a′ is the geometric mean between a and A, and A′ the
arithmetic mean between a′ and A.” Hence, if a and A be known, we can, by the processes of
finding arithmetic and geometric means, find a′ and A′ . In like manner, from a′ , A′ we can
find a′′ , A′′ related to a′ , A′ ; as a′ , A′ are to a, A. Therefore, proceeding in this manner until
we arrive at values a(n) , A(n) that will agree in as many decimal places as there are in the
degree of accuracy we wish to attain; and since the area of a circle is intermediate between
the reciprocals of a(n) and A(n) , the area of the circle can be found to any required degree of
approximation.

202
 If for simplicity we take the radius of the circle to be unity, and commence with the
inscribed and circumscribed squares, we have
a = .5, A = .25.
a′ = .3535533, A′ = .3017766.
a′′ = .3264853, A′′ = .3141315.

These numbers are found thus: a′ is the geometric mean between a and A; that is, between
.5 and .25, and A′ is the arithmetic mean between a′ and A, or between .3535533 and .25.
Again, a′′ is the geometric mean between a′ and A′ ; and A′′ the arithmetic mean between
a′′ and A′ . Proceeding in this manner, we find a(13) = .3183099; A(13) = .3183099. Hence
the area of a circle radius unity, correct to seven decimal places, is equal to the reciprocal of
.3183099; that is, equal to 3.1415926; or the value of π correct to seven places of decimals
is 3.1415926. The number π is of such fundamental importance in Geometry, that mathe-
maticians have devoted great attention to its calculation. Mr. Shanks, an English computer,
carried the calculation to 707 places of decimals. The following are the first 36 figures of his
result:—
3.141, 592, 653, 589, 793, 238, 462, 643, 383, 279, 502, 884.
The result is here carried far beyond all the requirements of Mathematics. Ten decimals are
sufficient to give the circumference of the earth to the fraction of an inch, and thirty decimals
would give the circumference of the whole visible universe to a quantity imperceptible with
the most powerful microscope.

203
 CONCLUSION.

In the foregoing Treatise we have given the Elementary Geometry of the

Point, the Line, and the Circle, and figures formed by combinations of these.
But it is important to the student to remark, that points and lines, instead of
being distinct from, are limiting cases of, circles; and points and planes limiting
cases of spheres. Thus, a circle whose radius diminishes to zero becomes a
point. If, on the contrary, the circle be continually enlarged, it may have its
curvature so much diminished, that any portion of its circumference may be
made to differ in as small a degree as we please from a right line, and become
one when the radius becomes infinite. This happens when the centre, but not
the circumference, goes to infinity.

204
Index

Abbott, 197 arc of, 69

Alternando, 129 chord of, 69
Altitude, 136 circumference, 5
Ampere, 199 circumscribed, 102
Angle, 3 concentric, 70
acute, 4 contact of, 69, 81
adjacent, 4 diameter of, 5
alternate, 29 escribed, 104
bisection of, 16 nine-points, 106
complement of, 4 polar, 106
dihedral, 172 radius of, 5
extension of meaning, 70 sector of, 70
exterior, 5 segment of, 69
interior, 19, 29, 32 Circumcentre, 105
legs of, 3 Circumcircle, 105
obtuse, 5 Comberousse, i, 78
re-entrant, 3 Componendo, 130
right, 4 Conclusion, 7
solid, 172, 182 Cone, 184
supplement of, 4 Congruent, 8
trihedral, 172 Contrapositive, 7
trisection of, 201 Convertendo, 131
vertex of, 3 Corollary, 8
Antecedent of a ratio, 119 Cube, 184
Arc of a circle, 69 Cylinder, 184, 190
Area, 52, 155
Axioms, 6, 196 Demonstration, 8
Axis Diagonal, 29
of symmetry, 13 middle points of, 17
radical, 83 third of a quadrilateral, 29
Dividendo, 130
Catalan, i, 115, 199 Dodecahedron, 184
Centre, 5 Double point, 154
of similitude, 154
radical, 83 Enunciation, 8
Chasles, 1 Ex aequali, 132
Circle, 5 Ex aequo perturbato, 133

205
Figures, 3 Lozenge, 5
directly similar, 151
given in magnitude, 136 Maximum, 75
given in position, 136 Mc Cullagh, 200
given in species, 136 Median, 22
inversely similar, 151 Minimum, 75
rectilineal, 3 Multiples, 117
similar, 136
Newcomb, 2, 69, 70
Galbraith, 200 Newton, 199
Gauss, 1
Gnomon, 51 Octahedron, 184
Orthocentre, 106
Hamilton, 151, 197 Orthogonal, 101
Harmonic conjugates, 135
Henrici, 2 parallelogram, 29
Hexahedron, 184 complements of, 40
Homologous terms, 122 Parallelopiped, 184
Homothetic, 155 Pascal, 169
Hypotenuse, 4 Pentagon, 5
Hypothesis, 7 Philo, proofs by, 15
Plane, 2
Icosahedron, 184 Playfair, 197
Identically equal, 35 Points, 2
Identity, rule of, 8 collinear, 3
Inscribed, 102 concyclic, 70
Invertendo, 124 homologous, 154
inverse, 83
Lardner, 92 row of, 3
Legendre, 196 Polygon, 5
Lemma, 8 Polyhedron, 184
Line, 2 Poncelet, 196
divided harmonically, 135 Postulate, 5
Lines Prism, 184
Concurrent, 4 Problem, 7
Coplanar, 172 Projection, 29
Incommensurable, 63, 118 Proportion, 119
normal to a plane, 174 extremes of, 119
parallel, 28 means of, 119
pencil of, 4 Proportional, mean, 136, 145
perpendicular, 4 Proportionals
Philo’s, 200 fourth, 144
projection of, 29 third, 144
segment of, 50 two mean, 136, 199
transversal, 8 Proposition, 7
Locus, 28 contrapositive of, 7

206
 converse of, 7 Vertex
Propositions of angle, 3
identical, 65 of pencil, 4
obverse of, 7
Ptolemy’s theorem, 150
converse of, 167
extension of, 167

Quadrature of circle, 202

Quadrilateral, 5
cyclic, 70

Ratio, 117, 118

antecedent of a, 119
compound, 121
consequent of a, 119
duplicate, 121
extreme and mean, 63
of greater inequality, 135
of lesser inequality, 135
reciprocal of, 119
Ray, 4, 70
Rectangle, 50
Rouché, i

Secant, 8
Simson, 87
Solution, 8
Sphere, 185, 191, 193
Square, 5
Submultiple, 117
Surface, 2

Tangent, 69
Theorem, 7
converse of, 7
Townsend, i, 93
Trapezium, 29
Triangle, 4
equilateral, 4
isosceles, 4
obtuse-angled, 5
right-angled, 4
scalene, 4
Trihedral angle, 172
supplementary of, 183

207
THE END.

208
 THIRD EDITION, Revised and Enlarged—3/6, cloth.

A SEQUEL
TO THE

FIRST SIX BOOKS OF THE ELEMENTS OF EUCLID.

BY

JOHN CASEY, LL.D., F.R.S.,

Fellow of the Royal University of Ireland; Vice-President, Royal Irish Academy; &c.
&c.

Dublin: Hodges, Figgis, & Co. London: Longmans, Green, & Co.

EXTRACTS FROM CRITICAL NOTICES.

“Nature,” April 17, 1884.

“We have noticed (‘Nature,’ vol. xxiv., p. 52; vol. xxvi., p. 219) two previous editions
of this book, and are glad to find that our favourable opinion of it has been so convincingly
indorsed by teachers and students in general. The novelty of this edition is a Supplement
of Additional Propositions and Exercises. This contains an elegant mode of obtaining the
circle tangential to three given circles by the methods of false positions, constructions for a
quadrilateral, and a full account—for the first time in a text-book—of the Brocard, triplicate
ratio, and (what the author proposes to call) the cosine circles. Dr. Casey has collected
together very many properties of these circles, and, as usual with him, has added several
beautiful results of his own. He has done excellent service in introducing the circles to the
notice of English students.. . . We only need say we hope that this edition may meet with as
much acceptance as its predecessors, it deserves greater acceptance.”

The “Mathematical Magazine,” Erie, Pennsylvania.

“Dr. Casey, an eminent Professor of the Higher Mathematics and Mathematical Physics
in the Catholic University of Ireland, has just brought out a second edition of his unique
‘Sequel to the First Six Books of Euclid,’ in which he has contrived to arrange and to pack
more geometrical gems than have appeared in any single text-book since the days of the
self-taught Thomas Simpson. ‘The principles of Modern Geometry contained in the work
are, in the present state of Science, indispensable in Pure and Applied Mathematics, and in
Mathematical Physics; and it is important that the student should become early acquainted
with them.’
“Eleven of the sixteen sections into which the work is divided exhibit most excellent
specimens of geometrical reasoning and research. These will be found to furnish very neat
models for systematic methods of study. The other five sections contain 261 choice problems
for solution. Here the earnest student will find all that he needs to bring himself abreast

209
with the amazing developments that are being made almost daily in the vast regions of Pure
and Applied Geometry. On pp. 152 and 153 there is an elegant solution of the celebrated
Malfatti’s Problem.
“As our space is limited, we earnestly advise every lover of the ‘Bright Seraphic Truth’ and
every friend of the ‘Mathematical Magazine’ to procure this invaluable book without delay.”

The “Schoolmaster.”

“This book contains a large number of elementary geometrical propositions not given in
Euclid, which are required by every student of Mathematics. Here are such propositions as
that the three bisectors of the sides of a triangle are concurrent, needed in determining the
position of the centre of gravity of a triangle; propositions in the circle needed in Practical
Geometry and Mechanics; properties of the centres of similitudes, and the theories of inversion
and reciprocations so useful in certain electrical questions. The proofs are always neat, and
in many cases exceedingly elegant.”

The “Educational Times.”

“We have certainly seen nowhere so good an introduction to Modern Geometry, or so

copious a collection of those elementary propositions not given by Euclid, but which are
absolutely indispensable for every student who intends to proceed to the study of the Higher
Mathematics. The style and general get up of the book are, in every way, worthy of the
‘Dublin University Press Series,’ to which it belongs.”

The “School Guardian.”

“This book is a well-devised and useful work. It consists of propositions supplementary to

those of the first six books of Euclid, and a series of carefully arranged exercises which follow
each section. More than half the book is devoted to the Sixth Book of Euclid, the chapters
on the ‘Theory of Inversion’ and on the ‘Poles and Polars’ being especially good. Its method
skilfully combines the methods of old and modern Geometry; and a student well acquainted
with its subject-matter would be fairly equipped with the geometrical knowledge he would
require for the study of any branch of physical science.”

The “Practical Teacher.”

“Professor Casey’s aim has been to collect within reasonable compass all those proposi-
tions of Modern Geometry to which reference is often made, but which are as yet embodied
nowhere.. . . We can unreservedly give the highest praise to the matter of the book. In most
cases the proofs are extraordinarily neat.. . . The notes to the Sixth Book are the most satis-
factory. Feuerbach’s Theorem (the nine-points circle touches inscribed and escribed circles)
is favoured with two or three proofs, all of which are elegant. Dr. Hart’s extension of it is
extremely well proved.. . . We shall have given sufficient commendation to the book when we
say, that the proofs of these (Malfatti’s Problem, and Miquel’s Theorem), and equally complex
problems, which we used to shudder to attack, even by the powerful weapons of analysis, are
easily and triumphantly accomplished by Pure Geometry.

210
 “After showing what great results this book has accomplished in the minimum of space, it
is almost superfluous to say more. Our author is almost alone in the field, and for the present
need scarcely fear rivals.”

The “Academy.”

“Dr. Casey is an accomplished geometer, and this little book is worthy of his reputation.
It is well adapted for use in the higher forms of our schools. It is a good introduction to
the larger works of Chasles, Salmon, and Townsend. It contains both a text and numerous
examples.”

The “Journal of Education.”

“Dr. Casey’s ‘Sequel to Euclid’ will be found a most valuable work to any student who
has thoroughly mastered Euclid, and imbibed a real taste for geometrical reasoning.. . . The
higher methods of pure geometrical demonstration, which form by far the larger and more
important portion, are admirable; the propositions are for the most part extremely well given,
and will amply repay a careful perusal to advanced students.”

211
 PREFACE.
Frequent applications having been made to Dr. Casey requesting him to
publish a ”Key” containing the Solutions of the Exercises in his ”Elements of
Euclid,” but his professorial and other duties scarcely leaving him any time to
devote to it, I undertook, under his direction, the task of preparing one. Every
Solution was examined and approved of by him before writing it for publication,
so that the work may be regarded as virtually his.
The Exercises are a joint selection made by him and the late lamented Profes-
sor Townsend, s.f.t.c.d., and form one of the finest collections ever published.

JOSEPH B. CASEY.

86, South Circular-road,

December 23, 1886.

212
Price 4/6, post free.]

THE FIRST SIX BOOKS

OF THE

ELEMENTS OF EUCLID,
With Copious Annotations and Numerous Exercises.

BY

JOHN CASEY, LL.D., F.R.S.,

Fellow of the Royal University of Ireland; Vice-President, Royal Irish Academy; &c.
&c.

Dublin: Hodges, Figgis, & Co. London: Longmans, Green, & Co.

OPINIONS OF THE WORK.

The following are a few of the Opinions received by Dr. Casey on this
Work:—
“Teachers no longer need be at a loss when asked which of the numerous ‘Euclids’ they
recommend to learners. Dr. Casey’s will, we presume, supersede all others.”—The Dublin
Evening Mail.
“Dr. Casey’s work is one of the best and most complete treatises on Elementary Ge-
ometry we have seen. The annotations on the several propositions are specially valuable to
students.”—The Northern Whig.
“His long and successful experience as a teacher has eminently qualified Dr. Casey for the
task which he has undertaken.. . . We can unhesitatingly say that this is the best edition of
Euclid that has been yet offered to the public.”—The Freeman’s Journal.

From the Rev. R. Townsend, F.T.C.D., &c.

“I have no doubt whatever of the general adoption of your work through all the schools
of Ireland immediately, and of England also before very long.”

From George Francis FitzGerald, Esq., F.T.C.D.

”Your work on Euclid seems admirable, and is a great improvement in most ways on
its predecessors. It is a great thing to call the attention of students to the innumerable
variations in statement and simple deductions from propositions.. . . I should have preferred
some modification of Euclid to a reproduction, but I suppose people cannot be got to agree
to any.”

213
 From H. J. Cooke, Esq., The Academy, Banbridge.
”In the clearness, neatness, and variety of demonstrations, it is far superior to any text-
book yet published, whilst the exercises are all that could be desired.”

From James A. Poole, M.A., 29, Harcourt-street, Dublin.

”This work proves that Irish Scholars can produce Class-books which even the Head
Masters of English Schools will feel it a duty to introduce into their establishments.”

From Professor Leebody, Magee College, Londonderry.

”So far as I have had time to examine it, it seems to me a very valuable addition to
our text-books of Elementary Geometry, and a most suitable introduction to the ‘Sequel to
Euclid,’ which I have found an admirable book for class teaching.”

From Mrs. Bryant, F.C.P., Principal of the North London Collegiate School for Girls.
”I am heartily glad to welcome this work as a substitute for the much less elegant text-
books in vogue here. I have begun to use it already with some of my classes, and find that
the arrangement of exercises after each proposition works admirably.”

From the Rev. J. E. Reffé, French College, Blackrock.

”I am sure you will soon be obliged to prepare a Second Edition. I have ordered fifty
copies more of the Euclid (this makes 250 copies for the French College). They all like the
book here.”

From the Nottingham Guardian.

”The edition of the First Six Books of Euclid by Dr. John Casey is a particularly useful
and able work.. . . The illustrative exercises and problems are exceedingly numerous, and have
been selected with great care. Dr. Casey has done an undoubted service to teachers in
preparing an edition of Euclid adapted to the development of the Geometry of the present
day.”

From the Leeds Mercury.

”There is a simplicity and neatness of style in the solution of the problems which will
be of great assistance to the students in mastering them.. . . At the end of each proposition
there is an examination paper upon it, with deductions and other propositions, by means
of which the student is at once enabled to test himself whether he has fully grasped the
principles involved.. . . Dr. Casey brings at once the student face to face with the difficulties
to be encountered, and trains him, stage by stage, to solve them.”

From the Practical Teacher.

”The preface states that this book ‘is intended to supply a want much felt by Teachers
at the present day–the production of a work which, while giving the unrivalled original in all
its integrity, would also contain the modern conceptions and developments of the portion of
Geometry over which the elements extend.’
”The book is all, and more than all, it professes to be.. . . The propositions suggested are
such as will be found to have most important applications, and the methods of proof are both
simple and elegant. We know no book which, within so moderate a compass, puts the student
in possession of such valuable results.
”The exercises left for solution are such as will repay patient study, and those whose
solution are given in the book itself will suggest the methods by which the others are to be
demonstrated. We recommend everyone who wants good exercises in Geometry to get the
book, and study it for themselves.”

214
 From the Educational Times.

”The editor has been very happy in some of the changes he has made. The combination of
the general and particular enunciations of each proposition into one is good; and the shortening
of the proofs, by omitting the repetitions so common in Euclid, is another improvement. The
use of the contra-positive of a proved theorem is introduced with advantage, in place of
the reductio ad absurdum; while the alternative (or, in some cases, substituted) proofs are
numerous, many of them being not only elegant but eminently suggestive. The notes at the
end of the book are of great interest, and much of the matter is not easily accessible. The
collection of exercises, ‘of which there are nearly eight hundred,’ is another feature which will
commend the book to teachers. To sum up, we think that this work ought to be read by
every teacher of Geometry; and we make bold to say that no one can study it without gaining
valuable information, and still more valuable suggestions.”

From the Journal of Education, Sept. 1, 1883.

”In the text of the propositions, the author has adhered, in all but a few instances, to
the substance of Euclid’s demonstrations, without, however, giving way to a slavish following
of his occasional verbiage and redundance. The use of letters in brackets in the enunciations
eludes the necessity of giving a second or particular enunciation, and can do no harm. Hints
of other proofs are often given in small type at the end of a proposition, and, where necessary,
short explanations. The definitions are also carefully annotated. The theory of proportion,
Book V., is given in an algebraical form. This book has always appeared to us an exquisitely
subtle example of Greek mathematical logic, but the subject can be made infinitely simpler
and shorter by a little algebra, and naturally the more difficult method has yielded place to
the less. It is not studied in schools, it is not asked for even in the Cambridge Tripos; a few
years ago, it still survived in one of the College Examinations at St. John’s, but whether the
reforming spirit which is dominant there has left it, we do not know. The book contains a
very large body of riders and independent geometrical problems. The simpler of these are
given in immediate connexion with the propositions to which they naturally attach; the more
difficult are given in collections at the end of each book. Some of these are solved in the book,
and these include many well-known theorems, properties of orthocentre, of nine-point circle,
&c. In every way this edition of Euclid is deserving of commendation. We would also express
a hope that everyone who uses this book will afterwards read the same author’s ‘Sequel to
Euclid,’ where he will find an excellent account of more modern Geometry.”

NOW READY, Price 6s.,

A KEY to the EXERCISES in the ELEMENTS of EUCLID.

215
 Typographical Errors corrected in Project Gutenberg edition

p. 29. “Def. viii.—When a right line intersects . . . ” in original, amended

to “Def. vii” in sequence.
p. 37. 12 “bisects the parallellogram” in original, amended to match every
other occurrence as “parallelogram”.
p. 54. “△ACH is half the rectangle AC . AH (I. Cor. 1)” in original. The
reference is to Prop. I. of the current book and misnumbered, it should be (i.
Cor. 2).
p. 55. “The parallelogram CM is equal to DE [I. xliii., Cor. 3];” in original,
amended to “Cor. 2” following MS. correction: there is no Cor. 3.
p. 57. “On CB describe the square CBEF I. [xlvi.].” in original, clearly
meant to read [I. xlvi.].
p. 71. “The remainiug parts of the line” in original, obvious error amended
to “remaining”.
p. 74. “that which is nearest to the line throuyh the centre” in original,
obvious error amended to “through”.
p. 79. “Then this line [I., Cor. 1]” in original. The reference is to Prop. I. of
the current book, so it should be [i., Cor. 1].
p. 80. “OA is equal to OC [I., Def. xxii.]” in original. The reference should
be [I., Def. xxxii.].
p. 85. “the four points A, C, D, B are concylic” in original, evidently in-
tended is “concyclic”.
p. 88. as p. 79.
p. 95. “Through tho point E” in original, obvious error amended to “the”.
p. 96., p. 98. “the points A, B, C, D are concylic” in original, as p. 85.
p. 98. “(Ex. 2.) . . . or touchlng a given file and a given circle.” in original,
obvious error amended to “touching”.
p. 99. “21. What is the locus of the middle points . . . ” in original, amended
to “31.” in sequence.
p. 100. In (21) “the if then line DE intersect the chords . . . ” in original,
garbled phrase amended to “then if the”.
p. 101. In (44) “these circle sintersect” in original, misplaced space amended
to “these circles intersect”.
p. 106. “4. The point of bisection (1) of the line (OP )” in original, from the
diagram and following discussion this should be (I).
p. 108. Prop. IX. “About a given circle (ABCD) to describe a circle.” in
original, clearly this is nonsense and must mean “About a given square”.
p. 111. “Then the traingles ABO, CBO” in original, obvious error amended
to “triangles”.
p. 116. In (52) “and also en equilateral circumscribed polygon” in original,
wrong letter amended to “an”.
p. 134. Heading “PROP. XXV.—Problem.” in original, the preamble to
this book says that every Proposition in it is a Theorem and this one seems to
be no exception, so amended.

216
 p. 137. Reference “[I.]” is to Proposition I. of current book, amended to “[i.]”
(4 times).
p. 138 sqq. Reference “[II.]” is to Proposition II. of current book, amended
to “[ii.]” (4 times).
p. 140. Prop V. header “subtended bg the homologous sides” in original,
obvious error amended to “by”.
p. 148. Reference “[XVI.]” corrected to “[xvi.]”.
p. 151. “From the construction is is evident . . . ” in original, obvious error
amended to “it is”.
p. 166. “20. Find a poiat O” in original, obvious error amended to “point”.
p. 176. “the lines GH, GK each perpendiclar to EF ” in original, obvious
error amended to “perpendicular”.
p. 188. “O” when associated with a lower case letter was wrongly printed as
o, which is not defined. These have been corrected (3 times).
p. 194. Reference “[VI., Cor. 6]” corrected to “[vi., Cor. 6]”.

217
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ELEMENTS OF EUCLID ***

***** This file should be named 21076-t.tex or 21076-t.zip *****

***** or 21076-pdf.pdf or 21076-pdf.pdf *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
https://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/0/7/21076/

Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
United States without permission and without paying copyright
royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free

distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase ‘Project
Gutenberg’), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project

Gutenberg-tm electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm

electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
1.E.8.

1.B. ‘Project Gutenberg’ is a registered trademark. It may only be

used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (‘the

Foundation’ or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other

immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
on which the phrase ‘Project Gutenberg’ appears, or with which the
phrase ‘Project Gutenberg’ is associated) is accessed, displayed,
performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is

derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase ‘Project
Gutenberg’ associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted

with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm

License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this

electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
other than ‘Plain Vanilla ASCII’ or other format used in the official
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original ‘Plain
Vanilla ASCII’ or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing

access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
provided that:

* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
Section 4, ‘Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation.’

* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by email) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
works.

* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of

any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.

* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project

Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable

effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
contain ‘Defects,’ such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the ‘Right

of Replacement or Refund’ described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a

defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you--‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied

warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of

electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the

assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm’s
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary

Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit

501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,

Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website
and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg

Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without

widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating

charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we

have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make

any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project

Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed

editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,

including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.